IMPROVEMENT OF QUALITY MANAGEMENT FOR

HIGHWAY AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION AND

MAINTENANCE, PHASE II

MANUAL FOR
LOAD RATING OF BRIDGES

2014

Department of Public Works and Highways

IMPROVEMENT OF QUALITY MANAGEMENT FOR HIGHWAY AND
BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE, PHASE II

MANUAL FOR
LOAD RATING OF BRIDGES

3RD EDITION
2014

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS

JAPAN INTERNATIONAL COOPERATION AGENCY

 Republic of the Philippines
DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS
OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY
Manila
 ACKNOWLEDGMENT

The 3rd Edition of MLRB which incorporates the User’s Manual of Computer-based
Program on Load Rating is one of several manuals improved by the Japan
International Cooperation Agency (JICA) with the Department of Public Works
and Highways (DPWH) during the implementation of the Technical Cooperation
Project for the Improvement of Quality Management for Highways and Bridge
Construction and Maintenance, Phase II (2011-2014).

COMMITTEE MEMBERS – IMPROVEMENT OF MLRB

Mr. Hideo Nagao -

Team Leader; Bridge Expert,
Japan International Cooperation Agency
Ms. Judy F. Sese, PhD. - Project Manager and OIC-Director,
Bureau of Research and Standards (BRS)
Ms. Carolina S. Canuel - Dep. Project Manager and Division Chief,
Dev. Planning Div. (DPD), Planning Service
Mr. Adriano Doroy - TWG Member; Assistant Director, Bureau of Design
Ms. Edna F. Meñez - TWG Member; Div. Chief, Bureau of Maintenance
Mr. Aristarco M. Doroy - TWG Member; Div. Chief, Bureau of Construction
Mr. Felipe S. Ramos - TWG Member; Div. Chief, TSD, BRS
Mr. Rufino D. Valiente - CWG Member; Engr. IV, Bureau of Design
Mr. Bobby Z. Fodulla - CWG Member; Engr. III, BRS
Mr. Emmanuel A. Adriano- CWG Member; Engr. III, DPD, Planning Service
Ms. Nelia I. Antonio - CWG Member; Div. Chief, Const. DIV. , CAR
Mr. Feliciano Espina - CWG Member; Engr. III, Negros Or. 1st DEO, RO VII
Ms. Rachel L. Lumapas - CWG Member; Engr. III, Const. Div., RO VII
Mr. Vicente R. Valle, Jr. - CWG Member; Engr. IV, MQCHD, RO VII
Mr. Alvin C. Cabueñas - CWG Member; Engr. III, MD, RO XI
Ms. Aurora M. Lacasandile - CWG Member; Engr. III, MQCHD, RO VII
Mr. Rodrigo A. Yago - JICA Team, Asst. Engr. 1

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 2nd Ed. ii

DPWH
 ABBREVIATIONS

ASM Allowable Stress Method

AASHTO American Association of State Highways Transportation
Officials
BIM Bridge Inspection Manual
BMS Bridge Management System
BOD Bureau of Design
BRS Bureau of Research and Standards
CBPLR Computer-Based Program on Load Rating of Bridges
DEO District Engineering Office
DPWH Department of Public Works & Highways
GVW Gross Vehicle Weight
JICA Japan International Cooperation Agency
LFM Load Factor Method
LRFM Load and Resistant Factor Method
LR Load Rating
MCEB Manual for Condition Evaluation Bridges
MLRB Manual for Load Rating of Bridges
PCBG Prestressed Concrete Box Girder
PCDG Prestressed Concrete Deck Girder
PCG Prestressed Concrete Girder
PWRI Public Works Research Institute
RA Republic Act
RC Reinforce Concrete
RCBG Reinforce Concrete Box Girder
RCDG Reinforce Concrete Deck Girder
RCFS Reinforce Concrete Flat Slab
RCS Reinforce Concrete Slab
RF Rating Factor
RO Regional Office
SIG (NCS) Steel I-Girders with Non- Composite Concrete Slab
SIG (CCS) Steel I-Girder with Composite Concrete Slab
SBG Steel Box Girder
SDG Steel Deck Girder
SDT Steel Deck Truss
STT Steel Through Truss

iii Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Foreword ........................................................................................................................ i
Acknowledgment ......................................................................................................... ii
Abbreviations................................................................................................................. iii
Table of Contents .......................................................................................................... iv

Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................... 1

1.1 Purpose of the Manual ............................................................... 1
1.2 Scope of the Manual ................................................................... 1
1.3 The DPWH BMS - Bridge Inspection Manual ............................ 2
1.4 Load Carrying Capacity of Bridges .......................................... 6
1.5 Load Rating Considerations ...................................................... 8
1.6 Load Rating Procedure .............................................................. 9

Chapter 2 ENGINEERING AND IN-DEPTH INSPECTION FOR LOAD RATING ......... 11

2.1 Introduction ................................................................................. 11
2.2 Considerations for In-Depth Inspection...................................... 11
2.3 Procedure for In-Depth Inspection ............................................. 12
2.4 Causes of Defects and Damages in Bridge Structures .......... 14
2.5 Visual Inspection ......................................................................... 22
2.6 Damage-Prone Members .......................................................... 23
2.7 Damage Rating and Condition States ...................................... 23

Chapter 3 LOAD RATING .......................................................................................... 25

3.1 Load Rating Principles ................................................................ 25
3.2 Load Rating Method .................................................................. 26
3.3 Load Rating Levels ...................................................................... 30
3.4 Loadings ....................................................................................... 31
3.5 Material Properties and Nominal Resistance or Capacity (R) 35
3.6 Rating Bridge Decks ..................................................................... 40
3.7 Rating Reinforced Concrete Girder Bridges ........................... 41
3.8 Rating Prestressed Concrete Girder Bridges ........................... 43
3.9 Rating Steel Bridges .................................................................... 44
3.10 Rating Truss Bridges ..................................................................... 45
3.11 Rating Bridges Without Plans ..................................................... 47
3.12 Load Posting ................................................................................ 48
3.13 Reporting and Documentation ................................................ 51

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. iv

DPWH
 Page

Chapter 4 LOAD RATING EXAMPLES ....................................................................... 57

4.1 General ......................................................................................... 57
4.2 Description ................................................................................... 58
4.2.1 Reinforced Concrete Flat Slab Bridge ……………………… 58
4.2.1.1 Simple ................................................................................... 58
4.2.1.2 Continuous .......................................................................... 60
4.2.2 Reinforced Concrete Deck Girder Bridge .......................... 62
4.2.2.1 Simple ................................................................................... 62
4.2.2.2 Continuous .......................................................................... 64
4.2.3 Pre-stressed Concrete Deck Girder Bridge ........................... 66
4.2.3.1 Simple ................................................................................... 66
4.2.3.2 Continuous .......................................................................... 68
4.2.4 Steel I - Girder Bridge ........................................................... 70
4.2.4.1Simple .................................................................................... 70
4.2.4.2 Continuous .......................................................................... 72
4.2.5 Reinforced Concrete Deck Slab ........................................... 74

Chapter 5 COMPUTER-BASED PROGRAM ON LOAD RATING............................... 77

5.1 Purpose of the Computer-based Program .............................. 77
5.2 Scope of the Computer-based Program ................................ 77
5.3 Procedure of the Computer-based Program ......................... 78

Appendix I Damage-Prone Members ................................................................. 81

Bridge Inspection Points by Structure Type ...................................... 83
Bridge Inspection Points by Damage Type ...................................... 99

Appendix II Load Rating Examples ......................................................................... 111

Example 1: Reinforced Concrete FLAT Slab Bridge ....................... 115

Example 1-1: Simple ........................................................................ 116
Computer based calculation ............................................ 116
Manual calculation ............................................................. 127
Example 1-2: Continuous ............................................................... 134
Computer based calculation ............................................ 134
Manual calculation ............................................................. 145

Example 2: Reinforced Concrete Deck Girder Bridge ................... 155

Example 2-1: Simple ........................................................................ 156
Computer based calculation ............................................ 156
Manual calculation ............................................................. 167
Example 2-2: Continuous ............................................................... 176

v Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 Page

Computer based calculation ............................................ 176

Manual calculation ............................................................. 187

Example 3: Pre-stressed Concrete Deck Girder Bridge ................. 199

Example 3-1: Simple ................................................................. 200
Computer based calculation ........................................ 200
Manual calculation ......................................................... 212
Example 3-2: Continuous ......................................................... 222
Computer based calculation ........................................ 222
Manual calculation ......................................................... 234

Example 4: Steel I - Girder Bridge .................................................. 249

Example 4-1: Simple ................................................................. 250
Computer based calculation ........................................ 250
Manual calculation ......................................................... 257
Example 4-2: Continuous ......................................................... 264
Computer based calculation ........................................ 264
Manual calculation ......................................................... 271

Example 5: Reinforced Concrete Deck Slab .............................. 279

Computer based calculation ........................................ 280
Manual calculation ......................................................... 286

Appendix III Rating Calculation Aids ..................................................................... 293

Appendix IV Load Posting Sign ............................................................................... 317

Appendix V User’s Manual – Load Rating Computer-Based Program ………… 321

List of Tables

Table 1.3-1 Bridge Inspection Types and Responsibility ..................................... 3

Table 1.3.-2 Bridge Attribute Condition States ...................................................... 4
Table 1.3.-3 Bridge Load Rating Schedule ............................................................ 5
Table 2.4-1 Factors Causing Damages ................................................................. 15
Table 2.5-1 Items to be Observed in the Field ..................................................... 22
Table 2.5-2 Inspection and Examination Contents ............................................. 23
Table 3.2-1 Failure Criteria for Structures................................................................ 29
Table 3.4-1 Roadway Width and Number of Traffic Lanes ................................. 33
Table 3.5-1 Material Properties Used When Actual Grade of Material is Unknown .......... 36
Table 3.12-1 Maximum Allowable Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as per RA No. 8794**…... 50
Table 3.12-2 Load Posting Vehicles ......................................................................... 52

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. vi

DPWH
List of Figures

Figure 1.6-1 Flowchart of Load Rating Procedure ............................................. 10

Figure 2.3-1 Flowchart of In-Depth Inspection Procedure for Load Rating ……………… 13
Figure 2.3-2 Damage Symbols ............................................................................. 14
Figure 2.4-1 External Factors Causing Damages to Bridge .............................. 16
Figure 2.4-2 Damage by Fire ................................................................................ 16
Figure 2.4-3 Drying Shrinkage ............................................................................... 17
Figure 2.4-4 Temperature Change ...................................................................... 17
Figure 2.4-5 Damage Due to Salt Penetration ................................................... 18
Figure 2.4-6 Concrete pH and Corrosion Rate .................................................. 18
Figure 2.4-7 Rebar Loss of Section ....................................................................... 18
Figure 2.4-8 Concrete reaction to Acid Attack ................................................. 19
Figure 2.4-9 Mechanism for Alkali-Silica Reactions ........................................... 20
Figure 2.4-10 Process of Carbonation in Concrete ............................................. 20
Figure 2.4-11 Honeycombs, Rocket Pockets and Air Voids ............................... 21
Figure 2.4-12 Concrete Segregation ..................................................................... 21
Figure 3.2-1 Typical Shear and Flexure Failure Modes for Concrete Bridges ... 29
Figure 3.2-2 Typical Shear and Flexure Failure Modes for Steel Bridges ........................... 30
Figure 3.4-1 Rating Live Load ............................................................................... 32
Figure 3.4-2 Typical Legal Loads Used for Load Posting ................................... 34
Figure 3.12-1 Flowchart of Load Posting Guideline ............................................. 51
Figure 3.13-1 Sample Load Posting Sign ............................................................... 53
Figure 3.13-2 Load Rating Report and Documentation ..................................... 54
Figure 3.13-3 Load Rating Summary Sheet .......................................................... 55
Figure 4.2-1 RCFS Simple Bridge (Example 1-1) .................................................. 58
Figure 4.2-2 Load rating Summary Sheet for Example 1-1 ................................ 59
Figure 4.2-3 RCFS Continuous Bridge (Example 1-2) ......................................... 60
Figure 4.2-4 Load Rating Summary Sheet for Example 1-2 ............................... 61
Figure 4.3-1 RCDG Bridge (Example 2-1) ............................................................ 62
Figure 4.3-2 Load Rating Summary Sheet for Example 2-1 ............................... 63
Figure 4.3-3 RCDG Bridge (example 2-2) ........................................................... 64
Figure 4.3-4 Load Rating Summary Sheet for Example 2-2 ............................... 65
Figure 4.4-1 PC Deck Girder Bridge (Example 3-1) ............................................ 66
Figure 4.4-2 Load Rating Summary Sheet for Example 3-1 ............................... 67
Figure 4.4-3 PC Deck Girder Bridge (Example 3-2) ............................................ 68
Figure 4.4-4 Load Rating Summary Sheet for Example 3-2 ............................... 69
Figure 4.5-1 Steel Girder Bridge (Example 4-1) .................................................. 70
Figure 4.5-2 Load Rating Summary Sheet for Example 4-1 ............................... 71
Figure 4.5-3 Steel Girder Bridge (Example 4-2) .................................................. 72
Figure 4.5-4 Load Rating Summary Sheet for Example 4-2 ............................... 73
Figure 4.6-1 RCDG Bridge (Example 5) ............................................................... 74
Figure 4.6-2 Load Rating Summary Sheet for Example 5 .................................. 75
Figure 5.3-1 Damage Evaluation in this Program .............................................. 79
Figure 5.3-2 Sample Procedure Sheet in the User's Manual ............................. 80

vii Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 Chapter 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL

The purpose of the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges (MLRB) is to guide and
provide the Department of Public Works and Highways (DPWH) and others with
uniformity in the procedures and policies for determining the load capacity and
load rating of existing bridges.

In any event, this Manual should not overrule sound engineering judgment.

1.2 SCOPE OF THE MANUAL

This Manual has been prepared to provide the DPWH with a load rating process
consistent with the objectives of the DPWH Bridge Management System. The
Manual is focused on load rating (or load capacity determination) procedures
with a section on engineering and in-depth inspection of existing bridges. A
section is devoted to provide examples in performing load rating calculations.

Chapter 1 provides the necessary background and information on load rating of

bridges including rating considerations, procedures and methodology. In order to
assess the existing capacity of bridge components or attributes, it is necessary to
determine the existing condition of these members using more detailed inspection
and condition evaluation. A discussion on engineering and in-depth inspection
and condition evaluation of bridge components is presented in Chapter 2.
Chapter 3 deals with the process and procedure of load rating including loadings
used for load rating, rating guidelines, load posting and reporting. Computer-
based Program on load rating is presented in Chapter 4. Examples for load rating
calculations are presented in Chapter 5.

The provisions of this Manual apply to all conventional concrete and steel highway
bridge structures in accordance with the DPWH Design Guidelines and the
AASHTO Standards. Special bridges and bridges other than highway bridges may
need special provisions not covered in this Manual. General guidance is given in
this Manual but more complex procedures must be used to determine actual load
rating.

This Manual is prepared with reference to the following:

• Bridge Management System - Bridge Inspection Manual (Referred to as BMS-
BIM), Department of Public Works and Highways, January 2004.
• Bridge Inspection Manual (Draft), (PWRI Text No. 2651) Public Works
Research Institute, Ministry of Construction in Japan, July 1988. (Referred to
as BIM-PWRI)
• Manual for Condition Evaluation of Bridges, 2nd Ed. (Referred to as MCEB),
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, 2000.
• Design Guidelines, Criteria and Standards - Bridge Design, DPWH & JICA,
March 2004.
• Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, 17th Ed., AASHTO, 2002.
• An Approach to Inspection and Condition Evaluation of Bridges (Referred to
as AICEB), JICA, DPWH & KEI, November 2003.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges,3 rd Ed. 1

DPWH
 • Revision of Bridge Management System – Bridge Inspection Manual
(Referred to as Rev BMS-BIM), Department of Public Works and Highways,
December 2007.
• Bridge Engineering Inspection Manual, DPWH and JICA, 2014

For all matters not covered by this Manual, the current DPWH and AASHTO
Specifications and Standards should be used as a guide. However, if bridge
member behavior is not consistent with the controlling specifications, such
deviations based on the known behavior of the member may be used but should
be fully documented.

1.3 THE DPWH BMS - BRIDGE INSPECTION MANUAL

The Bridge Management System (BMS) was established by the DPWH to provide a
computer based system for the management of Philippine national bridges. The
function of the BMS is to provide the DPWH with a “comprehensive and
sustainable bridge inspection program to provide sufficiently accurate, consistent
and timely information to planners and maintenance personnel for all bridges
which are part of the national road network, utilizing computer applications being
procured by DPWH”.

Under the BMS system, a Bridge Inspection Manual is prepared “to provide bridge
inspectors and others with guidelines and procedures to undertake effective
bridge inspections”.

The Bridge Inspection Manual contains standardized bridge inspection procedures

and requirements for all types of bridge inspections undertaken by the DPWH and
is intended to be utilized as a training guide and reference manual for the DPWH
bridge inspectors. This will ensure that consistent inspection reports are delivered
from all bridge inspections.

The 2004 BMS-Bridge Inspection Manual was revised in 2007 reducing the
inspection types from seven (7) to five (5) types to avoid overlapping activities and
simplify the required actions. The 2007 Revised BMS-Bridge Inspection Manual
which focuses on the detailed procedures for condition survey and rating, will
provide a clear definition on how to assess bridge condition using a more specific
defect measurement guidelines and a bridge condition rating card.

1.3.1 Bridge Inspection Types

The revised BMS - Bridge Inspection Manual (2007) focuses on five major Bridge
Inspection Types to assess bridge conditions based on defects or damages, as
listed in Table 1.3-1. The Inspection Types are categorized into:

• Scheduled Inspection – required to be undertaken on a set of

frequency to provide data for DPWH functions, and
• Non-scheduled Inspection – undertaken only when required because of
the addition of new bridges or due to calamities.

Bridge Inspection Types 1 is essentially a visual inspection, without requiring

specialty in bridge engineering, to check for obvious defects and ensure that
regular planned maintenance is being properly undertaken.

2 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 Bridge Inspection Type 2 or Condition Inspection will monitor and rate the
condition of bridges that becomes a basis for identifying maintenance needs,
forecasting future bridge intervention requirements and estimating funding
requirements.

Bridge Inspection Type 3 or Engineering Inspection is undertaken as follow-up to

bridge Condition Inspection when attribute defects are in condition state 2 or 3 in
any primary component/attribute or in any secondary component that has a
detrimental effect on the structural performance of the bridge. This will provide
information for future design of the required major maintenance works.

Bridge Inspection Type 4 or Emergency Inspection is undertaken in response to

calamities. This will confirm bridge safety following a calamity or determine the
necessary work to ensure safety and restore the bridge function.

Bridge Inspection Type 5 or Inventory Bridge Inspection is an initial inspection

performed to obtain inventory data on bridges.

Table 1.3-1 Bridge Inspection Types and Responsibility

TYPE NAME FREQUENCY PURPOSE RESPONSIBILITY
SCHEDULED BRIDGE INSPECTIONS
- Scheduling of routine maintenance, check on
1 Routine Monthly bridge condition to ensure the safety of bridges DEO
- To detect defects of bridges at an early stage
- To obtain condition data on and major
maintenance needs of the bridge for operation
2 Condition Annual DEO/RO
of the BMS
- To assess and rate condition of the structure

NON-SCHEDULED BRIDGE INSPECTIONS

- To investigate the major maintenance needs of
defective bridge identified by a condition
inspection or other inspection
- To evaluate the needs for improvement works
- To decide on appropriate countermeasure
DEO / RO / BOD /
As - To determine the safe load capacity of the
3 Engineering BRS / BMS Team
Required bridge and other Entities
- To monitor progress of any damage
- To test and evaluate strength or quality of
materials
- To evaluate structural strength and seismic
vulnerability
- To determine emergency work to bridges after
occurrence of calamities, ensure safety of
bridges
- To obtain damage information to evaluate
As necessity of urgent repairs
4 Emergency DEO/RO
Required - To determine severity of structural damage to
bridges
- To confirm safety of bridges and vehicular
traffic
- To evaluate structural strength
As - To obtain/update bridge inventory data for the
5 Inventory DEO/RO
Required RBIA and the BMS

NOTES: RO - Regional Office DEO - District Engineering Office

BOD - Bureau of Design BRS - Bureau of Research and Standards

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges,3 rd Ed. 3

DPWH
 Although the above inspections can identify defects or damages with condition
ratings for the bridge attributes, its primary objective is to prepare maintenance
needs with corresponding estimated costs for funding requirements. Moreover,
the manual does not provide a basis for determining the safe load capacity of the
bridge and the need for load posting. In this regard, this Manual will supplement
the BMS-BIM with a guide for load rating of existing bridges and recommends load
posting when necessary.

1.3.2 Condition Rating of Bridge Attributes

The 2007 revised BMS - Bridge Inspection Manual enumerates and describes
common material defects or damages of bridge components/attributes (referred
to as members in this manual) with corresponding condition state criteria.
Although the condition evaluation state of bridge components/elements depends
on many factors, the bridge attributes condition states are developed using the
evaluation rating, as presented in Table 1.3-2.

As seen in Table 1.3-2, the Condition States are rated from 0 to 3 with 0 being the
good condition state of the attribute. Although maintenance actions are
recommended for each condition state, load posting is not mentioned as an
alternative option for the action.

It should be noted that bridges exhibiting progressive or advanced stage of

deterioration or damage should be checked thoroughly as to the safe load
capacity and load posted, if necessary.

Table 1.3-2 Bridge Attribute Condition States

CONDITION
DESCRIPTION ACTION
STATE

0 Attribute is in good condition with little or no

No action required
(Good) deterioration.

Attribute shows deterioration of a minor nature to the Major maintenance

1
primary supporting material and is showing first signs of is required within 10
(Fair)
being affected. years
Attribute shows advancing deterioration and loss of Major maintenance
2*
protection to the supporting material, minor loss of is required within 2
(Poor)
section years
Attribute shows advanced deterioration, loss of
Immediate major
3* effective section to the primary supporting material,
maintenance is
(Bad) and is acting differently to design or is showing signs of
required
overstress

*When Condition State is 2 or 3, a follow-up inspection (Engineering Inspection) is

conducted to provide more information on the degree of deterioration or damage
which will be used to determine the necessary maintenance requirements or intervention.
At this stage, the bridge stability may be affected so that determination of the safe load
capacity of the bridge is needed. The vehicle live load that will be allowed to pass
through the bridge may have to be limited when the load capacity is reduced from the
original design live load. This Manual will provide the necessary guide in performing load
capacity determination and load rating.

4 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 1.3.3 When to Perform Load Rating

The need to perform Load Rating calculations for the bridge is indicated in Table
1.3-3. As shown in Table 1.3-3, it is not necessary to perform Load Rating of bridges
under Inspection Types 1 and 2. However, recommendations to perform load
rating calculations can be specified at these inspection stages if certain bridge
conditions require load capacity reevaluation.

The following condition requires load rating evaluation:

 When the structural configuration was changed from the one originally
intended by design (e.g. changes in support conditions, changes in
structural members, etc.),
 When the dead load condition was modified due to repair, rehabilitation,
or other reasons,
 When the bridge use or function is modified,
 When the overall condition of bridge is poor or bad, or
 When engineering judgment requires a need for safe load capacity
reevaluation.

Since Engineering Inspection is performed when Overall Condition of bridge is poor

or bad, it will be necessary to perform load rating to determine the safe load
capacity of the bridge prior to maintenance or restoration works. This will ensure
public safety and prevent loss of structure.

Table 1.3-3 Bridge Load Rating Schedule

INSPECTION
LOAD RATING REMARKS
TYPE NAME
Load Rating calculation is not
1 Routine
necessary since the objective is to
Not Performed identify maintenance needs.
2 Condition *Recommendation for the need for
Load Rating is given at this stage.

Since Overall Condition is poor or

Performed when Overall bad which may affect bridge
3 Engineering
Condition is poor or bad stability, the safe load capacity of
the bridge should be verified.

If the bridge Overall Condition is

Performed when Overall poor or bad after an emergency or
4 Emergency
Condition is poor or bad a calamity, Load Rating should be
performed.

This initial investigation may require

Performed when Required verification of the safe load
5 Inventory
by DPWH capacity of the bridge in order to
determine its initial Load Rating.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges,3 rd Ed. 5

DPWH
 Load Rating calculations shall be performed during an Emergency Inspection
when the Condition State of any attribute is 2 or more.

For bridges designed prior to current design requirements, load rating evaluation is
needed to check its safe load capacity. This is usually done during the Inventory
Inspection to obtain or update bridge inventory data.

1.4 LOAD CARRYING CAPACITY OF BRIDGES

The load-carrying capacity is defined below, as stated in the “Maintenance and

Management of Roadways and Bridges, AASHTO 1999”.

Each bridge has an estimated capability to carry a certain total load limit. A
bridge is designed for a specific load, and there is an estimated load at which the
bridge is expected to fail (ultimate strength load). The ratio of the two loads is the
factor of safety estimated to exist in the bridge.

(Estimated Failure Load)

Factor of Safety =
(Design Load)

The “capacity” of a bridge is the sum total of the various loads that a bridge can
safely carry in its existing condition or state. The various loads on a bridge may
include the following:

 Dead Load:

This is defined as the load from the weight of the beams and deck and all of the
structure above the piers and abutments upon which the vehicular and
pedestrian traffic weight is supported. Some elements of the bridge included in
the dead load are as follows:

• Wearing courses.
• Structural decks.
• Structural members.
• Curbs, sidewalks, railings, and fencing.
• Utility pipes, conduits, lighting masts, and traffic signal hardware.

The dead load may be significantly altered by the removal or addition of such
elements during the bridge maintenance process, thereby reducing (or
increasing) the bridge capacity to carry a specified live load. When considering
the foundation support of the bridge, the piers (and the footings, if piers are
supported by footing rather than piles) must be included in the dead load. That is,
at whatever level within a bridge structure the capacity is estimated, all elements
of the structure permanently in place are included in the dead load.

 Live Load:

Live load includes the weight of vehicles, pedestrians, and other traffic. Highway
loadings used in establishing load-carrying capacity will be the standard DPWH (or
AASHTO) vehicle loadings or the DPWH legal loads.

6 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
  Impact Load:

Impact Loads are dynamic loads resulting from vertical acceleration of vehicles. It
is estimated as a percentage of the live load according to the approved bridge
design and analysis process.

 Wind Load:

Pressure on the beams, trusses, and other parts of the bridge exposed to steady or
buffeting wind gusts. Sometimes this loading is significant for tall bridges and may
require a detailed engineering analysis to determine its effect. The total effect of
wind load depends upon the expected maximum wind velocity, the vertical area
of all bridge members in the side profile, and the shape of the section (using drag
coefficient).

 Longitudinal Forces:

Through acceleration and braking, traffic moving across a bridge can generate
forces parallel to the centerline or longitudinal axis of the bridge. Such forces are
often estimated to be 5% of the estimated live load.

 Thermal Forces:

Changes in temperatures create stresses and strains due to the thermal expansion
and contraction of bridge materials.

 Earth Pressures:

This includes soil pressure on abutments and other components of the bridge
against which any significant depth of earth fill rests. Additional pressure can build
up if weep holes (drainage openings) become clogged and do not drain the
hydrostatic pressure.

 Stream Forces:

Bridge piers must resist horizontal loads caused by water flowing around them.
During flood flow, this pressure can significantly increase. Allowing debris to build
up against a pier during flooding greatly increases this pressure.

 Earthquake Forces:

Bridges in earthquake zones are subject to potential vibration loadings from any
direction that the geologic earth crust plates may move during an earthquake
tremor.

Bridge capacity defines the capability of the bridge to carry the load from the
above various forces. However, in the load rating calculations to determine the
safe live load capacity of bridges, it is not necessary to include all the above
loadings which will be discussed in the next sections.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges,3 rd Ed. 7

DPWH
1.5 LOAD RATING CONSIDERATIONS

Bridge load rating provides a basis for determining the safe load capacity of the
bridge. Such load rating requires engineering judgment in determining the rating
value that will be used to assess the bridge soundness and safe use by establishing
the safe load capacity of the members. Bridge load rating calculations will be
based on the information of the most recent inspection indicating the present
condition of the bridge, including changes in structural condition due to repairs
and rehabilitation, dead load and member deterioration.
As part of every inspection cycle, bridge load ratings should be reviewed and
updated to reflect any relevant changes in condition or dead load noted during
the inspection.

The Manual will provide two load rating methods for the Operating and Inventory
Levels: (1) the Allowable Stress Method which is especially useful for comparison
with past practices, and (2) the Load Factor Method which is based on multiples of
the actual load.

1.5.1 Assumptions

The safe load capacity of a bridge is based on existing structural condition. To

maintain this capacity, it is assumed that the bridge is subjected to competent
inspections as often as the existing conditions of the structures require, and that
sound judgment will be exercised in determining an appropriate safety margin.

1.5.2 Substructure Consideration

It is a matter of good engineering sense to ensure that the calculated safe load
capacity can be supported by the existing substructure elements. Careful
attention should then be given to all elements of substructure for evidence of
instability that will affect its load-carrying capacity. All available information
including as-built plans should be checked to ensure that the substructure have at
least the capacity of the lowest rated superstructure member. If no information is
available, the engineer should judge the adequacy of substructure based on
observations of its condition and performance over time.

1.5.3 Safety Criteria

In general, the safety factors to be used shall be taken from this Manual. However,
certain cases where judgment must be exercised in evaluating a structure, safety
factors may be adjusted based on site and/or structure conditions as recorded in
the most recent inspection report. All data used in the determination of safety
factors should be fully documented.

1.5.4 Nonredundant Structures

Nonredundant structures are critical components whose failure would be

expected to result in the collapse of the bridge. Such bridge components may
exist that could become critical to load capacity calculations. Careful
consideration shall be given to nonredundant bridge component during load
rating of the bridge.

8 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
1.6 LOAD RATING PROCEDURE

The flowchart is presented in Figure 1.6-1. For bridges with complete maintenance
and inspection records and information, the load rating will consider the present
condition of the bridge members. However, when the bridge data are not
available, field survey and presumption of original design is necessary.
Reconstruction of as-built plans may have to be done using the data gathered
from field survey and measurements. In cases where field measurement is difficult
to perform, presumption of original design will have to be performed by back
analysis using the original requirements of the code used during the design of the
bridge.

※ The process of load rating begins after bridge inspections and condition
evaluation with the need to perform load rating calculations decided based
on the actual condition of the bridge components or attributes. The decision
to perform load rating calculations is discussed in Section 1.3.3. When load
rating calculation is not necessary, usual bridge maintenance and inspection
procedure is conducted and the results documented and forwarded to the
DPWH BMS Unit for recording and filing.

※ Load rating calculations become necessary when:

 the condition states of the bridge attributes or components warrants
determination of a safe load capacity, or
 when changes in the original bridge structural system or configuration
was observed during the inspection, including changes in geometry or
dead load condition.

※ Data collection and in-depth inspection (Engineering Inspection) is then

conducted to obtain enough information that will be used for load rating.
Data includes As-Built Construction Drawings, Bridge Inventory, Inspection
Reports, Testing Results, Surveys, etc.

※ Structural modeling and analysis is then performed, with necessary sketches

and calculations on how the structure was modeled, assumptions, load
calculations and derivations, computer software documentation and sources
of information.
Dead load shall be modeled as accurately as possible. Member conditions
including damages and defects may or may not be reflected in the structural
model to determine redistribution of forces in the structural system (this will be
left to the discretion of the rater if the analysis model warrants the use of
existing member condition including deformation and changes in support
conditions to determine a more accurate force distribution). However,
member section damages and defects shall be reflected in calculating
member capacity or resistance.
Load rating vehicle shall be applied to determine the live load effects and
demand on the bridge (see Section 3.4 for the rating vehicles).
Load ratings are then evaluated at two levels – the Inventory Level and the
Operating Level. The methods that can be used for load rating evaluation
include the allowable stress, the load factor, and the load and resistance
factor methods. The results of the load rating evaluation will indicate the

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges,3 rd Ed. 9

DPWH
 present allowable live load and the maximum permissible live load of the
bridge. The details of these load rating methods are presented in Chapter 3.

※ A Load Rating Report (see Section 3.13) shall be prepared to document the
load rating calculations.

※ When Load Posting the bridge is necessary, it shall be made by the

Responsible Official of the DPWH.

※ All Reports and Documents shall then be forwarded to the BMS Unit for
recording and filing.

BRIDGE INSPECTION
• CONDITION
INSPECTION RESULTS

(OVERALL BRIDGE CONDITION IS

GOOD OR FAIR)
NO LOAD RATING
NECESSARY?

YES (OVERALL BRIDGE

CONDITION IS POOR
OR BAD)

PROCEED TO
ROUTINE COLLECT DATA AND
INSPECTION & CONDUCT BRIDGE
MAINTENANCE IN-DEPTH INSPECTION
(Refer to Fig 2.3-1)
• ENGINEERING

Computer- based Program PERFORM STRUCTURAL

MODELING, ANALYSIS &
LOAD RATING
RATING LIVE • BRIDGE ANALYSIS MODEL
LOAD • MEMBER CONDITION
• DEMAND FORCES/STRESSES
• MEMBER CAPACITY/
RESISTANCE
POSTING LIVE • LOAD RATING CALCULATION
LOAD

LOAD POST YES LOAD

BRIDGE POSTING
NECESSARY?

NO

COMPLETE LOAD
RATING REPORT &
DOCUMENTATION

SUBMIT REPORT TO
BMS UNIT FOR
RECORDING & FILING

Figure 1.6-1 Flowchart of Load Rating Procedure

10 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 Chapter 2
ENGINEERING AND IN-DEPTH INSPECTION FOR LOAD RATING

2.1 INTRODUCTION

The 2007 Revised Bridge Management System - Bridge Inspection Manual (BMS-
BIM) describes in detail the general processes and procedures of bridge Inspection
Types 2 and 3. It also provides a more comprehensive damage or defect
assessment through a more definite condition rating criteria.

In order to perform bridge load rating, it is necessary to get as much information as

possible on the actual condition of bridge attributes and components. These data
will be used to prepare structural analysis model that will reflect the existing
conditions of the major components of the bridge including geometry, damages,
defects, support conditions, etc. Such information can be obtained by an
engineering inspection or in-depth inspection.

The in-depth inspection of the bridge will be considered as equivalent to the

Engineering Inspection, Type 3 of the revised BMS-BIM. The method of inspection
discussed in this Chapter shall be a supplement to the Engineering Inspection
(Type 3) described in the revised 2007 BMS-BIM. Refer to the DPWH-JICA Bridge
Engineering Inspection Manual developed by the Technical Cooperation Project
on Improvement of Quality Management for Highway and Bridge Construction
and Maintenance, Phase II, in 2011-2014.

2.2 CONSIDERATIONS FOR IN-DEPTH INSPECTION

An Engineering or In-Depth Inspection is a close-up, hands-on inspection of one or

more members above or below the water level, usually performed as a follow-up
inspection to the Routine, Condition or Emergency Inspection to better pinpoint
any deficiency(ies) found.

Traffic safety management signs/devices and special equipment, such as under-

bridge inspection equipment, staging and workboats, should be provided when
needed. When appropriate, or when necessary to ascertain the existence or
extent of deficiencies or damages, non-destructive field tests and/or other
material tests may need to be performed.

The inspection shall include load rating to assess the residual capacity of the
member/s, depending on the extent of damage or deterioration. Non-destructive
field tests and/or other material tests may be performed, if necessary.

The following points should be kept in mind in conducting the in-depth inspection:
i) During the in-depth inspection, bridge components and elements
evaluated to be Condition State “3” in the initial inspection and require
urgent rehabilitation, shall be made a priority due to the urgent nature
of damages. The inspection is normally carried out after conducting a
temporary emergency repair of the damaged component or element.
However, the need for a permanent measure for repair, rehabilitation or
reconstruction of the bridge will be decided after a more detailed and
thorough investigation is done under the in-depth inspection stage.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 11

DPWH
 ii) For bridge components and elements evaluated to be Condition State
“2 or 3” in the initial inspection, the in-depth inspection shall be
conducted to provide data for judgment on the cause, scale and
progress of damages. This survey will then become the basis for judging
whether the bridge rehabilitation work is needed or not.
iii) For damages found to have a progressive tendency, the inspection shall
be continued to confirm the progress of damage for a certain period of
time.

2.3 PROCEDURE FOR IN-DEPTH INSPECTION

The purpose of the in-depth inspection is to get necessary information to:

 judge the need for improvement works,
 determine the safe load capacity of the bridge, and
 decide an adequate improvement method.

The flowchart of in-depth Inspection procedure for load rating is shown in Figure
2.3-1, where the need for the survey is based on the initial Condition Inspection
assessment. Desk survey is then performed to analyze and estimate the cause of
damage and clarify the objectives and the inspection items of the in-depth
Inspection to be conducted.

During the desk survey, reference is made to the as-built plans, bridge records and
inspection reports previously conducted. It is important to note the previous
damages observed and the repair or rehabilitation conducted so that the
inspectors will be guided as to the present condition of the bridge.

The key to an effective, safe performance of any bridge inspection is proper

advance planning and preparation. The inspection plan should be developed
based on a review of the Bridge Record and may require a pre-inspection site visit.
It is advisable for the inspector to confer with the DPWH District or Regional Offices
regarding the bridges to be inspected since they are more familiar with the bridge
and may point out peculiarities which may not be apparent at the time of
inspection.

As much as possible, the bridge inspection should be scheduled at the time of the
year which offers the most suitable conditions for thorough inspections.
Substructures of bridges over streams are best inspected at times of low water and
structures requiring high climbing should be inspected during seasons when high
winds or extremes of temperature are not prevalent.

Bridge inspection equipment consists of those items used for access and those
used for actual inspection tasks. The methods and equipment used to gain access
to bridge members include ladders, power lift vehicles, power lift staging, rigging
and scaffolds, boats, and assisted free climbing.

In planning the inspection, a pre-inspection site visit by the Team Leader will be
helpful. If plans are available, the pre-inspection should be done with plans in
hand to allow preliminary verification of the structure configuration and details.

12 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 ESTIMATE SCALE AND CAUSE PLANNING &
RELEVANT
DESK SURVEY
DATA OF DAMAGE
(AT OFFICE)

IN-DEPTH
MEASUREMENTS CLOSE-UP INSPECTION
TESTING (AT SITE)
(NDT) INSPECTION

OTHER DIAGNOSIS &

EVALUATION AS PER (NDT: Non-Destructive Test)
TYPE 3-5 INSPECTION

BRIDGE STRUCTURAL CONDITION

MODELING AND ANALYSIS OF MEMBERS

DETERMINE SAFE LOAD

CAPACITY
(LOAD RATING)

Figure 2.3-1 Flowchart of In-Depth Inspection Procedure for Load Rating

The pre-inspection should determine the following points:

 site access – availability and means of,
 areas of potential concern which will:
• require close attention during subsequent inspections, and
• form the basis for decisions on timing, weather conditions, traffic
controls, and utility protections.

The in-depth Inspection shall then be conducted after all preparatory works have
been conducted including:
(a) review of all relevant data and information through desk survey activities,
(b) specification of inspection items and establishment of clear objectives of the
survey, and
(c) identification and estimation of the cause and extent of damages by
analysis of the following relevant materials:
i. damage location,
ii. design, construction and inspection records of members,
iii. damage records of members or elements caused by earthquake, fire,
flood, etc., and
iv. similar cases of damage including rehabilitation/repair.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 13

DPWH
 In conducting the in-depth inspection, it is necessary to prepare an inspection
guide showing the bridge components and elements to be inspected. Every joint
and element of the bridge shall be given a node number and name using symbols
or abbreviations to easily identify the joint and the element.

To simplify damage identification, symbols similar to those shown in Figure 2.3-2

can be used during inspection.

Damage Type Symbol Damage Type Symbol

Crack Honeycomb/Void

Spalling Rutting/Erosion

Exposed Rebar Water Leakage

Efflorescence Others

Figure 2.3-2 Damage Symbols

2.4 CAUSES OF DEFECTS AND DAMAGES IN BRIDGE STRUCTURES

In order to properly inspect a bridge, the inspector must be able to recognize the
various defects, damages or deterioration in bridge members and its components.
It will be more helpful if the inspector knows the causes of such defects and
damages and how to inspect them. This section will briefly discuss some of the
common defects and damages of bridge components and their causes.
Additional discussion on material defects can be found in the BMS-BIM. Refer also
to Appendix I for the inspection points on damage-prone members.

The causes of bridge damages may be almost always in conjunction with many
factors, making it difficult to specify the causes of such damages. In this section,
there are five (5) major factors or causes of damages which can be classified as to
either External or Internal factors as presented on Table 2.4-1.

In estimating the causes of damages, it will be necessary to consult with engineers

with sufficient experience in structural damage assessment. In some cases, high
engineering judgment may be required to estimate the cause and extent of
damages.

14 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 2.4.1 External Forces

Bridge members and components, once constructed, are always exposed to

external forces causing internal stresses to the members which, when the strength
or capacity is exceeded, may cause permanent damages.

Table 2.4-1 Factors Causing Damages

External Factors
(a) External Forces
(1) repeated loads such as overloaded vehicle
(2) increase in dead loads
(3) vehicle/vessel collisions
(4) support settlement (uneven pressure)
(5) scour / erosion (by floods, heavy rains during typhoon)
(6) loads by earthquakes
(7) fire
(b) Environmental Factors
(8) change in temperature/drying shrinkage
(9) salt damage
(10) exposure to aggressive chemicals (acid attack)
(11) growth of vegetation on small spaces (e.g. cracks)

Internal Factors
(c) Material Deterioration
(12) alkali-silica reaction
(13) carbonation
(14) poor quality
(d) Fabrication / Construction Faults
(15) fabrication / construction faults
(16) poor waterproof / drainage facility

(e) Structural Factors

(15) structural deficiency

Figure 2.4-1 illustrates some common external factors that may cause permanent
damage to the bridge and its components. However, in relation to load rating of
bridges, bridge inspection should focus on the damages to superstructures caused
by increase in dead load, overloaded vehicles, vessel/vehicle collision and fire.
Such defects and damages lead to decrease in carrying capacity of the section
or member being rated.

In some instances, bridges may be exposed to fire caused by accidents.

Depending on the degree and duration of fire exposure, bridge components may
be severely damaged and becomes unsafe for public use. Figure 2.4-2 illustrates

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 15

DPWH
 damage to concrete structures caused by fire. Similarly, extreme temperature
due to fire causes loss of tensile and compressive capacity for steel structures
causing bridge members to become unstable.

OVERLOADED TRUCKS CAUSE

EXCESSIVE MEMBER STRESSES
ADDITIONAL DEAD LOAD
(OVERLAY) INCREASES
MEMBER DEMAND FORCES

FLEXURE SHEAR
CRACKS CRACKS

VESSEL COLLISION
CAUSES DAMAGES TO
PIERS AND GIRDERS
SCOUR/EROSION CAUSES
UNEVEN FOUNDATION
EXISTING RIVER BED
PRESSURES AND SETTLEMENT

ORIGINAL RIVER BED

EARTHQUAKE INCREASES DEMAND

FORCES ON PIERS AND FOUNDATIONS

Figure 2.4-1 External Factors Causing Damages to Bridge

Fire causes uneven volume changes in concrete

members resulting to distortion, cracking and
disintegration. Spalling occurs due to rapidly
expanding concrete surface.
SPALLING

COOL
SURFACE

Extreme heat causes aggregates to expand. While

moisture turns rapidly into steam, concrete begins to
disintegrate with localized bursting of small pieces of
concrete. Cement mortar turns to quicklime at
400 °C causing further concrete disintegration.
HIGH
TEMPERATURE Concrete spalling exposes reinforcing bars.

JOINT RESTRAINTS

The exposed reinforcing bars begins to expand

more rapidly than the surrounding concrete causing
buckling and loss of bond to adjacent concrete
REBAR BUCKLING
CRACKING FROM where the reinforcement is fully encased.
EXCESSIVE BENDING

Figure 2.4-2 Damage by Fire

16 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 2.4.2 Environmental Factors

Drying Shrinkage and Change in Temperature

Drying shrinkage and temperature change involves changes in concrete volume.

On exposure to atmosphere, concrete loses some of its original water through
evaporation and shrinks. If the member is restrained from moving, shrinkage
stresses build-up that may exceed concrete tensile strength and cause shrinkage
cracking (see Figure 2.4-3). However, changes in concrete length or volume
varies with the moisture content - i.e. concrete that dries out will shrink and
concrete that becomes moist will expand.

Similarly, changes in temperature of the concrete structure relates to volume

change. If the temperature varies within the member, e.g. temperature gradient,
this causes some section of the member to expand more than the other section
resulting to an upward or downward movement of the member (see Figure 2.4-4).
If the structural member is restrained, stress build-up occurs and can be very
significant and may result to tension cracks, shear cracks and buckling.

T1

UNIFORMLY-SPACED CRACKS

T2

RESTRAINED AND REINFORCED CONCRETE T1 > T2

Figure 2.4-3 Drying Shrinkage Figure 2.4-4 Temperature Change

Salt Damage

Chlorides can be introduced into the concrete when it comes into contact with
the environment containing chlorides such as sea water and aggregates with
chlorides or introduced deliberately as an accelerator. Penetration of chlorides
usually starts from the surface and moves inward with time. Eventually, the
chlorides in contact with the reinforcing bars will cause corrosion when moisture
and oxygen are present. As the rust build up in the reinforcement, tensile forces
generated by the expansion of the oxide cause concrete to crack and
delaminate. When cracking and delamination progress, accelerated corrosion
takes place because of easy access of corrosive salts, oxygen and moisture.
Figure 2.4-5 illustrates the damage due to salt penetration.

Defects of this nature cause section loss in reinforcing bars, thus decreasing the
section capacity against external forces.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 17

DPWH
 CORROSION BEGINS WHEN FURTHER PENETRATION OF CHLORIDES
CHLORIDES PENETRATE TO RESULTS IN PROGRESS OF CORROSION,
REINFORCING BARS DELAMINATION AND SPALLING.

MOISTURE
AND SALT SPALL/DELAMINATION SALT
OXYGEN

Figure 2.4-5 Damage Due to Salt Penetration

As discussed above, intrusion of chemicals including chlorides eliminates

reinforcing bar protection due to concrete alkalinity. This enables water and
oxygen to attack the reinforcing steel, forming iron oxides (commonly referred to
as rust). Corrosion, as an electrochemical process, increases the metal volume as
iron is oxidized into rust and easily occupies a volume of up to 10 times of the
corroded steel it replaces. The expansive volume creates internal pressure that
causes the concrete to yield producing wider cracks, delamination and spalling.
Early development of corrosion can be observed as rust stains on the surface of
concrete before spalling occur.

Accelerated corrosion will occur if the pH (alkalinity) is lowered (Figure 2.4-6) or if

aggressive chemicals (acidic) are introduced into the concrete. Again, structural
capacity of concrete member is affected by reinforcing bar corrosion and
cracking of the surrounding concrete (Figure 2.4-7).

CRACKS
0.8
ACIDIC ALKALINE
0.7

0.6
Corrosion Rate

0.5
(mm/yr)

0.4

0.3

0.2 LOSS OF
RUST
SECTION
0.1

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14

Concrete pH

Figure 2.4-6 Concrete pH and Figure 2.4-7 Rebar Loss of

Corrosion Rate Section

18 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 Exposure to Aggressive Chemicals (Acid Attack)

Certain aggressive chemicals in solution (including inorganic acids, organic acids,

alkaline solutions, salt solutions, etc.) will attack various constituents of concrete.
Such chemicals, in reaction with concrete constituents, may greatly damage the
concrete member in contact and reduce its strength considerably.

Acid attack on concrete leads to a reaction between the acid and the calcium
hydroxide of the hydrated Portland cement. The reaction produces water soluble
calcium compounds, which are leached away leading to concrete disintegration
(see Figure 2.4-8). However, it should be noted that certain acids dissolves
aggregates in the form of limestone or dolomitic aggregates.

ACID
ACID ATTACKS ACID DISSOLVES SILICA
ACID ACID
CONCRETE EXPOSING CEMENT MATRIX AND DOLOMITIC
AGGREGATES DISINTEGRATES, AGGEGATES
AGGREGATES FALL-OUT

Figure 2.4-8 Concrete Reaction to Acid Attack

2.4.3 Material Deterioration

Alkali-Silica Reaction (ASR)

Alkali-silica reaction, although slow by nature, may create expansion and severe
cracking of concrete structure and pavement. In this type of reaction, certain
aggregates such as reactive forms of silica react with potassium, sodium, and
calcium hydroxide from cement and form a gel around the reacting aggregates.
When the gel around the aggregate is exposed to moisture, it expands and
creates forces that cause tension cracks around the aggregate. Concrete
undergoing alkali-silica reactions exhibits signs of surface map cracking on the
exposed surfaces. Once cracking has formed, more moisture penetrates the
concrete and accelerates the alkali-silica reaction.

Figure 2.4-9 illustrates the mechanism of alkali-silica reaction.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 19

DPWH
 Gel

Reactive silica or silicate in When gel is exposed to Surface map cracking becomes
the aggregate reacts with moisture, swelling takes place. visible
alkali in the cement. Swelling causes surrounding
Following this, gel forms on concrete to expand, causing
aggregate surface with tension and compression
sufficient moisture. stresses.

Figure 2.4-9 Mechanism for Alkali-Silica Reactions

Carbonation

Carbonation of concrete is a reaction between acidic gases in the atmosphere

and the products of cement hydration. Carbon dioxide penetrates into the pores
of concrete by diffusion and reacts with the calcium hydroxide dissolved in the
pore water. As a result, the alkalinity of concrete is reduced to a value that lowers
the passive protection of the reinforcing steel and makes it susceptible to corrosion.
When the environment is acidic or mildly alkaline (loss of passive protection layer),
corrosion sets in if moisture and oxygen gains access into concrete. Carbonation
in good quality concrete is slow and it will not occur when concrete is constantly
under water.

Figure 2.4-10 illustrates the process of carbonation.

CORROSION IS
FASTER WHEN
pH IS LOWERED
LOWERING OF pH SPALL/
DELAMINATION
CO2 H2O
H2O CO2

CARBONATION
FRONT

Figure 2.4-10 Process of Carbonation in Concrete

20 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 2.4.4 Construction Faults

Honeycomb

Honeycombs are voids left in concrete due to failure of mortar to effectively fill the
spaces among coarse aggregate particles during construction. In some cases, as
seen in Figure 2.4-11, honeycombs are caused by improper vibration during
concrete placement, resulting in the segregation of the coarse aggregates from
the fine aggregates and cement paste. In most cases, honeycombs are the result
of insufficient vibration especially during hot temperature, where the entire
concrete mix does not physically reach the form surface. Rock pockets are
generally severe conditions of honeycombs where excessive volume of aggregate
is found.

CONCRETE
CHUTE

VIBRATOR

AIR VOIDS

LOW
COMPRESSIVE
STRENGTH

ROCK POCKET
MORTAR ESCAPES
THROUGH LOOSE
FITTING FORMS

Figure 2.4-11 Honeycombs, Rock Pockets and Air Voids

Honeycombs, rock pockets and air voids reduce the effective areas of the
concrete and when located in compressive zones, reduce the capacity of the
member. Inspectors should take note of such areas and include in the report so
that rating engineers (for Load Rating) can properly assess the section capacity.

Segregation

Concrete segregation results to non-uniform

distribution of its constituents. The problem is
attributed to high slump mixes, incorrect
methods of handling concrete and over-
vibration. Segregation causes the upper
surface of concrete to have excessive paste
and fines, which may also possess high water-
cement ratio, while the lower part contains
mostly coarse aggregates (see Figure 2.4-12). COARSE AGGREGATES FALL TO THE BOTTOM
The resultant concrete will lack consistency
and acceptable durability.
Figure 2.4-12 Concrete Segregation

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 21

DPWH
2.5 VISUAL INSPECTION

The visual inspection of bridge attributes and components play a major role in
identifying critical damages in the bridge structure during an in-depth inspection.
When performing the visual inspection, the damage types of bridge attributes and
components are identified and evaluated as to the degree of defect or damage.
The Condition State of the attribute is then evaluated as per BMS-BIM depending
on the degree or severity of the defect and the damage.

The visual inspection items shall include the primary and secondary members of
the bridge. Table 2.5-1 presents the items to be observed in the field while Table
2.5-2 shows the inspection and examination contents.

Table 2.5-1 Items to be Observed in the Field

Members Inspection Items
Main Girder, Cross Corrosion, Cracks, Looseness and Missing Member,
Steel Beam Stringer, Truss Break/Rupture, Painting Deterioration, Deformation, Abnormal
Chord, Steel Deck Vibration, Missing Bolts and Rivets.
Super- Cracks, Spalling, Exposed Rebars, Free Lime, Fracture,
Structure Main Girder Honeycombs, Discoloration/Deterioration, Movement/
Concrete Inclination/Settlement/Displacement
Cracks, Spalling, Exposed Rebars, Free Lime, Fracture,
Slab
Honeycombs, Chipping-off, Damage of Joint, Leakage.
Primary Members

Abutment Cracks, Spalling, Exposed Rebars, Free Lime, Honeycombs,

Sub-
Concrete Pier Wearing, Discoloration, Water Leakage, Loss of Member
Structure
Foundation Settlement, Movement, Inclination, Scour
Steel Bearing Corrosion, Cracks, Loosening, Falling, Failure, Discoloration,
Deformation, Settlement, Movement, Inclination
Rubber Bearing Discoloration, Water Leakage, Deformation, Failure
Bearing
Mortar Cracks, Failure
Corrosion Damage, Cracks, Loosening, Falling, Failure,
Anchor Bolt
Deformation
Restrainer Cable /
Unseating Steel Corrosion, Missing Bolts
Bar, Anchor Bar
Prevention
Cracks, Spalling, Exposed Rebars, Free Lime, Fracture,
System Concrete Shear Block
Honeycombs, Discoloration
Corrosion, Cracks, Looseness and Missing Member,
Steel Break/Rupture, Painting Deterioration, Deformation, Abnormal
Lateral Vibration, Missing Bolts and Rivets.
Bracing
Concrete Intermediate and Cracks, Spalling, Exposed Rebars, Free Lime, Fracture,
End Diaphragm Honeycombs, Discoloration
Corrosion, Cracks, Looseness and Missing Member,
Sway
Steel Break/Rupture, Painting Deterioration, Deformation, Abnormal
Bracing
Vibration, Missing Bolts and Rivets.
Corrosion, Cracks, Looseness and Missing Member,
Steel Break/Rupture, Painting Deterioration, Deformation, Abnormal
Secondary Members

Railing Vibration, Missing Bolts and Rivets.

Cracks, Spalling, Exposed Rebars, Free Lime, Honeycombs,
Concrete
Wearing, Discoloration, Leakage, Loss of Member
Median
Cracks, Spalling, Exposed Rebars, Free Lime, Fracture,
Strip Concrete
Honeycombs, Discoloration
Curbstone
Curb and Cracks, Spalling, Corrosion Damage, Free Lime, Honeycombs,
Concrete
Gutter Fracture
Pavement Asphalt Potholes, Cracks, Rutting, Leakage
Corrosion, Cracks, Loosening, Falling, Failure, Abnormal
Steel
Expansion Opening, Abnormal Sound, Deformation, Water Leakage
Joint Failure, Abnormal Opening, Abnormal Sound, Deformation,
Rubber
Loss of Member, Water Leakage
Corrosion, Cracks, Loosening, Falling, Failure, Discoloration,
Drainage Facility
Leakage, Deformation, Loss of Member.
Corrosion, Cracks, Loosening, Falling, Failure, Painting
Lighting
Deterioration, Deformation, Loss of Member.

22 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 Table 2.5-2 Inspection and Examination Contents
Examination Contents Inspection and Test Method Examination Items

Cracks Penetrant test Present Condition

Steel
Corrosion Visual inspection Present Condition

Cracks, Honeycombs, Photograph of damaged

Present Condition
Reinforcement Corrosion portions.
Concrete

Measurement of section Measurement tape Construction condition

Cracks scale and measurement
Crack width and crack length Cracks
tape.
Compressive strength Schmidt hammer test, Quality of Concrete

2.6 DAMAGE-PRONE MEMBERS

Some members or elements of the bridge structure where stresses are

concentrated are relatively easily damaged compared with other attributes. Such
members shall be the main focus of inspection and check point. These members
are referred to as damage-prone members and presented in Appendix I, together
with the common types of damages, for reference.

2.7 DAMAGE RATING AND CONDITION STATES

2.7.1 Member Damage and Condition

In performing bridge load rating, it is important to note the present condition state
or degree of damage and defects of bridge members. Such condition will
become the basis for determining the remaining capacity of a structural member.

Appendix B of the Revised 2007 BMS – Bridge Inspection Manual presents some
common damages observed on site for existing bridges.

Damages and defects found in bridge components and members, including

cracks, holes, loss of steel section due to corrosion, rebar corrosion, missing
members and bolts, deformation, etc., affect the load carrying capacity of the
bridge. Therefore, proper measurements and evaluation of such damages and
defects are very important to reflect the actual condition of the member for
bridge structural modeling and section capacity determination.

The Bridge Inspector should note the type of damage or defect, location, its scale
and extent of coverage. For example, concrete cracks (bending and shear
cracks) should be mapped indicating its width and depth of penetration; loss of
section due to steel member corrosion should be assessed and recorded; degree
of member deformation that could affect its strength should also be noted. These
defects or damages will become the basis in determining the remaining section
capacities.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 23

DPWH
 2.7.2 Urgent Temporary Countermeasures

In the interest of public and traffic safety, certain conditions of the bridge
necessitate undertaking temporary countermeasures (repairs or structural
strengthening) on the damaged or defective component/element of the bridge.
Such urgent temporary countermeasures shall be done prior to any repair or
rehabilitation and does not warrant any load rating evaluation. The following
conditions require urgent temporary countermeasures:

1) Possibility of collapse of the bridge is anticipated due to the significant

damages of superstructure and substructure,
2) Possibility of falling of pedestrians or vehicles is anticipated due to fracture or
section loss of railings,
3) Possibility of driving accident is anticipated due to tire blowout caused by
severely deformed expansion joints, loss of expansion joints or due to
undulating pavement,
4) Drop of concrete segments from curb, railing and slab deck is highly
anticipated to harm pedestrians or vehicles passing under the bridge.
5) Possibility of bridge falling down is anticipated due to damaged or loss of
fall-down prevention devices or abnormal movement of a girder.
6) Possibility of road surface caving in is anticipated due to heavily damaged
slab deck.
7) Abnormal noise from a girder or inspection facilities is adversely affecting
nearby residents.

24 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 Chapter 3
LOAD RATING

This Chapter discusses the general principles, policies and guidelines on Load
Rating of Bridges. The methodology is based on the AASHTO Manual for Condition
Evaluation of Bridges (MCEB).

3.1 LOAD RATING PRINCIPLES

In general, the resistance (R) of a structural member (also called attribute) should
be greater than the demand (Q) as follows:

Resistance (R) ≥ Demand (ΣQ)

or in Equation form,

R ≥ Q D + Q L + ΣQ I [3.1-1]

where: R is the member resistance or capacity,

ΣQ is the effect of all loads,
Q D is the effect of dead load,
Q L is the effect of live load, and
ΣQ I is the effect of load i.

In the bridge evaluation process, the maximum allowable live load need to be
determined and by rearranging Equation [3.1-1], the maximum allowable live load
becomes:

QL ≤ R - { Q D + ΣQ I } [3.1-2]

It then becomes a question of whether a fully loaded vehicle (Rating Vehicle) can
be allowed on the bridge or not, or what portion of the rating vehicle can be
allowed on the bridge. The portion of the rating vehicle will be given by the ratio
between the available capacity for live load effect and the effect of the rating
vehicle. This ratio is called the Rating Factor (RF) as defined by:

Available Capacity for Live Load Effect R - { Q D + ΣQ I }

RF = = [3.1-3]
Rating Vehicle Load Demand QL

Simplifying the above equation to AASHTO MCEB form with ΣQ I = 0 (see Section 3.4
for loading consideration) gives,

R - QD R - A1 D
RF = = [3.1-4]
QL A 2 L(1+I)

where: RF = is the rating factor for live-load carrying capacity. The rating
factor multiplied by the rating vehicle in metric tons gives the
rating of the structure.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 25

DPWH
 R = is the resistance or capacity of the member.
QD = A1 D
QL = A 2 L(1+I)
D = is the dead load effect on the member. For composite
members, the dead load effect on the non-composite
section and the dead load effect on the composite section
need to be evaluated when the Allowable Stress method is
used.
L = is the live load effect on the member.
I = is the impact factor to be used with the live load effect.
A1 = γ D = is factor for dead loads.
A2 = γ L = is the factor for live load.

The “load effect” in the preceding equation is the applied loads on the member.
Typical load effects are axial force, vertical shear force, bending moment, axial
stress, shear stress and bending stresses. Once the load effect to be evaluated is
selected, the “capacity” of a member to resist such a load effect may be
determined.

When the rating factor is equals to or greater than one, the bridge is capable of
carrying the rating vehicle. On the other hand, when the rating factor is less than
one, the bridge may be overstressed while carrying the rating vehicle.

The Rating Factor (RF) may be used to determine the rating of the bridge member
in metric tons as follows:

Load Rating = Rating Factor x Rating Vehicle Weight

or in Equation form,

LR = RF • W [3.1-5]

where: LR = is the bridge member load rating in metric tons.

W = is the weight (in metric tons) of nominal truck used in
determining the live load effect (L)

The rating of the bridge is controlled by the member with the lowest rating in
metric tons.

The effects of dead and live loads are the only two principal loads considered in
the evaluation process. However, impact should be added to the live load used
for the rating.

3.2 LOAD RATING METHOD

Although the basic concept of load rating evaluation is the same, there are three
methods commonly used to check the capacity of the members, namely, the
Allowable Stress Method (ASM), the Load Factor Method (LFM) and the Load and
Resistance Factor Method (LRFM). However, in this Manual, only the allowable
stress method and the load factor method are recommended as the load rating
methods.

26 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 3.2.1 The Allowable Stress Method (ASM)

The Allowable Stress (or the Working Stress) Method constitutes a traditional
specification to provide structural safety. The actual loadings are combined to
produce a maximum stress in a member which is not to exceed the allowable or
working stress. The allowable or working stress is found by taking the limiting stress
of the material and applying an appropriate factor of safety.

In this method, the capacity of a member is based on the rating level evaluated:
Inventory Level-Allowable Stress or the Operating Level-Allowable Stress.

The Rating Factor (RF) under this method is calculated as:

R - A1 D R - D
RF = = [3.2-1]
A 2 L(1+I) L(1+I)

where A 1 = 1.0
A 2 = 1.0

Rewriting the above formula in terms of flexural and shear stress,

σ b - σ DL
For moment stresses, RF = [3.2-2]
σ (LL+I)

τ v - τ DL
For shear stresses, RF = [3.2-3]
τ (LL+I)

where σb : allowable stress in flexure

σ DL : flexural stress due to dead load
σ (LL+I) : flexural stress due to live load and impact
τv : allowable stress in shear
τ DL : shear stress due to dead load
τ (LL+I) : shear stress due to live load and impact

Note: σ DL and τ DL should include superimposed dead load effects (see

Example 3 of Appendix III)

3.2.2 The Load Factor Method (LFM)

The Load Factor Method is based on analyzing a structure subject to multiples of

the actual loads (factored loads). Different factors are applied to each type of
load which reflects the uncertainty inherent in the load calculations. The rating is
determined such that the effect of the factored loads does not exceed the
strength of the member.

The nominal capacity of structural steel, reinforced concrete and prestressed

concrete should be the same as specified in the load factor design of the DPWH
Design Guidelines.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 27

DPWH
 The Rating Factor (RF) under this method is calculated as:

φR n - γ D D
RF = [3.2-4]
γ L L(1+I)

where φR n : is the nominal resistance or capacity

γ D , γ L : is the dead and live load factors
γD = 1.3
γL = 2.17 (Inventory Level)
γL = 1.3 (Operating Level)
γL = 2.17 (Posting Level)

Rewriting the above formula in terms of moment and shear forces,

M U - γ D M DL
For moment forces, RF = [3.2-5]
γ L M (LL+I)

V U - γ D V DL
For shear forces, RF = [3.2-6]
γ L V (LL+I)

where MU : = φM n , moment strength or capacity

M DL : moment due to dead load
M (LL+I) : moment due to live load and impact
VU : = φV n , shear strength or capacity
V DL : shear due to dead load
V (LL+I) : shear due to live load and impact
φ : 0.90 for flexure (bending) and 0.85 for shear

Note: M DL and V DL should include superimposed dead load effects

(see Example 3 of Appendix III)

For the basic load rating evaluation, the analysis can be simplified by assuming
that a similar rating vehicle will occupy all the possible lanes to produce the
maximum effect on the structure. This assumption will allow us to use the AASHTO
live-load distribution factor approach.

During the structural evaluation for load rating, the location and type of critical
failure mode should be first identified – such critical areas and sections differ
depending on the structural system and the physical condition of the bridge
members.

The determination of structural failure modes for bridge rating depends on the
load rating method used, as shown in Table 3.2-1.

28 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 Table 3.2-1 Failure Criteria for Structures

RATING METHOD FAILURE CRITERIA REMARKS

• When a portion of a • Serviceability and strength

structural member is is assured using this method
stressed beyond the since structural member
Allowable Stress allowable stress, the never reaches yield
structure is considered
failed • Normally, deflections and
vibration are always
satisfied under this method
• Failure occurs at two limit • In load factor method,
states: satisfying one limit state
does not guarantee
1. Serviceability limit state satisfaction of the other
– when the structure limit state
reaches its maximum
Load Factor allowable serviceability • Both serviceability and
limit, and strength criteria need to be
checked
2. Ultimate strength limit
state – when the • When estimating operating
member reaches its rating, serviceability need
ultimate capacity not be checked

Typical shear and flexural failure modes for simple concrete and steel bridges are
shown in Figure 3.2-1 and Figure 3.2-2.

a. SHEAR FAILURE MODE b. FLEXURAL FAILURE MODE

Figure 3.2-1 Typical Shear and Flexure Failure Modes for Concrete Bridges

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 29

DPWH
 a. SHEAR FAILURE MODE b. FLEXURAL FAILURE MODE

Figure 3.2-2 Typical Shear and Flexure Failure Modes for Steel Bridges

3.3 LOAD RATING LEVELS

There are two levels of rating to which a bridge should be load rated - the
Inventory and the Operating Levels.

3.3.1 Inventory Level (To be used for Load Posting)

The life of the bridge depends on the fatigue life or serviceability limits of the
bridge materials. Higher frequent loading and unloading may affect the fatigue
or serviceability of the bridge components and the bridge life itself. Therefore, in
order to maintain the bridge for a longer period, the live-load carrying capacity
available for frequently passing vehicle needs to be estimated at service level.
This process is then referred to as the Inventory Rating.

The Inventory rating level generally corresponds to the customary design level of
stress but reflects the existing bridge and material condition with regard to
deterioration and loss of section. This rating level allows comparison with the
capacity for new structures.

The Inventory Rating Level results in a live load that can be safely carried by an
existing bridge for an indefinite period of time.

3.3.2 Operating Level (To be used for Permit Loading)

Although very heavy but less frequent vehicles may affect the fatigue life or
serviceability of a bridge, bridges can however be allowed to carry less frequent
vehicles with higher loads than usual. This process of evaluating such load
capacity is referred to as the Operating Rating.

30 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 Load rating based on the Operating rating level reflects the absolute maximum
permissible live load that can be safely carried by the bridge. Allowing unlimited
number of vehicles to use the bridge at the Operating Level may shorten the life of
the bridge.

However, extraordinary heavy vehicles or trucks (within the bridge operating level)
can only be allowed to pass the bridge structure after complying with the
conditions stipulated in the permit to travel.

3.4 LOADINGS

3.4.1 Dead Load (DL)

• Dead load effects should be computed in accordance with the conditions

existing at the time of analysis. The minimum unit weight of materials to be
used in computing the dead load should be in accordance with the current
DPWH design guidelines. Care should be observed in taking the dimensions of
the different bridge members and components.
• For composite members, the portion of the dead load acting on the non-
composite section and the portion acting on the composite section should be
determined.
• Care should be exercised in estimating the weight of concrete decks since
significant variations of deck thickness have been found, particularly on older
bridges.
• The approximate overlay thickness should be measured at the time of
inspection.
• Assumptions for members of unknown geometry should be done based on
experience and engineering judgment. Back calculations may be necessary
to determine the missing dimensions.

3.4.2 Rating Live Load (LL)

The live load to be used in the basic rating equation is the MS18 (HS20-44) truck or
its equivalent lane loading in accordance with the DPWH Design Guidelines, as
shown in Figure 3.4-1.

Although the DPWH Design Guidelines Section 3.2.4 “Highway Loads” specify the
minimum design loading to be the MS18 loading or the Alternate Military loading
(which results to bigger design loads at shorter spans), only the MS18 vehicle
loading will be used for load rating in this manual.

Moreover, the DPWH Design Guidelines Section 3.2.4.6 requires checking the
bridge capacity against the demands of the Permit Design Load with an increase
in the allowable design stresses or the use of a live load factor equivalent to one(1).

A comparison of the design live loads under the DPWH Design Guidelines is
presented in Appendix IV of this Manual.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 31

DPWH
 Clearance and Loaded
Lane Width
3,048 mm

33 Metric Tons

4,267 mm V = 4,267 to
9,144 mm* 1,829 mm
610 mm 610 mm
36 kN 144 kN 144 kN

NOTES: 1. *VARIABLE SPACING V = 4.267M TO 9.144M TO BE USED IS THAT WHICH PRODUCES

MAXIMUM STRESSES.
2. FOR TIMBER FLOORS OR ORTHOTROPIC STEEL DECKS (EXCLUDING TRANSVERSE BEAMS) FOR
MS18 LOADING, ONE AXLE LOAD OF 108kN OR TWO AXLE LOADS OF 72kN EACH, SPACED
AT 1.22M APART (WHICHEVER PRODUCES THE GREATER STRESS) MAY BE USED, INSTEAD OF
THE 144kN AXLE SHOWN.

(a) Standard MS18 Truck Load (HS20-44)

CONCENTRATED LOAD
• 80 kN FOR MOMENT
• 116 kN FOR SHEAR

UNIFORM LOAD = 9.4 kN/M OF LANE LOAD

(b) Standard MS18 Lane Load

Figure 3.4-1 Rating Live Load

3.4.3 Posting Live Loads

The live load to be used in the rating equation for posting considerations should be
any of the typical legal loads shown in Figure 3.4-2. For spans over 60m in length,
the selected legal load should be spaced with 9m clear distance between
vehicles to simulate a train of vehicles in one lane and a single vehicle load should
be applied in the adjacent lane(s).

3.4.4 Wheel Loads (Deck)

In general, stresses in the deck do not control the load rating except in special
cases; however, the wheel loads and the calculation of bending moments in the
deck should be in accordance with the current DPWH Design Guidelines.

32 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 3.4.5 Truck Loads and Number of Traffic Lanes

The live or moving loads to be applied on the deck for determining the load rating
is the Standard MS18 (Metric units) or HS20-44 (US units) loading. The number of
traffic lanes to be loaded and the transverse placement of wheel lines shall be in
accordance with the current DPWH Design Guidelines and the following table.

Table 3.4-1 Roadway Width and Number of Traffic Lanes

Number of Design
Roadway Width Remarks
Traffic Lanes
5.4m to 6.0m Each lane equal to one-half the
2
(18ft to 20ft) roadway width

Less than 5.4m (18ft) 1 Equal to roadway width

 When conditions of traffic movements and volumes warrant it, fewer traffic lanes than specified
by DPWH Design Guidelines may be used.

3.4.6 Lane Loads

Standard MS (HS) Lane Loads, as specified in the current DPWH Design Guidelines,
may be used for all spans where it will result in load effects greater than those
produced by the standard MS18 trucks.

3.4.7 Sidewalk Loading

Sidewalk loadings used in calculations for safe load capacity ratings should be the
probable maximum loads anticipated. Such load varies with site conditions and
requires an engineering judgment but in no case will it be more than the value
given in the DPWH Design Guidelines.

The Operating level rating should consider full truck and sidewalk loading acting
simultaneously on the bridge.

3.4.8 Live Load Effects

• Live load moments in longitudinal stringers and girders may be calculated

using 2D or 3D analytical model of the bridge or using the moment table in
Appendix III for live load moments produced by the rating and posting loads.
• Live load moments in the intermediate and end floor beams of trusses and
through girders may be calculated by statics using simple models and
considering the transfer of wheel loads from the stringers to these members.
• Live loads in truss members can be calculated by using influence lines for
maximum shears and moments or using design aids or tables for trusses. A 2D
or 3D analytical truss model may be used to calculate truss member demand
forces. Care should be taken when the structure or panels are too short to
permit the entire load to be on the structure with the load positioned to
produce the maximum shear or moment.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 33

DPWH
 17 Metric Tons

4,267 mm

33.4 kN 133.6 kN

TYPE 1 - 1

27 Metric Tons

4,572 mm 1,219
mm

84.8 kN 90.1 kN 90.1 kN

TYPE 1 - 2

38 Metric Tons

3,353 mm 1,219 6,706 mm 1,219

mm mm

51.8 kN 80.3 kN 80.3 kN 80.3 kN 80.3 kN

TYPE 12 - 2

Figure 3.4-2 Typical Legal Loads Used for Load Posting

3.4.9 Distribution of Loads

The fraction of live load transferred to a single member will be selected in

accordance with the current DPWH Design Guidelines. The values represent a
possible combination of diverse circumstances.

Other methods can be used including field measured values, analytically

calculated values or those derived from advanced structural analysis using the
properties of the existing structures. Loadings should be placed in positions
causing the maximum response in the components being evaluated.

3.4.10 Impact

Impact should be added to live load used for rating based on the current DPWH or
AASHTO recommendations. Reduction in impact values can be made for bridges
when conditions of alignment, enforced speed posting, and similar situations
require a vehicle to substantially reduce speed in crossing the structure.

34 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 3.4.11 Deflection

Basically, live load deflection limitations should not be considered in load rating.

3.4.12 Loads That Can Be Neglected in Load Rating

Since the occurrence of extreme values during the relatively short-duration live -
loading is extremely small, the following load effects should not be considered in
load ratings:

 Longitudinal Loads,
 Environmental Loads,
 Wind Loads,
 Earthquake Loads,
 Thermal Loads, and
 Loads Due to Stream Flow

3.5 MATERIAL PROPERTIES AND NOMINAL RESISTANCE OR CAPACITY (R)

The nominal capacity or resistance to be used in the rating equation depends on

the structural materials, the rating method and the rating level used. AASHTO
Manual for Condition Evaluation of Bridges (MCEB), 2nd Ed., 2000, provides nominal
capacities for Allowable Stress and Load Factor methods in Articles 6.6.2 and 6.6.3.

For all bridge components and elements, the material properties used for the
rating shall be based on the material grade or design stresses, as specified in the
plans or design drawings. When plans are not available or they do not specify
material grade or design stresses, the rating engineer must use proper judgment to
determine the appropriate material properties based on the information available.
Normally, the decision is based on the year the bridge was constructed.

Table 3.5-1 presents the material properties based on the year of construction as
given in the AASHTO MCEB. The material property table is based on the
predominant grades of materials as recommended by AASHTO and adopted in
the Philippines during the early design of bridges.

After making a thorough investigation into all possible sources of information

concerning the bridge structure under rating and the rating engineer is still unable
to determine the grade of material used or the year of construction, then a
conservative estimate of the construction year should be made. The material
properties in Table 3.5-1 shall then be used to determine the material properties for
the rating.

3.5.1 Capacity under Allowable Stress Method

In the Allowable Stress Method, the resistance or capacity of a member is based

on the rating level evaluated:

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 35

DPWH
 • Inventory Level - Allowable Stress, or
• Operating Level - Allowable Stress

The properties used for determining the allowable stress capacity for different
materials is given in Table 3.5-1 or those found in the DPWH Design Guidelines or
the AASHTO Design Specifications. For convenience, the table provides, where
appropriate, the Inventory, Operating, Posting and yield stress values. Allowable
stress and strength formulas should be those provided in the AASHTO MCEB, DPWH
Design Guidelines or the AASHTO Design Specifications.

Table 3.5-1 Material Properties Used When Actual Grade of Material is Unknown

ALLOWABLE STRESS RATINGS

YEAR OF Fy or F’c
MATERIAL INVENTORY OPERATING POSTING
CONSTRUCTION (MPa)
(MPa) (MPa) (MPa)

Structural 0.55 Fy 0.75Fy 0.55 Fy

Steel Prior to 1905 179.3 96.5 134.4 96.5
Bending 1905 to 1936 206.8 110.3 155.1 110.3
(Compression/ 1936 to 1963 227.5 124.1 168.9 124.1
Tension) After 1963 248.2 137.9 186.2 137.9

0.45Fy
Structural Prior to 1905 179.3 58.6 79.3 58.6
Steel 1905 to 1936 206.8 65.5 93.1 65.5
Web Shear 1936 to 1963 227.5 75.8 103.4 75.8
After 1963 248.2 82.7 110.3 82.7

Prior to 1954 227.5 124.1 172.4 124.1

Reinforcing
After 1954 275.8 137.9 193.1 137.9
Steel
Grade 50 344.7 137.9 224.1 137.9
Tension
Grade 60 413.7 165.5 248.2 165.5

Prior to 1959 17.2 6.9 10.3 6.9

Concrete After 1959 20.7 8.3 13.1 8.3
Bending 1977 to 1981 27.6* 11.0 16.5 11.0
After 1981 31.0* 12.4 18.6 12.4
* For prestressed concrete

Prestressed Based on actual grade or material used

Concrete and
Steel Strands (Refer to Section 6.6.6.3 of the AASHTO MCEB)

Based on actual grade or material used 1.33 x Same as

Timber
(Refer to Chapter 6 of the ASEP NSCP 2001) Inventory Inventory

36 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 When situations arise that are not covered by the specifications, then rational
strength of material formulae should be used consistent with data and plans
verified in the field investigation. Deviations from the above specifications should
be fully documented.

When the bridge materials or construction are unknown, the allowable stresses
should be fixed by the rating engineer, based on field investigations and/or
material testing conducted and should be substituted for the basic stresses given
herein.

Moreover, for prestressed concrete members, the allowable stress rating equations
shall be:

For Inventory Rating:

½√f’c - (Fd + Fp + Fs)
a. Concrete Tension RF = [3.5-1]
Fl

0.6 f’c - (Fd + Fp + Fs)

b. Concrete Compression RF = [3.5-2]
Fl

0.4 f’c - ½(Fd + Fp + Fs)

c. Concrete Compression RF = [3.5-3]
Fl

0.8 f*y - (Fd + Fp + Fs)

d. Prestressing Steel Tension RF = [3.5-4]
Fl

For Operating Rating:

0.9 f*y - (Fd + Fp + Fs)
a. Prestressing Steel Tension RF = [3.5-5]
Fl

where RF : rating factor

f’ c : concrete compressive strength
½√f’ c : allowable concrete tensile stress; use ¼√f’ c for corrosive
exposure condition
Fd : unfactored dead load stress
Fp : unfactored stress due to prestress after all loses
Fs : unfactored stress due to secondary prestress forces
Fl : unfactored live load stress including impact
f* y : prestressing steel yield stress

3.5.2 Capacity under Load Factor Method

The nominal capacity of the structural steel, reinforced concrete and prestressed
concrete should be the same as specified in the load factor sections of the current
DPWH Design Guidelines or the current AASHTO Design Specifications. Nominal
strength calculations should take into consideration the observable effects of
deterioration, such as loss of concrete or steel-sectional area, loss of composite
action or corrosion.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 37

DPWH
  Structural Steel
The yield stresses used for determining load ratings should depend on
the type of steel used in the structural member. When specifications of
the steel are not available, yield strengths should be taken from the
applicable “Year of Construction” column of Table 3.5-1. The capacity
of structural steel members should be based on the load factor
requirements of the DPWH Design Guidelines.

Allowable fatigue strength should be checked based on the current

AASHTO Design Specifications.

 Reinforced Concrete
The capacity of concrete members should be based on the strength
requirements stated in the DPWH Design Guideline. The area of tension
steel at yield to be used in computing the ultimate moment capacity of
flexural members should not exceed that available in the section or 75
percent of the reinforcement required for balanced conditions.

 Prestressed Concrete
The load rating of prestress concrete members at both the Inventory
and Operating Level, should be established in accordance with the
strength requirements, including the minimum reinforcement
requirements, of the DPWH Design Guidelines. In situations of unusual
design with wide dispersion of tendons, the Operating rating might
further be controlled by stresses not to exceed 0.90 of the yield point
stress in the prestressing steel nearest the extreme tension fiber of the
member.

Live loads shall be limited to preserve the relationship between the

nominal moment capacity (φM n ) and the cracking moment (M cr ), as
prescribed for new design. This necessitates an adjustment to the value
of φM n, used in the flexural strength rating equation. Thus, when
φM n < 1.2 M cr , the nominal moment capacity becomes (k)(φ)(M n ), with
k = φM n / 1.2 M cr .

The strength rating equation for prestressed concrete shall be:

For Inventory Rating:

φRn - (1.3D + S)
Flexural and Shear Strength, RF = [3.5-6]
2.17L (1 + I)

For Operating Rating:

φRn - (1.3D + S)
Flexural and Shear Strength, RF = [3.5-7]
1.3L (1 + I)

where φR n : nominal section strength (Moment - φM n ; Shear - φV n )

D : unfactored dead load moment or shear
S : unfactored prestress secondary moment or shear
L : unfactored live load moment or shear
I : impact factor

38 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 3.5.3 Conditions of Bridge Structural Members

In the load rating analysis and section nominal capacity or resistance

determination, the following factors should be considered to obtain a more
realistic assessment of the actual bridge performance and structural behavior:

 The condition and extent of deterioration of structural components of the

bridge should be considered in the computation of the dead load and
live load effects when stress is chosen as the evaluation approach and
for capacity when force or moment is chosen for use in the basic rating
equation.

 The rating for load-carrying capacity should be based on the most

recent field investigation considering all physical features that will affect
the structural integrity of the bridge. Adequate data should be taken for
damaged or deteriorated sections for proper evaluation in the analysis.

 Size, number and relative locations of bolts and rivets through tension
members should be determined and recorded to determine the net
sectional area.

 Misalignments, bends, or kinks in compression members should be

measured carefully as these control its load-carrying capacity.

 Connections, especially compression members should be checked

carefully for eccentricities that should be considered in the structural
analysis.

 Cracks found on concrete members shall be noted and its effect in

reducing member capacity or resistance and stiffness shall be
considered as follows:

 Bending Cracks: Effective Section Properties shall be calculated

using the original section less the effects of cracks.
This effective section property shall be used in the
analysis model of the bridge structure.

Section Capacity or Resistance shall be calculated

considering crack width and effects on steel
reinforcements. When steel reinforcements are
severely corroded, consider the loss of section and
use the remaining steel cross-section in calculating
member capacity.

 Shear Cracks: Concrete shear resistance shall be calculated

based on the extent of shear cracks on the section.
Basically, concrete shear capacity shall be
neglected on members with shear cracks
extending to more than half the depth of the
member; in this case, consider only the shear
resistance contribution of reinforcing steel.

 The capacity or resistance and section properties of steel member with

cracks or severe corrosion shall be calculated based on the effective

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 39

DPWH
 cross-section of the members. The effective area of members to be used
in the calculations shall be the gross area less the portion that has
deteriorated due to cracks, decay or corrosion.

3.6 RATING BRIDGE DECKS

Reinforced concrete decks supported by longitudinal girders with main

reinforcement perpendicular to traffic shall be rated according to this section.

• This section covers deck slabs continuous over three or more supports. The
slab must be supported by longitudinal girders or stringers with the main slab
reinforcement perpendicular to the girders or for deck slab skews less than or
equal to 20º. (Deck slab skew is defined as the deviation in degrees of the
main reinforcement bars from perpendicular to the girders. The main
reinforcement bars may have a different skew than the bridge structure.)
• When design plans are available, use the applicable concrete strength and
steel yield stress or use the values in Table 3.5-1 (Year Construction -
Allowable Bending Stress Table) for the appropriate year of construction.
• When plans are not available for a concrete deck, and the deck shows no
sign of failure, then the assignment of rating values will not be required.
However, if the condition of the deck indicates probable failure, then rating
values shall be calculated and assigned. The rating engineer shall indicate
on the rating summary sheet that plans are not available for the deck.
• All other types of bridge decks shall be rated in compliance with the
applicable guidelines within this Manual and the current DPWH and AASHTO
Codes.

Edge of
Girder
Top Reinforcing Edge
Steel X Distance

Bottom
Reinforcing Steel

NOTES:
The edge distance as per AASHTO is equal to 300mm.
If “X” is greater than “d” then consider rating the overhang.

40 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 • Usually, deck overhangs at the exterior girder do not control the slab rating.
However, the rating engineer should use judgment in determining if the
overhang should be rated. A criteria that may be used is: Rate the
cantilever portion of the concrete bridge deck if the wheel load can be
applied outside the exterior girder by a distance equal to or greater than the
distance from the bottom of the slab to the centerline of the top
reinforcement, as shown below.
• For reinforced concrete slabs with main reinforcement parallel to traffic, load
rating shall be done in accordance with the guidelines for reinforced
concrete structures.

3.7 RATING REINFORCED CONCRETE GIRDER BRIDGES

This section covers the rating of reinforced concrete girders and slabs reinforced
longitudinally. The types of bridges covered by this section include:
• RCBG - Reinforced Concrete Box Girder (Simple and Continuous)
• RCS - Reinforced Concrete Slab (Simple and Continuous)
• RCDG - Reinforced Concrete Deck Girder (Simple and Continuous)

3.7.1 General

• Computer software used for load rating shall be approved by BOD, DPWH.
• Concrete girders with considerable stress/strain effects due to horizontal
curvature, skew, temperature, or other influences shall be modeled as
simple, straight beams on pin or roller supports. The analysis output results
can then be supplemented with hand calculations to consider any of these
influences, as necessary. However, the rating engineer may perform a
more refined analysis including all geometric and material considerations
using advanced analytical tools and methods.
• Bridges shall be rated using Allowable Stress or Load Factor Method.
• When plans are available, use the minimum yield strength values given in
the plans; otherwise, values given in Table 3.5-1 shall be used for the
applicable year of construction. If the condition of the girder indicates that
full strength should not be used, the rating should be used as appropriate.
• Moment rating shall be performed at standard critical sections (i.e. ½ span
lengths for simply supported structures or at points of maximum negative
and positive moments for continuous structures), any controlling rebar cut-
off section, or any section that shows signs of distress or deterioration.
• Shear rating shall also be performed at critical sections (i.e. at “d” distance
from support, points of maximum shears, etc.), any section with change in
shear reinforcement, or any section that shows signs of distress or
deterioration.
• Rating of cast-in-place box girder bridges can be simplified by separating
out the boxes into I - shapes and rate as a typical interior and exterior girder.
Dead loads and live loads shall be applied as appropriate.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 41

DPWH
 3.7.2 Girders Requiring Rating

• Interior Girders - A rating is required for the critical interior girder. More than
one interior girder may require an analysis due to variation in span length,
girder size, girder spacing, differences in loads, moments, concrete strength
and/or reinforcing, condition of member, etc.
• Exterior Girders - An exterior girder shall be rated under the following
conditions:
1. When the section used for the exterior girder is different than the section
used for an interior girder.
2. When the overhang is greater than S/2.
3. When the plans indicate that the curb and floor slab were poured
monolithically, the live load distribution factor for the exterior girder shall
be calculated and compared to the live load distribution factor for the
interior girders. If the live load distribution factor for the exterior girder is
equal to or greater than 75% of the live load distribution factor for the
interior girders, the exterior girder shall be rated.
4. When the loading condition or the demand forces varies with that of
the interior girders.
5. When the existing condition of the exterior girder shows signs of distress
or deterioration that could affect the safety of the public.
6. When the rating engineer determines the rating would be
advantageous in analyzing the overall condition of the structure.

3.7.3 Calculations

• A set of calculations shall be submitted with each rating. These calculations

shall include:
 Derivations for dead loads,
 Derivations for live loads and distribution factors, and
 Any other calculations or assumptions used for rating.
• Dead Loads
1. The final sum of all the individual weight components for dead load
calculations may be rounded up to the next 50N.
2. Dead loads applied after a cast-in-place concrete deck has cured
shall be distributed equally to all girders and, when applicable,
treated as composite dead loads. Examples include asphalt, curbs,
sidewalks, railing, etc.
3. Use 250N/m2 for the unit weight of formworks that has remained in
place in the superstructure. An example is closed cell construction,
such as cast-in-place concrete box girder.
4. Dead loads applied before a cast-in-place concrete deck has
cured shall be distributed to the applicable individual supporting
girders and treated as non-composite loads. Examples of this type
of dead load are deck slabs, girders, diaphragms, etc. The weight
of diaphragms may be treated as point loads or as an equivalent
uniform dead load for the span.

42 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 5. Dead loads due to utilities shall be considered when it is found to
be significant, as per rating engineer’s judgment. Application of
load due to utilities is left to the rating engineer’s discretion.

3.8 RATING PRESTRESSED CONCRETE GIRDER BRIDGES

This section presents the policies and guidelines for rating prestressed girders. The
types of girders covered by this section include precast pretensioned girders as
follows:

• PCDG - Prestressed Concrete Deck Girder (Simple and Continuous)

• PCBG - Prestressed Concrete Box Girder (Simple and Continuous)
• PCG - Other Prestressed Concrete Girders

3.8.1 General

• Computer software used for load rating shall be approved by BOD, DPWH.
• When rating girders using load factor method, prestressed girders shall not
be rated for shear. However, all prestressed girders shall be checked for
shear using the appropriate DPWH or AASHTO recommendations.
• The live load distribution factor to be applied to the bridge shall be as
prescribed in the current DPWH or AASHTO Design Guidelines and
Specifications.
• The rating engineer shall be responsible to determine whether stress-
relieved or low relaxation strands were used in the bridge. Such information
are normally stated in the plans, but if it is not possible to discern the type of
strand used, the rating engineer shall assume stress-relieved strands until
1983 and low-relaxation strands thereafter.
• Prestressed concrete girder bridges with complex geometric alignment, i.e.
flared girder bridges or girders with variable overhangs, shall be modeled as
simple straight beams on pin or roller supports. The output results can then
be supplemented by hand calculations to consider any significant
influences, as necessary. However, the rating engineer may perform a
more refined analysis including all geometric and material considerations
using advanced analytical tools and methods.
• For effective slab widths, the “b” in the equation “12t + b” shall be the width
of the top flange of the girder, not the web.

3.8.2 Girders Requiring Rating

• Interior Girders - A rating is required for the critical interior girder. More than
one interior girder may require an analysis due to variation in span length,
girder size, girder spacing, differences in loads, moments, concrete strength
and/or reinforcing, condition of member, etc.
• Exterior Girders - An exterior girder shall be rated under the following
conditions:

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 43

DPWH
 1. When the section used for the exterior girder is different than the section
used for an interior girder.
2. When the overhang is greater than S/2.
3. The exterior girder of a multi-girder bridge should be rated if it does not
have a cast-in-place composite slab. For this case, the dead loads due
to sidewalks, curbs and railings shall be applied to only the exterior
girder.
4. When the loading condition or the demand forces varies with that of
the interior girders.
5. When the existing condition of the exterior girder shows signs of distress
or deterioration that could affect the safety of the public.
6. When the rating engineer determines the rating would be
advantageous in analyzing the overall condition of the structure.

3.8.3 Calculations

The guidelines under this section shall be the same as Section 3.7.3. However, the
rating engineer shall indicate whether stress-relieved or low-relaxation strands were
used in the rating calculations.

3.8.4 Simple and Continuous Span Bridges

• Simple span prestressed girders shall be rated as simple span members for
all loads (i.e. dead loads, superimposed dead loads, live load, etc.). Span
length shall be taken as the distance between the centerline of bearing at
abutments or supports.
• Simple span prestressed girders made continuous for composite dead loads
and live load plus impact, shall be rated as continuous members for these
loads. Span lengths shall be taken as the distance from centerline of
bearing at the abutment to centerline or pier, and centerline of pier to
centerline of pier as applicable.
• The negative moment analysis at centerline of piers shall be based on the
Allowable Stress or the Ultimate Strength (Load Factor) Method. The girder’s
primary negative moment reinforcement and only the top layer of the
slab’s distribution reinforcement, within the effective slab width, shall be
used in the analysis.
• In cases when the compressive strength of simple span prestressed girders
made continuous for composite dead loads and live load plus impact
changes from span to span, only the girder with the least compressive
strength shall be used to model the entire structure.

3.9 RATING STEEL BRIDGES

This section presents the policies and guidelines in rating steel girder bridges. The
types of girders covered by this section are:

• SINCS - Steel I-Girder with Non-composite Concrete Slab (Simple and

Continuous)

44 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 • SICCS - Steel I-Girder with Composite Concrete Slab (Simple and
Continuous)
• SBG - Steel Box Girder (Simple and Continuous)
• SDG - Steel Deck Girder (Simple and Continuous)

3.9.1 General

• All steel girders shall be rated using software approved by BOD, DPWH.
• Steel girders with considerable stress/strain effects due to horizontal
curvature, skew, temperature, or other influences shall be modeled as
simple, straight beams on pin or roller supports. The analysis output results
can then be supplemented with hand calculations to consider any of these
influences, as necessary. However, the rating engineer may perform a
more refined analysis including all geometric and material considerations
using advanced analytical tools and methods.
• Bridges shall be rated using Allowable Stress or Load Factor Method.
• Use the minimum design yield strength value (f y ) and the minimum
compressive strength (f’c) indicated in the plans. If no data exists, the
rating engineer may refer to Table 3.5-1 based on year of construction or
actual tests may be performed to determine material strengths.

3.9.2 Girders Requiring Rating

Refer to Section 3.7.2.

Exterior girders on navigable water channels are prone to vessel collisions. The
condition of such exterior girder should be checked thoroughly for evidence of
collision or damages. If the exterior girder is badly damaged due to collisions or
other factors, its capacity for live load as well as dead load should be checked
and redistribution of forces to the next interior girder verified carefully. The
additional dead load as well as live load redistributed to the next interior girder
should be considered in rating the interior girder.

3.9.3 Calculations

Refer to Section 3.7.3.

As mentioned in Section 3.9.2, additional dead loads due to redistribution of forces

from a badly damaged exterior girder shall be considered for the adjacent interior
girder.

3.10 RATING TRUSS BRIDGES

This section covers the general policies and guidelines for rating truss bridges.
Since majority of truss bridges are structural steel, this section covers the necessary
details to rate steel truss bridges.

Bridge decks shall be rated in accordance with Section 3.6.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 45

DPWH
 The types of bridges covered by this section include:

• SDT - Steel Deck Truss

• STT - Steel Through Truss

3.10.1 General

• Computer software used for load rating shall be approved by BOD, DPWH.
• Truss bridge rating shall be performed in accordance with this Manual and
the DPWH and AASHTO Design Guidelines.
• Members designed by allowable or working stress method shall be rated by
the working stress method.
• Structural stringer or floor beams shall be rated using the applicable portions
of this Manual.
• When design plans are available with given design stresses, the applicable
inventory and operating stresses shall be used. Otherwise, reference is
made to the year of construction to determine steel strengths. However, it
is possible that the year of construction and the year of steel member
fabrication are not coincident when salvaged members are used. In this
case, the year of steel fabrication shall be used in determining allowable
stresses.
• Truss members and its location shall be clearly identified during load rating
in a simple manner in accordance with the BMS-BIM or the AICB Manual.
• Section capacities of steel members shall be in accordance with the
current AASHTO MCEB or DPWH Design Guidelines.

3.10.2 Members Requiring Rating

• Truss Members - A rating is required for all members that make up a truss. If
a truss is symmetrical about its midspan centerline and the member
conditions are basically the same, then all members on only one side of the
centerline require a rating. A rating is not required for a portal or sway
bracing members.
• Interior Floor Beams - A rating is required for the critical floor beam. The
rater should determine the critical floor beam based on the existing
member condition, cross-sectional area, grade, loading condition or any
factor that may influence the strength of the member.
• End Floor Beams - A rating is required for an end floor beam when the cross-
sectional size is different from that used in an interior floor beam or when
the existing condition state requires capacity check or evaluation.
• Interior Stringers - A rating is required for the critical stringer. The
determination of the critical stringer is similar to a critical floor beam.
• Exterior Stringers - A rating is required for an exterior stringer when the cross-
sectional size is different from that used in an interior stringer or when the
existing condition state of the member requires capacity check or
evaluation.

46 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 3.10.3 Calculations

• A set of calculations shall be submitted with each rating. These calculations

shall include:
 Analysis model of truss (diagram) with member labels and node
numbers,
 Derivation for member section properties,
 Derivations for dead loads,
 Derivations for live loads and distribution factors, and
 Any other calculations or assumptions used for rating.
• Live Loads
Live load distribution factors shall be calculated in accordance with the
DPWH Design Guidelines.
• Dead Loads
1. The final sum of all the individual weight components for dead load
calculations may be rounded up to the next 50N.
2. Dead loads supported by stringers and applied after a cast-in-
place concrete deck has cured shall be distributed equally to all
stringers. Examples include asphalt and curbs.
3. Dead loads supported by stringers and applied before a cast-in-
place concrete deck has cured (or applied when the deck is not
cast-in-place concrete) shall be distributed to the applicable
individual supporting stringer. Examples include stringer weight and
deck, but not necessarily overlay weight.
4. Dead loads due to utilities shall be considered when it is found to
be significant, as per rating engineer’s judgment. Application of
load due to utilities is left to the rating engineer’s discretion.

3.11 RATING BRIDGES WITHOUT PLANS

Bridge inventory requires complete set of as-built drawings and inspection records.
However, when records of old or existing bridges are not available, it will be
necessary to reconstruct the as-built condition drawings of bridges that will
become the basis of bridge inventory, inspection and load rating.

In order to complete and update bridge records and data, available sketches
and inventory drawings should be checked and verified on site and changes or
repairs and rehabilitation made on the bridge should be reflected on these
records. When data on bridge members and components are lacking or
measurements and fields tests are difficult, if not impossible to perform, structural
drawings shall be reconstructed by “Presumption of Original Design”. That is,
reconstruction of original design shall be done by back-analysis using the
governing design specifications during the time of construction.

In this manner, it will be necessary to know the history of the bridge, its original
intended function and load capacity. The year of design or construction will
provide valuable information as this will provide the governing design
specifications on which bridge details were based.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 47

DPWH
 When load rating will have to be performed for bridges without plans, the following
guidelines shall be observed:

[1] When no plans or other documentation for a particular bridge structure is

available, its numerical rating shall be determined by a Registered
Professional Engineer appointed by DPWH. This rating shall be based on a
complete and comprehensive engineering or detail inspection as specified
by BMS-BIM, AASHTO MCEB or the AICB Manual. The rating engineer can
assign a maximum Inventory Rating of 33 metric tons (using MS18 as the
rating vehicle) when the following conditions are met:

→ The bridge has been carrying unrestricted traffic for many years,
→ There are no signs of significant capacity-reducing distress or
deterioration,
→ Bridge must exhibit proper proportions and span-to-depth ratios of
the main members, indicating that the original design was done by
competent engineers,
→ Construction details including slab thickness and reinforcement
cover over any exposed reinforcement conform to the
specifications current at the time of the estimated construction date,
and
→ Appearance shows that construction was done by a competent
builder.

[2] When there are signs of capacity-reducing distress or deterioration, an

appropriate judgment should be made and an Inventory Rating
proportionally less than 33 metric tons shall be given to the bridge structure.
The process is the same for operating rating except that the maximum
operating rating of 36 metric tons can be assigned.
[3] Load testing of bridge structures to determine load capacity will be
permitted where member details are unknown or an accurate loading
history unavailable. Allowable postings will be established at 75% of the
proof load vehicle. The proof load vehicle shall be as determined by DPWH
based on the rating vehicle given at Section 3.4.2 or the posting vehicle
presented at Section 3.4.3. Careful planning for load testing shall be done
prior to execution so as not to overstress the bridge.

3.12 LOAD POSTING

1. Posting Vehicle Ratings are used to determine the maximum vehicle loads
that will be allowed to travel on bridges. The Posting Vehicles are
composed of the maximum vehicle loads currently permitted by law. In the
Philippines, the Legal Loads are based on the Maximum Allowable Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) as per Republic Act RA No. 8794 (Table 3.12-1).
Consequently, the Posting Ratings are a means for ensuring the safe use of
bridges by vehicles that do not exceed the legal loads. However, for the
purposes of load posting, the posting vehicles recommended are those
shown in Table 3.12-2.

48 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 2. In this Manual, Load Posting shall be done at the Inventory Level to ensure
safe live load that can be carried by the bridge for an indefinite period of
time. On the other hand, Permit Live Load shall be that equivalent to the
Operating Level Load Rating.

3. If a structure rating indicates a need for posting, the DPWH Office

responsible for the bridge shall perform load rating/posting analysis
following Figure 3.12-1 guidelines and load post the bridge. The BMS Unit
shall be informed of any changes in load capacity and load posting of the
bridge to update the bridge record and inventory.

4. The following guidelines will be used for load posting:

• A bridge should be capable of carrying a minimum gross live load
weight of 3.0 metric tons at Inventory or Operating Level. Bridges not
capable of carrying a minimum gross live load weight of 3.0 metric tons
must be closed.

• A concrete bridge need not be posted for restricted loading when it has
been carrying normal traffic for an appreciable length of time and
shows no distress.

• When it becomes necessary to reduce the allowable live loads in order

to conform to the capacity of a structure, such reduction should be
based on the assumption that each axle load maintains a proportional
relation to the total load of the vehicle or vehicle combination.

• The live load to be used for posting considerations should be any of the
typical posting loads shown in Figure 3.4-2 of Section 3.4.3 and Table
3.12-2.

• When the Inventory Rating value of a structural member is less than 33

metric tons, the structural member shall be rated for the posting vehicles
and the results recorded on the Rating Summary Sheet as shown in
Figure 3.13-2.

• However, if the rating engineer feels that a posting analysis would be

helpful in assessing the overall condition of a structure whose Inventory
Rating is greater than or equal to 33 metric tons, then the posting rating
values may be calculated and recorded on the Rating Summary Sheet.

• When the posting ratings for bridge members are greater than or equal
to 95% of the legal limits (or posting vehicles), the structure can be
exempted from posting requirement. The rating engineer shall then
make the determination and fill out the Rating Summary Sheet
accordingly.

• The member or section with the lowest rating factor shall govern the
load posting of the bridge. Posting load shall be based on the lowest
rating factor calculated.

5. Load Posting Sign shall be as shown in Figure 3.12-3. Basically, three Truck
Vehicle Types shall be used for Load Posting as indicated in Table 3.12-2

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 49

DPWH
 Table 3.12-1 Maximum Allowable Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as per RA No. 8794**

MAX. ALLOWABLE
TRUCKS/TRAILERS DESCRIPTION
GVW (in kgs.)

CODE 1-1*
TRUCK WITH 2 AXLES
16,880
(6 WHEELS)

CODE 1-2*
TRUCK WITH TANDEM REAR AXLE
27,250
3 AXLES (10 WHEELS)

CODE 1-3
TRUCK WITH TANDEM REAR AXLE
29,700
4 AXLES (14 WHEELS)

CODE 11-1
TRUCK SEMI-TRAILER
30,380
WITH 3 AXLES (10 WHEELS)

CODE 11-2
TRUCK SEMI-TRAILER
30,380
WITH 4 AXLES (14 WHEELS)

CODE 12-1
TRUCK SEMI-TRAILER
30,380
WITH 4 AXLES (14 WHEELS)

CODE 12-2*
TRUCK SEMI-TRAILER
37,800
WITH 5 AXLES (18 WHEELS)

CODE 11-3 TRUCK – TRAILER WITH 2 AXLES

AT MOTOR VEHICLE & 3 AXLES 30,378
AT TRAILER (18 WHEELS)
CODE 11-3 TRUCK –TRAILER WITH 2 AXLES
AT MOTOR VEHICLE & 2 AXLES 30,378
AT TRAILER (14 WHEELS)
CODE 11-12 TRUCK –TRAILER WITH 2 AXLES
AT MOTOR VEHICLE & 3 AXLES 36,900
AT TRAILER (18 WHEELS)
CODE 12-3 TRUCK –TRAILER WITH 3 AXLES
AT MOTOR VEHICLE & 3 AXLES 41,000
AT TRAILER (22 WHEELS)
CODE 12-11 TRUCK –TRAILER WITH 3 AXLES
AT MOTOR VEHICLE & 2 AXLES 37,800
AT TRAILER (18 WHEELS)
CODE 12-12 TRUCK –TRAILER WITH 3 AXLES
AT MOTOR VEHICLE & 3 AXLES 41,000
AT TRAILER (22 WHEELS)
Note: *Truck CODE 1-1, 1-2 & 12-2 corresponds to the Posting Vehicles (see Table 3.12-2).
**When computing actual load rating use maximum allowable GVW in the
amended IRR of RA No. 8794 as shown on page 56.

50 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION

LOAD RATE USING

RATING VEHICLE (MS18)

IR < 3.0 METRIC TONS 3.0 TONS < IR < MS18 (RF<1) IR ≥ MS18 (RF ≥ 1)
3.0 TONS < OR < MS18 (RF<1) OR ≥ MS18 (RF ≥ 1)

LOAD RATING USING LOAD

POSTING VEHICLES

RATING ≥ 95% YES NO POSTING REQUIRED

CLOSE BRIDGE OF POSTING PROCEED WITH
VEHICLE? ORDINARY INSPECTION

NO

LOAD POST BRIDGE AT

INVENTORY LEVEL

UPDATE BRIDGE RECORD

NOTES:
IR - INVENTORY RATING OR - OPERATING RATING RF - RATING FACTOR

Figure 3.12-1 Flowchart of Load Posting Guideline

3.13 REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION

The load rating of bridge should be completely documented in writing including all
background information such as field inspection reports, material and load test
data, all supporting computations, and a clear statement of all assumptions used
in calculating the load rating. If a computer model was used, the input data file
should be retained for future use.

3.13.1 Results of Rating Calculations

• The results of rating calculations will be summarized by the rating

engineer on the Rating Summary Sheet (see Figure 13.3-2) which will3 -be
28
retained in the structure folder as a record of the adequacy of the
structure.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 51

DPWH
 Table 3.12-2 Load Posting Vehicles

Gross Weight
Truck Type Truck Configuration Description
(metric tons)

Type 1-1 17 2-axle truck

Type 1-2 27 3-axle truck

3-axle truck with 2-

Type 12-2 38
axle semi-trailer

The above vehicles are in metric tons. To distinguish metric tons with other units,
the following conversion are used:

Metric Ton : 1000.00 kilograms = 2204 lbs.

British Ton (Long Ton) : 1016.06 kilograms = 2240 lbs.
US Ton (Short Ton) : 907.185 kilograms = 2000 lbs.

• The necessary information of the bridge structure typical of the BMS-BIM

record sheet shall be shown on the summary sheet.
• The Summary Sheet shall reflect the Inventory and Operating Ratings
obtained for each element requiring an analysis. Ratings shall be
reported to tenths of a metric ton.
• The member being rated, including any relevant information shall be
stated in the Summary Sheet.
• If posting vehicle analysis is required, record the posting rating on the
Summary Sheet. Postings shall be reported and recorded in metric ton
of vehicle. Posting loads shall be that corresponding to the member or
section with the lowest rating factor.
• State in comments :
(a) If the individual critical member rates considerably below other
structure members, and is not representative of the entire structure,
and
(b) Any reduction in cross-section or allowable stresses used to rate the
member and the reason for the reduction.
(c) Any assumption used in load rating.
(d) Recommendations for posting, closure or immediate counter-
measures or repair.

52 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 WLEOI G AH DT
LL II M
M IITT INDICATE LOAD
RATING
(METRIC TONS)

T
POSTING
VEHICLES
T
T
NOTE:
REFER TO Appendix IV: DRAWING OF LOAD POSTING SIGN FOR DETAILS

Figure 3.13-1 Sample Load Posting Sign

3.13.2 Rating Report Documentation

The rating report submittal for documentation shall include:

1. A completed Rating Summary Sheet
2. Bridge geometry, description and sources of information
3. Results of inspection and testing conducted, including conditions of critical
members
4. A set of Calculation Sheets showing
a. Derivation of dead loads,
b. Live load distribution factors,
c. Structure model and assumptions
d. Computer input information,
e. Load Rating calculations (capacity and demand), and
f. Other relevant considerations.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 53

DPWH
 5. As-built plans and field surveys used in the rating process
6. The Rating Engineer and Checker’s signature with date signed are required
on the Rating Summary Sheet and on the calculation sheets and the first
page of each set of computer output.
7. All items that compose the rating package shall be placed in a folder that
is clearly labeled with the structure name and number.

REFERENCES/AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
SUMMARY OF INSPECTION/TESTING
DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND

BRIDGE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY
HIGHWAYS

CALCULATION SHEETS
RATING SUMMARY SHEET
LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS FOR

SAMPLE BRIDGE

BRIDGE ID
BRIDGE NAME
ROAD ID/NAME
LOCATION
STRUCTURE TYPE

RATER
CHECKER

Figure 3.13-2 Load Rating Report and Documentation

54 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS
BRIDGE ID:
AND HIGHWAYS

LOAD RATING SUMMARY BRIDGE NAME:

INDICATE
Rating Vehicle: ROAD ID / INFORMATION
□ AASHTO MS18 (33 Metric Tons) ROAD NAME: REQUIRED FOR
BRIDGE UNDER
Rating Condition: LOCATION: RATING
Asphalt Thickness : __________ mm
Rating Method: STRUCTURE
______________________________ TYPE:

FILL-UP STRUCTURE
Structural Member MEMBER BEING
LOAD RATED
LOAD RATING (Metric Tons)
Inventory INDICATE LOAD
MS 18
RATING FOR MS18
Truck Operating RATING VEHICLE

LOAD POSTING (Metric Tons)

Type 1-1 Inventory
Truck
(17 tons) Operating
Type 1-2 Inventory IF LOAD RATING < MS18,
Truck PERFORM LOAD POSTING
(27 tons) Operating USING POSTING VEHICLES

Type 12-2 Inventory

Truck
(38 tons) Operating POSTING
VEHICLES

TYPE 1 - 1 TYPE 1 - 2 TYPE 12 - 2

INDICATE POSTING
LOAD IN METRIC TONS
_____ Metric Tons _____ Metric Tons _____ Metric Tons BASED ON LOAD
RATING/POSTING
POSTING LOAD CALCULATIONS

Comments:
•

•
WRITE ANY
• COMMENT OR
ASSUMPTIONS USED
DURING LOAD
RATING

Rated by: Date: Checked by: Date: RATING ENGINEER AND

CHECKER MUST
INDICATE NAME & SIGN

Figure 3.13-3 Load Rating Summary Sheet

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 55

DPWH
56 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.
DPWH
 Chapter 4
LOAD RATING EXAMPLES

4.1 GENERAL

This Chapter illustrates some example cases to show load rating procedures for
existing bridge structures. The examples given in this Chapter will refer to this
Manual and the AASHTO MCEB for bridge rating and the DPWH Design Guidelines
and AASHTO Standard Specifications for the design specifications.

Five examples are presented in this Chapter, which includes:

 Example 1: Reinforced Concrete Flat Slab Bridge

1-1: Simple
1-2: Continuous
 Example 2: Reinforced Concrete Deck Girder Bridge
2-1: Simple
2-2: Continuous
 Example 3: Prestressed Concrete Deck Girder Bridge
3-1: Simple
3-2: Continuous
 Example 4: Steel I - Girder Bridge
4-1: Simple
4-2: Continuous
 Example 5: Reinforced Concrete Deck Slab

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 57

DPWH
4.2 DESCRIPTION

4.2.1 Reinforced Concrete Flat Slab Bridge

4.2.1.1 Simple

A bridge built in 1958 consists of a simple span supported reinforced concrete flat
slab on abutments with span length 8.0m and carriageway width 7.32m curb to
curb. The As-Built Plans General Notes obtained indicate that the concrete
allowable stress is 6.9MPa and steel allowable stress is137.9MPa. Results of the
bridge condition inspection indicate that the bridge is damaged with rebar
section loss. There is a 50mm thick wearing course on the deck and barrier rail,
sidewalk and other weights can be assumed to be 18.5kN/m.

It is required to load rate the bridge using AASHTO MS18 (33 metric tons) as the
rating vehicle. In case of the load rating falls below MS18, the load posting levels
will be calculated based on Section 3.4 of this Manual.

The load rating will be done applied 1m widths of RCFS evaluating rebar section
loss of the materials occurred. Load rating will be performed using the Load Factor
Method.

Figure 4.2-1 RCFS Simple Bridge (Example 1-1)

Results of the Load Rating and Load Posting Calculations according to the
computer-based Program are presented in Appendix II, Example 1-1 of this Manual.
Summary Results of the load rating calculation is shown in Figure 4.2-2.

58 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS
BRIDGE ID:
AND HIGHWAYS

LOAD RATING SUMMARY BRIDGE NAME: RCFS SAMPLE 1-1 (Simple)

Rating Vehicle: ROAD ID /
□ AASHTO MS18 (33 Metric Tons) ROAD NAME:

Rating Condition: LOCATION:

Asphalt Thickness : __50___ mm
Rating Method: STRUCTURE
TYPE: RCFS BRIDGE
_ Load Factor Method__

(Bending)
Structural Member at Midspan
(Shear)

LOAD RATING (Metric Tons)

MS 18 Inventory 40.3
Truck
(33 tons) Operating 67.0

LOAD POSTING (Metric Tons)

Type 1-1 Inventory
Truck
(17 tons) Operating
Type 1-2 Inventory
Truck
(27 tons) Operating
Type 12-2 Inventory
Truck
(38 tons) Operating

TYPE 1 - 1 TYPE 1 - 2 TYPE 12 - 2

Metric Tons Metric Tons Metric Tons

POSTING LOAD
Comments:
• Load Rating done at mid span only for Moment resulted to Rating Factors greater than 1.0.
• Load Posting is not necessary since the bridge can carry normal loads.

Rated by: Date: Checked by: Date:

Figure 4.2-2 Load Rating Summary Sheet for Example 1-1

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 59

DPWH
 4.2.1.2 Continuous

Example 1-2 is a bridge built in 1982 consisting of three (3) continuous spans
supported reinforced concrete flat slab on wall type RC Piers and RC Cantilever
Abutments with span length 8.0m+8.0m+8.0m and carriageway width 7.32m curb
to curb. The As-Built Plans General Notes obtained indicate a concrete allowable
stress of 8.3MPa and steel allowable stress of 137.9MPa. Results of the bridge
inspection indicate that the bridge condition is no damaged. There are 50mm
wearing course found on the deck and barrier rail, sidewalk and other weight can
be assumed to be 18.5kN/m.

It is required to load rate the bridge using AASHTO MS18 (33 metric tons) as the
rating vehicle. In case of the load rating falls below MS18, the load posting levels
will be calculated based on Section 3.4 of this Manual.

The load rating will be done applied 1m widths of RCFS. Load rating will be
performed using the Load Factor Method.

Figure 4.2-3 RCFS Continuous Bridge (Example 1-2)

Results of the Load Rating and Load Posting Calculations according to the
computer-based Program are presented in Appendix II, Example 1-2 of this Manual.
Summary Results of the load rating calculation is shown in Figure 4.2-4.

60 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS
BRIDGE ID:
AND HIGHWAYS
RCFS EXAMPLE 1-2
LOAD RATING SUMMARY BRIDGE NAME:
(Continuous)
Rating Vehicle: ROAD ID /
□ AASHTO MS18 (33 Metric Tons) ROAD NAME:
Rating Condition: LOCATION:
Asphalt Thickness : __50___ mm
Rating Method: STRUCTURE
TYPE: RCFS BRIDGE
_ Load Factor Method__

(Bending) (Bending)
Structural Member at Midspan at Pier

LOAD RATING (Metric Tons)

MS 18 Inventory 35.9 36.9
Truck
(33 tons) Operating 60.0 62.0

LOAD POSTING (Metric Tons)

Type 1-1 Inventory
Truck
(17 tons) Operating
Type 1-2 Inventory
Truck
(27 tons) Operating
Type 12-2 Inventory
Truck
(38 tons) Operating

TYPE 1 - 1 TYPE 1 - 2 TYPE 12 - 2

Metric Tons Metric Tons Metric Tons

POSTING LOAD
Comments:
• Load Rating done at mid span and at Pier only for Moment resulted to Rating Factors greater than 1.0.
• Load Posting is not necessary since the bridge can carry normal loads.

Rated by: Date: Checked by: Date:

Figure 4.2-4 Load Rating Summary Sheet for Example 1-2

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 61

DPWH
4.2.2 REINFORCED CONCRETE DECK GIRDER BRIDGE

4.2.2.1 Simple

A bridge built in 1987 consists of a simply supported reinforced concrete T-beams

on abutments. The span length is 10.4m. Bridge carriageway is 7.32m supported
by four RC girders with spacing 2.400m on centers. The As-Built Plans General
Notes obtained indicate a concrete allowable stress of 8.3MPa and steel
allowable stress of 137.9MPa. Results of the bridge inspection indicate that the
bridge condition is damaged with shear cracks. There are 50mm wearing course
found on the deck and barrier rail weight can be assumed to be 3.6kN/m.

It is required to load rate the bridge using AASHTO MS18 (33 metric tons) as the
rating vehicle. In case of the load rating falls below MS18, the load posting levels
will be calculated based on Section 3.4 of this Manual.

The load rating will be done for the interior girder evaluating shear cracks of the
materials occurred. Load rating will be performed using the Allowable Stress and
the Load Factor Method.

A1 A2
10.40 m

BRIDGE ELEVATION

9.54m

7.32m

2.40m 2.40m 2.40m

DECK SECTION

Figure 4.3-1 RCDG Bridge (Example 2-1)

Results of the Load Rating and Load Posting Calculations according to the
computer-based Program are presented in Appendix II, Example 2-1 of this Manual.
Summary Results of the load rating calculation is shown in Figure 4.3-2.

62 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS
BRIDGE ID:
AND HIGHWAYS

LOAD RATING SUMMARY BRIDGE NAME: RCDG SAMPLE 2-1 (Simple)

Rating Vehicle: ROAD ID /
□ AASHTO MS18 (33 Metric Tons) ROAD NAME:
Rating Condition: LOCATION:
Asphalt Thickness : __50___ mm
Rating Method: STRUCTURE
TYPE: RCDG BRIDGE
_ Load Factor Method__

Interior Girder Interior Girder

Structural Member G2 (Bending) G2 (Shear)
At Midspan At Support

LOAD RATING (Metric Tons)

MS 18 Inventory 16.7 9.6
Truck
(33 tons) Operating 27.9 16.1

LOAD POSTING (Metric Tons)

Type 1-1 Inventory 11.1 7.6
Truck
(17 tons) Operating 18.6 12.7
Type 1-2 Inventory 14.5 8.9
Truck
(27 tons) Operating 24.2 14.9
Type 12-2 Inventory 21.8 14.5
Truck
(38 tons) Operating 36.4 24.2

TYPE 1 - 1 TYPE 1 - 2 TYPE 12 - 2

8 Metric Tons 9 Metric Tons 14 Metric Tons

POSTING LOAD
Comments:
• Load rating is governed by Girder G2 (interior girder).

A1 A2
10.40 m

BRIDGE ELEVATION
Rated by: Date: Checked by: Date:

Figure 4.3-2 Load Rating Summary Sheet for Example 2-1

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 63

DPWH
 4.2.2.2 Continuous

A bridge built in 2000 consists of three-span continuous supported reinforced

concrete T-beams on concrete bents and abutments. The span lengths consist of
15.0m, 15.0m and 15.0m with a total bridge length of 45.0m. Bridge carriageway is
7.32m supported by four RC girders spaced at 2.400m on centers. The As-Built
Plans General Notes obtained indicate a concrete allowable stress of 8.3MPa and
steel allowable stress of 137.9MPa. Results of the bridge inspection indicate that
the bridge condition is no damaged. There are no wearing course found on the
deck and barrier rail weight can be assumed to be 13.0kN/m.

It is required to load rate the bridge using AASHTO MS18 (33 metric tons) as the
rating vehicle. In case of the load rating falls below MS18, the load posting levels
will be calculated based on Section 3.4 of this Manual.

The load rating will be done for the interior girder of the first span. Load rating will
be performed using the Allowable Stress and the Load Factor Method.

15.00m 15.00m 15.00m

BRIDGE ELEVATION

9.54m

7.32m

2.40m 2.40m 2.40m

DECK SECTION

Figure 4.3-3 RCDG Bridge (Example 2-2)

Results of the Load Rating and Load Posting Calculations according to the
computer-based Program are presented in Appendix II, Example 2-2 of this Manual.
Summary Results of the load rating calculation is shown in Figure 5.3-4.

64 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS
BRIDGE ID:
AND HIGHWAYS
RCDG SAMPLE 2-2
LOAD RATING SUMMARY BRIDGE NAME:
(Continuous)
Rating Vehicle: ROAD ID /
□ AASHTO MS18 (33 Metric Tons) ROAD NAME:
Rating Condition: LOCATION:
Asphalt Thickness : __0___ mm
Rating Method: STRUCTURE
TYPE: RCDG BRIDGE
_ Load Factor Method__

Interior Girder Interior Girder Interior Girder

Structural Member G2 (Bending) G2 (Bending) G2 (Shear)
At Midspan At Pier At Pier

LOAD RATING (Metric Tons)

MS 18 Inventory 56.3 41.7 31.2
Truck
(33 tons) Operating 93.9 69.6 52.0

LOAD POSTING (Metric Tons)

Type 1-1 Inventory 40.6 43.6 41.3
Truck
(17 tons) Operating 67.8 72.8 69.0
Type 1-2 Inventory 50.1 46.8 45.4
Truck
(27 tons) Operating 83.6 78.1 75.7
Type 12-2 Inventory 77.1 50.9 59.7
Truck
(38 tons) Operating 128.7 85.0 99.7

TYPE 1 - 1 TYPE 1 - 2 TYPE 12 - 2

17 Metric Tons 27 Metric Tons 38 Metric Tons

POSTING LOAD
COMMENTS:
• LOAD RATING IS GOVERNED BY GIRDER G2 (INTERIOR GIRDER).

15.0m 15.0m 15.0m

BRIDGE ELEVATION

Rated by: Date: Checked by: Date:

Figure 4.3-4 Load Rating Summary Sheet for Example 2-2

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 65

DPWH
4.2.3 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE DECK GIRDER BRIDGE

4.2.3.1 Simple

The following example illustrates a simple span precast, prestressed deck girder
bridge. The bridge has a span length 35.0m. The bridge is 9.54m wide with a clear
carriageway width of 7.32m designed to carry two lanes of traffic. The deck is
supported by four (4) precast, prestressed concrete deck girders spaced at 2.1m
on centers. The girder is precast at 1.6m depth with 0.203 wall thickness. Deck slab
at 0.20m thick is cast in place over the precast I Girder.

A1 A2
35.00 m

BRIDGE ELEVATION

SUPERSTRUCTURE CROSS SECTION

Figure 4.4-1 PC Deck Girder Bridge (Example 3-1)

Notes on As-Built Plans indicate that the concrete strengths are 24.2MPa and
38MPa for the slab and I Girder, respectively. In addition, prestress working force is
given as 5270kN at 100mm above the girder soffit at midspan. The reinforcing steel
and the prestressing steel are assumed to have strengths of fy = 415MPa and fu =
1860MPa.

Load rating calculations will be done for the interior I girder. Evaluation is done at
the midspan and support sections of the girder.

The load rating calculation according to the computer-based Program are

presented in Appendix II, Example 3-1 of this Manual while the summary results of
load rating is shown in Figure 4.4-2.

66 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS
BRIDGE ID:
AND HIGHWAYS

LOAD RATING SUMMARY BRIDGE NAME: PCDG SAMPLE 3-1(Simple)

Rating Vehicle: ROAD ID /
□ AASHTO MS18 (33 Metric Tons) ROAD NAME:
Rating Condition: LOCATION:
Asphalt Thickness : __50___ mm
Rating Method: STRUCTURE
TYPE: PCDG BRIDGE
_Load Factor Method__

Interior Girder Interior Girder

Structural Member G2 (Bending) G2 (Shear)
At Midspan At Support

LOAD RATING (Metric Tons)

MS 18 Inventory 43.4 49.6
Truck
(33 tons) Operating 72.5 82.7

LOAD POSTING (Metric Tons)

Type 1-1 Inventory
Truck
(17 tons) Operating
Type 1-2 Inventory
Truck
(27 tons) Operating
Type 12-2 Inventory
Truck
(38 tons) Operating

TYPE 1 - 1 TYPE 1 - 2 TYPE 12 - 2

___ Metric Tons ___ Metric Tons ___ Metric Tons

POSTING LOAD
Comments:
• Rating Factors calculated for both serviceability and strength limit states are all greater than one (1).
• Load Posting is not necessary..

Rated by: Date: Checked by: Date:

Figure 4.4-2 Load Rating Summary Sheet for Example 3-1

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 67

DPWH
 4.2.3.2 Continuous

The following example illustrates a three-span continuous precast, prestressed

deck girder bridge. The span lengths consist of 35.0m, 35.0m and 35.0m with a
total bridge length of 105.0m. The bridge is 9.54m wide with a clear carriageway
width of 7.32m designed to carry two lanes of traffic. The deck is supported by
four (4) precast, prestressed concrete deck girders spaced at 2.1m on centers.
The girder is precast at 1.6m depth with 0.203 wall thickness. Deck slab at 0.20m
thick is cast in place over the precast I Girder.

BRIDGE ELEVATION

SUPERSTRUCTURE CROSS SECTION

SECTION AT MIDSPAN SECTION AT PIER SUPPORT

Figure 4.4-3 PC Deck Girder Bridge (Example 3-2)

Notes on As-Built Plans indicate that the concrete strengths are 24.2MPa and
38MPa for the slab and I-Girder, respectively. In addition, prestress working force is
given as 6750kN at 100mm above the girder soffit at midspan. The reinforcing steel
and the prestressing steel are assumed to have strengths of fy = 415MPa and fu =
1860MPa.

Load rating calculations will be done for the interior I-Girder. Evaluation is done at
the midspan and support sections of the girder.

The load rating calculation according to the computer-based Program are

presented in Appendix II, Example 3-2 of this Manual while the summary results of
load rating is shown in Figure 4.4-4.

68 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS
BRIDGE ID:
AND HIGHWAYS
PCDG SAMPLE 3-2
LOAD RATING SUMMARY BRIDGE NAME:
(Continuous)
Rating Vehicle: ROAD ID /
□ AASHTO MS18 (33 Metric Tons) ROAD NAME:
Rating Condition: LOCATION:
Asphalt Thickness : __50___ mm
Rating Method: STRUCTURE
TYPE: PCDG BRIDGE
_Load Factor Method__

Interior Girder Interior Girder Interior Girder Interior Girder

Structural Member G2 (Bending) G2 (Shear) G2 (Bending) G2 (Shear)
At Midspan At Midspan At Pier At Pier

LOAD RATING (Metric Tons)

MS 18 Inventory 50.4 53.6 38.5 36.2
Truck
(33 tons) Operating 84.1 89.5 64.3 60.5

LOAD POSTING (Metric Tons)

Type 1-1 Inventory
Truck
(17 tons) Operating
Type 1-2 Inventory
Truck
(27 tons) Operating
Type 12-2 Inventory
Truck
(38 tons) Operating

TYPE 1 - 1 TYPE 1 - 2 TYPE 12 - 2

___ Metric Tons ___ Metric Tons ___ Metric Tons

POSTING LOAD
Comments:
• Rating Factors calculated for both serviceability and strength limit states are all greater than one (1).
• Load Posting is not necessary..

BRIDGE ELEVATION

Rated by: Date: Checked by: Date:

Figure 4.4-4 Load Rating Summary Sheet for Example 3-2

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 69

DPWH
4.2.4 STEEL I-GIRDER BRIDGE

4.2.4.1 Simple

This example illustrates load rating of an existing Steel I-Girder Bridge built in 1967.
The bridge is a simply supported steel girder at 35m long with cast-in-place
concrete deck, as shown in the figure below. As-Built Plans for the bridge states
that the allowable stresses for steel and concrete are f s = 265.0MPa and f c =
8.3MPa, respectively.

In the load rating calculations, assume that:

• the girders are not temporarily supported during concrete pouring of the
deck,
• the girder is composite for live load,
• each barrier rail weighs 4.6kN/m.

It is required to load rate the interior girder of this bridge using the Allowable Stress
Method.

Figure 4.5-1 Steel Girder Bridge (Example 4-1)

Load Rating was done for the interior girder of this bridge focusing at Midspan and
at Support of the steel girder. The load rating calculation according to the
computer-based Program are presented in Appendix II, Example 4-1 of this Manual
while the load rating summary is shown in Figure 4.5-2.

70 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS
BRIDGE ID:
AND HIGHWAYS

LOAD RATING SUMMARY BRIDGE NAME: SIG SAMPLE 4-1 (Simple)

Rating Vehicle: ROAD ID /
□ AASHTO MS18 (33 Metric Tons) ROAD NAME:
Rating Condition: LOCATION:
Asphalt Thickness : __None___ mm
Rating Method: STRUCTURE
TYPE: STEEL I-GIRDER BRIDGE
_Allowable Stress Method__

Interior Girder Interior Girder

Structural Member G2 (Bending) G2 (Shear)
At Midspan At Support

LOAD RATING (Metric Tons)

MS 18 Inventory 54.7 231.2
Truck
(33 tons) Operating 104.4 326.7

LOAD POSTING (Metric Tons)

Type 1-1 Inventory
Truck
(17 tons) Operating
Type 1-2 Inventory
Truck
(27 tons) Operating
Type 12-2 Inventory
Truck
(38 tons) Operating

TYPE 1 - 1 TYPE 1 - 2 TYPE 12 - 2

___ Metric Tons ___ Metric Tons ___ Metric Tons

POSTING LOAD
Comments:
• Load Rating done at Midspan and at Support resulted to Rating Factors greater than 1.0.
• Load Posting is not necessary since the bridge can carry normal loads.
• Future wearing course is not included in load rating.

Rated by: Date: Checked by: Date:

Figure 4.5-2 Load Rating Summary Sheet for Example 4-1

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 71

DPWH
 4.2.4.2 Continuous

This example illustrates load rating of an existing Steel I - Girder Bridge built in 1967.
The bridge is a two-span continuous steel girder at 54m long (27m +27m) with cast-
in-place concrete deck, as shown in the figure below. As-Built Plans for the bridge
states that the allowable stress for steel and concrete are f s = 137.9MPa and f c =
8.3MPa, respectively.

In the load rating calculations, assume that:

• the girders are not temporarily supported during concrete pouring of the
deck,
• the girder is composite for live load,
• the girder is braced every 4.5m with bracings weighing 1.47kN per girder,
• each barrier rail weighs 3.6kN/m.

It is required to load rate the interior girder of this bridge using the Allowable Stress
Method.
0.40th Point 1 2 1.0th Point
(Support)

27.0m 27.0m

54.0m

a. BRIDGE ELEVATION
22.0m

170

1.2m 12 @ 2.02m = 24.24m 1.2m

b. DECK SECTION

27.0m

GIRDER LAYOUT

Figure 4.5-3 Steel Girder Bridge (Example 4-2)

Load Rating was done for the interior girder of this bridge focusing on Section 1
(0.40th) and Section 2 (1.0th) points of the steel girder. The load rating calculation
according to the computer-based Program are presented in Appendix II, Example
4-2 of this Manual while the load rating summary is shown in Figure 4.5-4.

72 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS
BRIDGE ID:
AND HIGHWAYS
SIG SAMPLE 4-2
LOAD RATING SUMMARY BRIDGE NAME:
(Continuous)
Rating Vehicle: ROAD ID /
□ AASHTO MS18 (33 Metric Tons) ROAD NAME:
Rating Condition: LOCATION:
Asphalt Thickness : __None___ mm
Rating Method: STRUCTURE
TYPE: STEEL I-GIRDER BRIDGE
_Allowable Stress Method__

S1-G2 S1-G2 S1-G2 S1-G2

Structural Member SECT 1(Bending) SECT 1 (Shear) SECT 2(Bending) SECT 2 (Shear)

LOAD RATING (Metric Tons)

MS 18 Inventory 44.2 250.4 47.5 73.5
Truck
(33 tons) Operating 67.8 334.6 79.3 108.9

LOAD POSTING (Metric Tons)

Type 1-1 Inventory
Truck
(17 tons) Operating
Type 1-2 Inventory
Truck
(27 tons) Operating
Type 12-2 Inventory
Truck
(38 tons) Operating

TYPE 1 - 1 TYPE 1 - 2 TYPE 12 - 2

___ Metric Tons ___ Metric Tons ___ Metric Tons

POSTING LOAD
Comments:
• Load Rating done at Section 1(0.40th point) and Section 2(1.0th point) of Span 1 resulted to Rating Factors
greater than 1.0.
• Load Posting is not necessary since the bridge can carry normal loads.
• Future wearing course is not included in load rating.
0.40th Point 1 2 1.0th Point
(Support)

27.0m 27.0m

54.0m

Rated by: Date: Checked by: Date:

Figure 4.5-4 Load Rating Summary Sheet for Example 4-2

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 73

DPWH
4.2.5 REINFORCED CONCRETE DECK SLAB

This example presents load rating of bridge deck for an existing reinforced
concrete deck girder bridge. The bridge built in 1961 has three simple spans (10m
+ 15.5m + 10m) with 7m wide deck and 180mm thick slab. The concrete decks
are supported by three longitudinal reinforced concrete girders monolithic with the
deck slab.

The allowable stresses are 8.3MPa and 137.9MPa for concrete compression and
rebar tension, respectively.

It is required to load rate the bridge using AASHTO MS18 (33 metric tons) as the
rating vehicle.

The load rating will be performed for the inner slab and the cantilever slab sections
shown below using the Load Factor Method. Live load demand moments are
calculated using the DPWH Design Guidelines moment formulation with slab main
reinforcement perpendicular to traffic. Similarly, the wheel load on cantilever slab
is distributed over the width recommended by the DPWH Design Guidelines.

10000 15500 10000

Bridge Elevation

φ16 @ 250 o.c.

φ12 @ 250 o.c.

Deck Section Slab Reinforcement

Figure 4.6-1 RCDG Bridge (Example 5)

The results of the Load Rating Calculations according to the computer-based

Program are presented in Appendix II, Example 5 of this Manual. The Summary
Results of the load rating calculation is shown in Figure 4.6-2.

This Example 5 enables to apply to not only RCDG but also to PCDG and SIG.

74 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS
BRIDGE ID:
AND HIGHWAYS

LOAD RATING SUMMARY BRIDGE NAME: RCDS SAMPLE 5

Rating Vehicle: ROAD ID /
□ AASHTO MS18 (33 Metric Tons) ROAD NAME:
Rating Condition: LOCATION:
Asphalt Thickness : __50___ mm
Rating Method: STRUCTURE
TYPE: RCDG BRIDGE
_Load Factor Method__

Cantilever Slab Interior Slab

Structural Member Section 1 Section 2, 3

LOAD RATING (Metric Tons)

MS 18 Inventory 40.8 40.3
Truck
(33 tons) Operating 68.1 67.3

LOAD POSTING (Metric Tons)

Type 1-1 Inventory
Truck
(17 tons) Operating
Type 1-2 Inventory
Truck
(27 tons) Operating
Type 12-2 Inventory
Truck
(38 tons) Operating

TYPE 1 - 1 TYPE 1 - 2 TYPE 12 - 2

___ Metric Tons ___ Metric Tons ___ Metric Tons

POSTING LOAD
Comments:
• Load rating is performed for cantilever and interior slabs of Span 2.
• The Load Factor Method resulted in load factors greater than 1.0 for both the cantilever and interior slab.
• Load Posting not necessary.

Rated by: Date: Checked by: Date:

Figure 4.6-2 Load Rating Summary Sheet for Example 5

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 75

DPWH
 INTENTIONALLY BLANK

76 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 Chapter 5
COMPUTER-BASED PROGRAM ON LOAD RATING
5.1 PURPOSE OF THE COMPUTER-BASED PROGRAM ON LOAD RATING

The purpose of the Computer-based Program on Load Rating of Bridges (CBPLR) is

to guide and provide the Department of Public Works and Highways (DPWH) with
uniformity in the procedures and policies for determining the load capacity and
load rating of existing bridges based on the MLRB.

In any event, this Program should not overrule sound engineering judgment.

5.2 SCOPE OF THE COMPUTER-BASED PROGRAM

This Program has been developed to provide the DPWH with a load rating
calculations consistent with the objectives of the DPWH Bridge Management
System. The Program is focused on load rating calculations and load capacity
calculations with a Program User’s Manual.

This Program is applicable to four bridge types and one deck slab as follows.

RCFS (Reinforced Concrete Flat Slab Bridge): Simple RCFS

Continuous RCFS

RCDG (Reinforced Concrete Deck Girder Bridge): Simple Interior and Exterior Girder
Continuous Interior and Exterior Girder

PCDG (Prestressed Concrete Deck Girder Bridge):Simple Interior and Exterior Girder
Continuous Interior and Exterior Girder

SIG (Steel I Girder Bridge) : Simple Interior and Exterior Girder

Continuous Interior and Exterior Girder

RCDECK (Reinforced Concrete Deck Slab)

The calculations by this Program apply to all conventional concrete and steel
highway bridge structures in accordance with the DPWH Design Guidelines and the
AASHTO Standards. Special bridges or bridges other than highway bridges may
need special calculations not covered in this Program. General calculation is given
in this Program but more complex calculations must be used to determine actual
load rating.

This Program has been developed according to the Manual for Load Rating of
Bridges (MLRB).

For all matters not covered by this Program, the current DPWH and AASHTO
Specifications and Standards should be used as a guide. However, if bridge
member behavior is not consistent with the controlling specifications, such
deviations based on the known behavior of the member may be used but should
be fully covered.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 77

DPWH
5.3 PROCEDURE OF THE COMPUTER-BASED PROGRAM

This Program has been developed according to the Manual for Load Rating of
Bridges (MLRB). Though this Program has many advantages, it is required in deep
care for determination and assumption on load rating calculations as follows.

Advantages
- It's easy to calculate the Load Rating for Major Bridge Types.
- This Program provides 4 Bridge Types and RC Deck Slab, not only Simple and
Continuous Bridges but also Interior and Exterior Girder.
- DPWH Engineers can save time for determination of appropriate Load Rating
- DPWH Engineers can avoid inappropriate Load Rating Calculations

Deep Care
- To determine and assume appropriate Bridge Layout and Dimensions
- To determine and assume appropriate Rebar/PC Tendon Schedule inside of
Bridges
- To determine and assume appropriate Material Properties
- To determine appropriate evaluation for Bridge Current Condition (Damage)

Damage evaluation applied to this Program is shown in the Figure 5.3-1.

Procedure of the Computer-based Program on Load Rating is provided in detail in

the User’s Manual for function, installation, operation and others.

The user should follow and understand the procedure of this Program mentioned in
the User’s Manual as follows (refer to section 6 in the User’s Manual).

- Load Rating Principle for Resistance and Demand

- Damage Evaluation
- Difference between Interior/Exterior Girder
- Difference between Simple/Continuous Girder
- Meaning of Coloring cells
- Drawing attached with each bridge types

Procedure for each bridge types is provided with attached all display (screen) and
detailed explanations for note, input and applied equations in the output in the
User’s Manual. (Refer to Figure 5.3-2)

78 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 Damage evaluation is considered in this Program as follows:
Condition State
2-Poor or 3-Bad
2-Poor or more at near Support or near Midspan
Location (Section)
where loaded maximum demand forces
For Concrete Girder
greater than 0.3mm and its spacing
Cracking
smaller than 500mm
Severity Rebar exposure greater than 50 cm2 exposed and corroded
of
defect For Concrete Deck Slab
At Midspan
greater than 0.3mm, 2 directions,
At Support Cracking
and its spacing smaller than 500mm
Rebar exposure greater than 50 cm2 exposed and corroded

For Steel Girder

greater than 10% section loss

Corrosion
stratified rust with pitting of metal surface

Damage evaluation method is as follows:

Cracking Not consider concrete section loss of tension fiber
due to Moment Consider only by rebar exposure of tension fiber

Consider by reduction factor (Φ) according to shear crack

depth (Cw)
as mentioned below
Cw = > 0.5 b applying Φ= 1.0
then Shear resistance due to Concrete Vc = 0
Cw < 0.5 b then Φ= Cw / b
then Shear resistance due to Concrete Vc

For example, b = 400mm and shear crack depth 150mm

Vc* = ( 1-150 / 400 ) x Vc = 0.625 Vc

Concrete Shear crack depth

Cracking
Girder and
due to Shear
Deck Slab

Shear crack

b
Section loss of main Rebar (%) based on exposed Area
Rebar Exposure
Section loss of stirrups (%) based on exposed Area
Steel Actual section loss should be applied to steel girder dimension,
Corrosion
Girder and then calculate section properties considering section loss

Figure 5.3-1 Damage Evaluation in this Program

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 79

DPWH
 B. DEMAND FORCES

B0. INPUT
Girder width bw(m) 0.400
Girder Web height h (m) 0.600

FOR Fillet/Haunch width wf(m) 0.100

DEAD Fillet/Haunch height hf(m) 0.100
LOAD Slab thickness ts (m) 0.180
Slab width ws (m) 2.400
Length of Midspan L(m) 10.400

B1. DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

Self-weight of Girder 5.760
Fillet/Haunch 0.240
Slab Weight Continuous 10.368
Uniform Load per meter of Girder (kN/m)
Barrier Rail 1.800
Asphalt Overlay 2.640
Total 20.810
Moment (kN-m/m) M DL 281.4
Dead Load
Shear (kN) V DL 108.2

B2. LIVE-LOAD CALCULATIONS

LIVE-LOAD Type MS18(HS29)
Number of live load wheel line 1.312
INPUT FOR LIVE LOAD
Impact factor 0.300
span 10.400
without Impact ML 236.5
Max. MS18 moment for 10.40m span /wheel line
with Impact M LL 403.5
Max. MS18 shear at a distance "d" without Impact VL 117.7
from the support/wheel line with Impact V LL 200.7

Figure 5.3-2 Sample Procedure Sheet in the User’s Manual

80 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 MANUAL
FOR LOAD RATING
OF BRIDGES
3rd Edition

APPENDIX I
DAMAGE-PRONE MEMBERS

81
 In this Appendix, inspection points for damage-prone members are presented. The
focus of these inspection items are members or elements of the bridge structure
where stresses are concentrated and are easily damaged compared to other
members.

The following Inspection Points are classified by structure and by damage types.

A. Bridge Inspection by Structure (Member) Type

1. Steel I - Girder
2. Steel Box Girder
3. Steel Deck Plate
4. RC Deck Slab
5. PC and RC Girder
6. Abutment
7. Steel Pier
8. RC Pier
9. Bearing Shoe
10. Expansion Joint

B. Bridge Inspection by Damage Type

11. Steel Crack Due to Fatigue

12. Deformation
13. Corrosion, Loosening and Missing Bolts
14. Painting Deterioration
15. Corrosion
16. Concrete Cracks Due to External Forces, Etc.
17. Concrete Cracks Due to Construction Method
18. Concrete Crack Due to Environment, Etc.
19. Concrete Crack Due to Material Quality
20. Splitting, Exposed Concrete Reinforcing Bar
21. Honey Comb, Concrete Cavity

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed

82. DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY STRUCTURE TYPE
STRUCTURE TYPE
1 Steel I-Girder

• Deformation of main girder • Deformation of secondary member

INSPECTION
• Crack at welded portion • Water at girder end
POINTS
• Discoloration of painting and • Abnormality around bearing shoe bed
corrosion
• Defects of bolt (Loosening, Lost, Corrosion)

Loosening or lost bolt

Deformation of secondary
member

Deformation of main girder

Sample : Loosening of bolt

Crack of deck slab

Sample : Damage of secondary member

Corrosion of web,
flange, bolt
Crack at welded portion
of attached sole plate Damage of bearing

Sample : Corrosion of main girder

Crack at hinge joint of
cantilever span

Crack of lower flange Sample : Corrosion of bearing shoe

Manual for Load Rating Bridges, 3rd Ed. 83

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY STRUCTURE TYPE
STRUCTURE TYPE 2 Steel Box Girder

• Deformation of main girder • Defects of bolt

• Crack at welded portion between • Deformation of girder end
INSPECTION
main girder and cross beam • Water at girder end
POINTS
• Discoloration of painting and corrosion • Damages by animals, birds, or insects
• Abnormality of bearing shoe bed • Damages by trespassers/intruders

Different deflections among

main girders
Loosening and lost bolt

Crack at web of vertical

stiffener end

Crack at diaphragm

Crack at hinge joint

of cantilever span

Crack at end of lateral stiffener

Crack at welded portion between

longitudinal rib and lateral rib and nearby
areas

Crack of web at flange corner of cross beam

84 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY STRUCTURE TYPE

STRUCTURE TYPE 3 Steel Deck Plate

• Partial deformation of Deck Plate • Water at end of girder

INSPECTION • Loosening of bolt
POINTS • Welded cracking of longitudinal & lateral rib
• Abnormality around bearing shoe bed
• Discoloration, peeling of painting & • Damage of pavement/wearing
corrosion at bottom of deck slab and ribs surface

Deformation of steel plate deck

(maximum loading)

Lateral Rib Pavement

Deck Plate
Longitudinal Rib

Longitudinal cracks

Main
Pavement/Wearing Girder
surface Longitudinal
Erection piece removed Lateral Rib
by gas cutting Rib
Crack

Crack Painting damage

Crack

Sample : Crack

Crack

Plate Deck
Crack

Longitudinal Rib
Lateral Rib

Sample : Corrosion at bottom of deck slab

Manual for Load Rating Bridges, 3rd Ed. 85

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY STRUCTURE TYPE
STRUCTURE TYPE 4 RC Deck Slab
• Crack at end of slab, Free Lime, Splitting
INSPECTION
• Crack at bottom of Slab
POINTS
• Damage at Plate Connection

• Damage at Curb

Efflorescence

Crack, Splitting at end of Slab,

Bottom of Slab, outside of curb

Sample : Splitting, Exposed Reinforcement

Water leakage

Paint peeling/Corrosion

• Damage of Cantilever of Deck slab

Sample : Crack at Curb

Damage of drip portion

86 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 CORROSION OF STEEL PLATE

CAUSE OF CRACK PATTERN AT THE BOTTOM OF RC DECK SLAB

PATTERN ILLUSTRATION SAMPLE OF CRACK DAMAGE CAUSE

HAUNCH • LACK OF
DISTRIBUTION
CRACK AT
BAR
TRANSVERSE
DIRECTION • DRYING
(ONE-WAY) SHRINKAGE
• FATIGUE
(INITIAL
MAIN GIRDER CONDITION)

HAUNCH
• LACK OF
CRACK AT RIGIDITY OF
TRANSVERSE MAIN GIRDER
DIRECTION
(ONE-WAY) • FATIGUE
(PROGRESS
MAIN GIRDER CONDITION)

HAUNCH • DIFFERENT
CRACK AT RIGIDITY OF
LONGITUDINAL GIRDERS
DIRECTION
• SETTLEMENT
(ONE-WAY) OF BEARING,
SUBSTRUC-
MAIN GIRDER TURE

• LACK OF
HAUNCH SLAB
CRACK AT THICKNESS
LONGITUDINAL • TURTLE BACK
AND TRANSVERSE CRACK FOR
DIRECTIONS TWO WAY
(TWO-WAY) • FATIGUE
MAIN GIRDER (NEAR FINAL
CONDITION)

Manual for Load Rating Bridges, 3rd Ed. 87

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY STRUCTURE TYPE

STRUCTURE TYPE 5 PC and RC Girder

• Girder (Center span, 1/4 span, End of • Construction joint
INSPECTION girder, Interior support of continuous girder)
• Around bearing
POINTS • Point of change in cross section • Anchorage
• Excessive deflection/sagging • Others

(1) Center of Span

• Location of max bending moment, crack prone location

(2) ¼ of Span Length

• This section is prone to crack under the following circumstances: (a) bent-up of reinforcing bars,
(b) differential settlement, (c) poor fit of bearing shoe, (d) temperature change, etc. and for PC
Continuous girder , (e) lower and anchorage zone.

(3) Interior Support of Continuous Girder

• Location of negative maximum bending moment is prone to cracking

(4) End portion of Girder

• Damage prone location due to movement restriction of man girder, impact, etc.

(5) Around Bearing Shoe

• Damage prone location due to reaction of bearing shoe, horizontal forces of earthquake and
temperature change.

(6) Point of change in cross section

• Crack prone location due to stress concentration on sudden change of cross section.

PC anchor

Longitudinal cracks

2 1/4 of span length

4 End portion of girder

1 Span center crack

Sagging 6 Point of change in cross section

Sample : Crack at Center Span Sample : Crack at End Portion of Girder

88 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 Elevation of Girder (Continuous Girder)
3 INTERIOR SUPPORT

5 AROUND BEARING SHOE

AROUND BEARING SHOE INTERIOR SUPPORT

(7) HINGE OF CANTILEVER BRIDGE

Crack prone location due to stress concentration at
Sudden change in cross-section
Elevation of Girder (Cantilever Girder)

7 HINGE JOINT Sample : Crack at cantilever hinge

(8) CONSTRUCTION JOINT

8 CRACK AT
CONSTRUCTION

JOINT

Sample : Crack
(9) JOINT OF CONCRETE BLOCK
Crack prone location for the case of block erection
Method (under Segmental Construction Method)

9 JOINT OF CONCRETE BLOCK

(10) OTHERS
• Splitting and lifting at outside of curb, PC anchor (Post-tensioned)

Manual for Load Rating Bridges, 3rd Ed. 89

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY STRUCTURE TYPE

STRUCTURE TYPE 6 Abutment

• Cracks • Deformation by soil pressure
INSPECTION
• Construction joints • Damage of slope protection, erosion
POINTS • Concrete surface (honeycomb) • Vegetation, soil deposit around bearing shoes
• Water leakage • Settlement, wall rotation

DAMAGE - PRONE LOCATION

(1) Crack

Location Crack Pattern Cause to be Considered

 Regular Crack • Drying shrinkage at construction joint

• Differential settlement

 Crack at construction joint • Drying shrinkage at construction joint

Surface of
Abutment  Crack around area of reduction • Less reinforcement
in reinforcement • Horizontal force due to earthquake
• Alkali-aggregate reaction
 Crack with turtle back/web
• Drying shrinkage due to less reinforcing bar
pattern
• Poor Construction
Bottom of • Increase in load
Bearing  Crack around bearing shoe • Less reinforcing bar
Shoe • Horizontal force due to earthquake

CRACK PATTERN OF ABUTMENT

Sample : Crack at Backwall Sample : Crack at Wall

Sample : Crack around Bearing shoe

90 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 (2) Water Leak, Water Ponding

• Water leak from damage of expansion joint, drainage facility

Sample : Water Leak

(3) Settlement, Inclination, Movement (4) Others

Settlement : Foundation and bearing shoe. Soil deposit,

Vegetation growth
• Settlement of foundation should be
observed from road surface.

Inclination Movement : Foundation and bearing

shoe Erosion

• Foundation : Inclination of abutment due to

lateral movement and differential
settlement

Slope protection
• Bearing Shoe : Abnormal inclination due to damage
earthquake

Swelling of ground
surface Settlement

Flow

Soft Strata

Bearing Strata

Sample : Inclination abutment

Lateral Movement of Abutment

Manual for Load Rating Bridges, 3rd Ed. 91

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY STRUCTURE TYPE
STRUCTURE TYPE 7 Steel Pier
• Inclination of column, deflection of beam. • Abnormality at bearing shoe.
INSPECTION
• Weld-cracking at connection of diaphragm. • Weld-cracking at corner.
POINTS
• Splitting of painting and corrosion. • Water ponding at end portion.

• Efflorescence from deck slab

• Corrosion, paint peeling
• Water pool

Crack at location of
vertical rib penetration
Water from manhole

Deformation of bearing shoe

Cracks at end portion of vertical
Cracks at Diaphragm web

• Corner of flange crack

• Crack of web

Crack at end portion of vertical

Crack at member
stiffeners Loosening of rivet, bolt
Crack at location of
vertical rib penetration

Sample : Corrosion Sample : Missing Bolt

92 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY STRUCTURE TYPE
STRUCTURE TYPE 8 RC Pier
INSPECTION POINTS • Crack • Settlement / Inclination • Scouring

INSPECTION Close-up Visual Inspection, Measurement by Crack Scale, Photograph, Video,

METHOD Measurement by Plumb, Level, etc.

(1) Crack DAMAGE - PRONE LOCATION

Location Crack Pattern Cause to be Considered

 Crack at top surface • Increase in load • Settlement of support

• Early form removal
 Crack at top surface of pier • Shrinkage
center
Hammer-  Crack at bottom surface of • Inadequate construction treatment at construction joint
Head Pier cantilever • Shrinkage
 Crack in transverse direction of • Inadequate construction method at construction joint
construction joint • Shrinkage

 Crack with turtle back/web • Alkali-aggregate reaction

pattern • Shrinkage
• Inadequate construction method

 Crack at top surface of cantilever • Increase in load • Settlement of support

• Early form removal
 Crack at top of column, end • Inadequate construction method at construction joint
portion of haunch • Shrinkage

 Crack at whole column • Lack of reinforcing bar for shearing force due to
earthquake
Rigid
Frame  Crack at top of column, end • Stress concentration
Pier portion of haunch
 Crack at bottom surface of beam • Increase in load • Settlement of support
center • Early from removal
 Crack with turtle back/web • Alkali-aggregate reaction • Drying shrinkage
pattern • Inadequate construction method

Bearing • Increase in load

Shoe  Crack around bearing shoe bed • Lack of reinforcing bar
Bed • Horizontal force by earthquake

Crack of Hammer Head Pier Crack of Rigid Frame

Sample : Crack of Cantilever portion Sample : Crack of Pier

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 93

DPWH
 Cracks of Pier Top Sample : Cracks at bearing shoe bed

(1) Cracks Due to Increase in Load of Superstructure.

• Hammer head pier : cracks occur at top of cantilever arm.

• Rigid frame pier : cracks occur at the bottom of frame center span and top of cantilever joint

Main reinforcement Main reinforcement of

beam

• Hammer Head Pier • Rigid Frame Pier

(2) Cracks Due to earthquake.

The location of damage occurring under earthquake are:

• Bottom end of column, and

• Section with change in reinforcement.

Seismic force Seismic force

Seismic force Seismic force

Section with change Section with change

in reinforcement in reinforcement
Bottom end of Bottom end of column
column
• Crack at Pier • Crack at Rigid Frame

(3) Cracks Due to settlement of foundation for rigid frame pier.

• For rigid frame piers with isolated foundation, cracks occur at the joint corners due to relative
settlement of adjacent footing.

Settlement
Cracks Due to Settlement of Foundation

94 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 (2) Settlement, Inclination

• When driving piles on soft, unconsolidated soil layer to bearing strata, the possibility of negative skin
friction around the pie shaft occurs due to ground settlement, decrease in groundwater (pore water
pressure) and increase in load. This negative skin friction leads to damages on the pile foundation

• For the case of spread foundation with soft soil layer below the bearing strata, foundation inclination
may occur accompanying soft layer settlement.

Settlement
Sand strata

Negative Friction

Damage of pile Soft clay strata

Sand gravel strata

Damage of Pile and Settlement due to Settlement and Inclination due to Location
Negative Friction of Clay under Bearing Strata

* Negative Skin Friction

Negative skin friction ( skin friction acting downward) around the pile shaft occurs under ground
Settlement/consolidation. Such negative skin friction causes additional pile body force that could
damage or break the pile body or pile tip.

(3) Scouring

• Scouring often occurs during flood. For spread foundation, the cavity under the footing formed by bed
scouring could cause pier settlement and deformation. Flood water pressure could cause overturning
of such scoured pier, followed by structure collapse. After the flood, the cavity can be filled up again
by sedimentation of river bed.

(a) Unstable (c) Careful

(b) Unstable Pile

Spread Foundation and Scouring

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 95

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY STRUCTURE TYPE
STRUCTURE TYPE 9 Bearing Shoe
Bearing Shoe • Damage of mortar bed / base • Cracks
Bed / Base • Damage of substructure around bearing shoe

Anchor Bolt • Pull-out of bolt

• Damaged

• Loosened bolt • Corrosion

INSPECTION Set Bolt
• Damaged • Loosened nut
POINTS
• Damaged side block • Fallen-off roller
Bearing Shoe • Pin and roller damage • Corrosion
• Settlement and eccentricity • Movement
Abnormality of expansion and rotation due to:
Movement of • Temperature change
Bearing Shoe • Creep and shrinkage
• Deflection

(1) Bearing Shoe Bed Damage

• Crack, damage at bearing shoe bed • Damage of structure at bearing shoe bed

Sample : Damage of Mortar Sample : Damage of Pier Top

(2) Anchor Bolt Damage

Sample : Corrosion of Anchor Bolt Sample : Bending of Anchor Bolt

(3) Set Bolt Damage

Sample : Loosening of Bolt

96 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 (4) Bearing Shoe Condition
• Damage of side block of bearing shoe

Sample : Damage of side block Sample : Damage of side block

• Damage of Pin, Roller

Sample : Corrosion of Pin Sample : Falling of Roller

• Settlement and Eccentricity of bearing Shoe

Sample : Settlement of bearing shoe Sample : Eccentricity of bearing shoe

(5) Bearing Movement

Contact

Sample : Contact at Stopper of Sample : Contact at Pin

movement bearing

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 97

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY STRUCTURE TYPE

STRUCTURE TYPE 1 Expansion Joint

• Damage of Expansion Joint • Abnormality of laying gap of Expansion Joint
INSPECTION
• Water Leak • Noise
POINTS
• Faulting

(1) Damage of Expansion Joint (E.J)

• Damage prone location at Expansion Joint is at welded portion
of face plate and web. Sometimes, the face plate is lifted-up
causing damage to the fingers

• Rubber Expansion Joints sometimes fall-off under repeated

traffic loading due to damage on the rubber Expansion Joint
body and its attachment

Sample : Damage of face plate of Sample : Damage of Expansion Joint

Expansion Joint

(2) Difference of Level (Faulting)

• Faulting of Expansion Joint causes fracture and tilting of

face plates and rubber face
• Faulting causes abnormal noise on the Expansion Joint.

Sample : Difference of Level

(3) Abnormality of Laying Gap at Expansion Joint (4) Water Leak

• Water Leak occurs due to
• Stresses on main girders occur due to narrow laying
- Fracture of rubber joint type Expansion Joint.
gap on Expansion Joint. On the other hand, bigger
- Mud at drain pipe of steel type Expansion
impact force under large scale vehicles occur duet
Joint
to wide laying gap of Expansion Joint.
- Damage of seal material and backing
materials

Sample : Abnormality of Laying Gap Sample : Drain Pipe Filled with mud
at Expansion Joint

98 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY DAMAGE TYPE
DAMAGE TYPE 1 Steel Crack Due To Fatigue
INSPECTION
Close-up Visual Inspection, Inspection by Test Hammer
METHOD
• Crack occurs due to repeated and excessive stress at points of stress concentration. Inspection should
be conducted at stress concentration prone areas, points of change in cross-section, notch portion, hole
of bolt, collision portion, etc.

• Heavy crack can be recognized by visual inspection. Initial indicators of cracks are rust with fine line and
splitting of paint film. Initial cracks can be confirmed by penetrant test, etc.

CRACK PRONE LOCATION

Top Flange of Main Girder

Crack

Web of Main
Girder
Upper flange of
Cross Beam
Web of Cross Beam
Sample : Crack 1
Main Girder and Cross Beam Connection
Top Flange
Crack

Web of Main Girder

Vertical Stiffener

Main Girder and Sway Bracing Connection

Crack
Weld /
Cracking
Sample : Crack 2

Notch Portion

Crack

Lateral Bracing

Gusset Plate
Sample : Crack 3

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 99

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY DAMAGE TYPE
DAMAGE TYPE 1 Deformation
INSPECTION
Close-up Visual Inspection
METHOD
• Deformation of main girder, steel members, railings, fence, etc. occurs at the buckling of members due
to local stress concentration under vehicle collision and repeated stress.

DAMAGE PRONE LOCATION

Samples of deformation including deformation of railing, fence, bearing shoe and

and steel members are shown below.

Deformation of
Deformation of
concrete at bearing
shoe bed web at main girder

Sample : Damage of bearing shoe bed Sample : Deformation of lateral bracing

Sample : Deformation of railing Sample : Deformation of fence

100 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY DAMAGE TYPE

DAMAGE TYPE 1 Corrosion, Loosening and Missing Bolt

INSPECTION
Close-up Visual Inspection, Inspection by Test Hammer, Measurement by Torque Wrench.
METHOD

• Bolt and rivet damage includes corrosion, loosening, missing, etc. The location of damage, cause of damage,
influence of damage should be marked and indicated.
• Bolts at girder end and lower flange connection where water usually stays deteriorates and corrodes heavily.
Stress corrosion and cracks at bolt holes should be marked in these areas.
• Loosening of bolts by vibration is usually observed at secondary member due to lack of fastening force or void
space between member.
• Delayed fracture of high tension bolt that occurs suddenly for F11T or stronger bolt is called brittle failure. This is
due to stress concentration caused by damage on the bolt, fatigue crack, corrosion pit, etc. Therefore, we have
to confirm if the bolt is F11T or higher from the as-built drawings.

DAMAGE - PRONE LOCATION

The following damages are illustrated below:

• Corrosion due to rain water

• Loosening due to vibration
• Missing high strength bolts due to delayed fracture
• Loosening due to corrosion

Loosening due to
corrosion

Sample : Loosening of Bolt

Missing of bolt at sway

bracing

Sample : Missing of Bolt

Secondary member vibration

Corroded bolts

Missing bolt at connected

portion of main girder
Sample : Missing of Bolt

Delayed fracture of F11T bolt

Box Girder

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 101

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY DAMAGE TYPE

DAMAGE TYPE 1 Painting Deterioration

INSPECTION
METHOD Close-up Visual Inspection, Distance Visual Inspection.

• Steel bridge painting normally deteriorates gradually, thus losing its rust-protection ability. Under this condition,
the member is susceptible to progressive corrosion. However, painting deterioration does not progress uniformly
over the whole bridge. Part of the member paint will peel-off, chalking and cracking will then occur until rust
develop

• Discoloration of the painting top coat sometimes spoils the bridge aesthetics.

DAMAGE - PRONE LOCATION

Sample : Deterioration of painting 1 Sample : Deterioration of painting 2

BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY DAMAGE TYPE

DAMAGE TYPE 1 Corrosion

INSPECTION Close-up Visual Inspection, Distance Visual Inspection, Measurement by Caliper.

METHOD

• Corrosion reduces the cross-sectional area and the member strength which causes crack and member deformation
• Corrosion occurs when the member is exposed to dew, water leak, sea salt particle, sulfur dioxide, etc.
• Corrosion in industrial areas and those along seashore are relatively faster due to presence of sulfur dioxide and sea salt particle

DAMAGE - PRONE LOCATION

• Girder end with water leak, accumulation of mud, around bearing shoe, connection with poor ventilation,
dew-prone lower flange, sea salt particle attachment without rainfall, etc.

Sample : Corrosion 1 Sample : Corrosion 2

Corrosion of HT bolts/rivets should be checked.

102 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY DAMAGE TYPE

DAMAGE TYPE 1 Concrete Cracks Due to External Forces, Etc.

INSPECTION
Close-up Visual Inspection, Measurement by Crack Scale, Photograph, Video, etc.
METHOD

CAUSE AND PATTERN OF CRACK

(1) Dynamic load and short-term load

• The figure shown below shows crack

due to horizontal force of earthquake.

Sample : Crack due to rebar corrosion

(2) Lack of cross section and quantity of reinforcing bars.

• Crack shown below sometimes occur due to lack of distribution bar.

(3) Differential settlement of structures

• The figure shown below illustrates cracks occurring due to differential settlement for statically
indeterminate structures.

Settlement

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 103

DPWH
 (4) Continuous Load, Long Term Load, Dynamic Load and Short Term Load, Over Design Load

RC Girder: Crack due to external force

1 Crack by bending moment

2 Crack by shearing force

3 Oblique crack at bearing shoe bed of abutment

Sample : Crack 2 Sample : Crack 3

NOTE:

Cracks like 1 and 2

normally causes sag of
girder.

Sample : Crack 1

(5) Continuous Load, Long Term Load, Dynamic Load and Short Term Load, Over Design Load

PC Girder: Crack due to external force

1 Crack by bending moment

2 Crack by shearing force

3 Excessive partial stress at support

4 Lack of prestressing, influence of settlement at support

104 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY DAMAGE TYPE

DAMAGE TYPE 1 Concrete Crack due to Construction Method

INSPECTION
Close-up Visual Inspection, Measurement by Crack Scale, Photograph, Video, etc.
METHOD

CAUSE AND PATTERN OF CRACK

(1) Insufficient Compaction

Sample : Crack

(2) Inadequate Treatment of Construction Joint

• Cold joint occurs

Sample : Crack

(3) Swelling of Form - (Form deformation) (4) Settlement of Support During Concreting

PC GIRDER : Crack at construction stage due to drying shrinkage

1 Combined temperature change and drying shrinkage at box girder with big cross section

2 Just after prestressing

3 Crack along sheath

4 Crack by bearing stress at anchorage zone

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 105

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY DAMAGE TYPE

DAMAGE TYPE 1 Concrete Crack due to Environment, etc.

INSPECTION
Close-up Visual Inspection, Measurement by Crack Scale, Photograph, Video, etc.
METHOD

CAUSE AND PATTERN OF CRACK

(1) Chemical Action of Acid-Salinity

• Crack occurs at the location of reinforcing bars due to attack

on concrete surface causing partial splitting of concrete

• Rust of exposed reinforcing bar is a characteristic of this

occurrence.

Sample : Crack

(3) Rust of Reinforcing Bar Due to Neutralization and Chloride Intrusion

• Under this condition crack occurs along reinforcing bar, followed

by flowing-out of rust on the crack making the concrete surface
dirty

In case of remarkable corrosion of reinforcing bars, the concrete

partially splits.

Sample : Crack

106 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY DAMAGE TYPE
DAMAGE TYPE 1 Concrete Crack Due to Material Quality

INSPECTION
Close-up Visual Inspection, Measurement by Crack Scale, Photograph, Video, etc.
METHOD

CAUSE AND PATTERN OF CRACK

(1) Crack due to mud in aggregate

Irregular pattern crack occurs with concrete drying.

(2) Crack due to alkali-aggregate reaction

• Crack occurs parallel with member direction
at column, beam. Sample : Crack due to mud in aggregate
• Crack occurs in all direction
at wall and retaining wall.

(3) Crack due to settlement

• Crack occurs at top surface along reinforcing
bar 1~2 hours after concreting

Sample : Crack due to alkali - aggregate reaction

(4) Heat of hydration in cement

• Crack occurs at footing beam with massive cross-section

Reinforcing bar of more than 80 cm on one side and thick underground

wall.

(5) R.C. Girder : Crack due to drying

shrinkage

• Sample at cantilever of deck slab

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 107

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY DAMAGE TYPE

DAMAGE TYPE 2 Concrete Splitting, Exposed Reinforcing Bar

INSPECTION Close-up Visual Inspection, Distance Visual Inspection, Inspection by Test Hammer,
METHOD Photograph, Video, etc.

• Concrete splits and lifts when reinforcing bar and concrete separate

• Splitting and spalling occur with crack progressing on the member. The influence of cracks to bridge is
different depending on location which will become the basis of the index of crack rating.

• Modification of concrete work methodology during construction stage causes cracking .

• When inspecting spalling of concrete, there is possibility of concrete falling down.

SAMPLE OF DAMAGE : SPLITTING AND EXPOSED REINFORCING BAR

• Top and bottom deck slab,

railing and outside of curb
made of concrete

Bottom Surface of
Deck Slab

Drip Portion of deck Slab

Bottom Surface of Deck Slab Drip Portion of Deck Slab

Out Side of Curb Bottom Surface of Cantilever

108 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY DAMAGE TYPE
DAMAGE TYPE 2 Honey Comb, Cavity in Concrete
INSPECTION
Close-up Visual Inspection, Distance Visual Inspection, Photograph, Video, etc.
METHOD
• Mainly insufficient concrete work (hot weather concrete, compaction, etc.);
Inadequate composition

Sample : Bottom Surface of Concrete Girder Sample : Bottom of Railing

BRIDGE INSPECTION POINTS BY DAMAGE TYPE

DAMAGE TYPE 2 Efflorescence of Concrete
INSPECTION
Close-up Visual Inspection, Distance Visual Inspection, Photograph, Video, etc.
METHOD
• When construction is not properly done, including poor compaction and inferior joints, concrete cracks
causing water to penetrate and react with concrete cement producing efflorescence spot at the surface
of concrete.
• Efflorescence can indicate the index rating of crack occurring at different crack locations

DAMAGE - PRONE LOCATION

• It should be noted that efflorescence cannot occur without water and can be commonly observed on construction
joints and girder ends. It is thus important to recognize that the source of efflorescence could be by water leak,
ponding and crack.

Sample : Pier Sample : Bottom Surface of Deck Slab

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 109

DPWH
 INTENTIONALLY BLANK

110 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 MANUAL
FOR LOAD RATING
OF BRIDGES
3rd Edition

WLEOI GAD HT
L II M
L M II T
T
T
T
T

APPENDIX II
LOAD RATING EXAMPLES
111
 This Section presents the following examples of load rating calculations according to
the Computer-based Program on Load Rating:
Page
 Example 1: Reinforced Concrete Flat Slab Bridge ------------ 115
Example 1-1: Simple --------------------------------------------------------- 116
Computer based calculation ----------------------- 116
Manual calculation ------------------------------------- 127
Example 1-2: Continuous -------------------------------------------------- 134
Computer based calculation ----------------------- 134
Manual calculation ------------------------------------- 145
 Example 2: Reinforced Concrete Deck Girder Bridge ------- 155
Example 2-1: Simple --------------------------------------------------------- 156
Computer based calculation ----------------------- 156
Manual calculation ------------------------------------- 167
Example 2-2: Continuous -------------------------------------------------- 176
Computer based calculation ----------------------- 176
Manual calculation ------------------------------------- 187
 Example 3: Pre-stressed Concrete Deck Girder Bridge ------ 199
Example 3-1: Simple --------------------------------------------------------- 200
Computer based calculation ----------------------- 200
Manual calculation ------------------------------------- 212
Example 3-2: Continuous -------------------------------------------------- 222
Computer based calculation ----------------------- 222
Manual calculation ------------------------------------- 234
 Example 4: Steel I - Girder Bridge ------------------------------------ 249
Example 4-1: Simple --------------------------------------------------------- 250
Computer based calculation ----------------------- 250
Manual calculation ------------------------------------- 257
Example 4-2: Continuous -------------------------------------------------- 264
Computer based calculation ----------------------- 264
Manual calculation ------------------------------------- 271
 Example 5: Reinforced Concrete Deck Slab -------------------- 279
Computer based calculation ----------------------- 280
Manual calculation ------------------------------------- 286

112 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 Load Factor Method (LFM) and Allowable Stress Method (ASM) to be used on above
examples of load rating and load posting calculations are the followings.

Load Rating Load Posting

Examples
LFM ASM LFM ASM

Reinforced Concrete Simple ○ ○ ○ ○

Flat Slab Bridge (RCFS) Continuous ○ ○ ○ ○
Reinforced Concrete Simple ○ ○ ○ ○
Deck Girder Bridge
(RCDG) Continuous ○ ○ ○ ○
Pre-stressed Concrete Simple ○ ○ ○ ○
Deck Girder Bridge
(PCDG) Continuous ○ ○ ○ ○

Steel I - Girder Bridge Simple --- ○ --- ○

(SIG） Continuous --- ○ --- ○
Reinforced Concrete
--- ○ --- --- ○
Deck Slab (RCDECK)
Note: For Pre-stressed Concrete Deck Girder Bridge, LFM is used only under Strength
Limit State, on the other hand, ASM is used only under Serviceability Limit State.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 113

DPWH
 INTENTIONALLY BLANK

114 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 EXAMPLE 1
REINFORCED CONCRETE FLAT
SLAB BRIDGE

Example 1-1: Simple

Example 1-2: Continuous

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 115

DPWH
RCFS SIMPLE Computer Based Calculation

RCFS SIMPLE

A. GENERAL BACK TO MENU

A1. BRIDGE DESCRIPTION

Bridge Location REGION VII
Bridge Name
Bridge Simple or Continuous Simple
Type Number of Span 1
Bridge of Width (curb to curb) (m) 7.32
Number of Lanes 2
Bridge Length (m) 8.000 =8.000m
Year Built 1958
Superstructure Reinforced Concrete Slab
Structure
Substructure Wall Type RC Piers and RC Cantilever Abutments
Wearing thickness (mm) 50
Course material Asphalt
fc= 6.9 Mpa fs= 137.9 Mpa
Material Properties
f'c= 17.2 Mpa fy= 275.8 Mpa
Weight of barrier rail Wbr = 18.5 KN/m
Assumption Concrete Unit Weight Wu = 24.0 KN/m3
Asphalt Unit Weight Wa = 22.0 KN/m3
Others Rating Live Load is AASHTO MS18 (HS20-44)

NEXT

Year of fc or fs
Material f'c or fy
Construction Inventory Operating Posting
Prior to 1959 17.2 6.9 10.3 6.9
after 1959 20.7 8.3 13.1 8.3
Concrete
1977 to 1981 27.6 11.0 16.5 11.0 *pc
after 1981 31.0 12.4 18.6 12.4 *pc
Prior to 1954 227.5 124.1 172.4 124.1
after 1954 275.8 137.9 193.1 137.9
Rebar
Grade 50 344.7 137.9 224.1 137.9 *pc
Grade 60 413.7 165.5 248.2 165.5 *pc

RCFS SIMPLE
Sheet 1: GENERAL
116
 A2. BRIDGE LAYOUT AND DIMENSION

A1 A2
8.00 m

BRIDGE ELEVATION

9.54m
1.11m 7.32m 1.11m

0.45

0.50 8.54m 0.50

DECK SECTION

BRIDGE LAYOUT AND DIMENSION

Overall width (m) 9.540
Carriageway Width (m) 7.320
Slab width bw(m) 8.540
Slab thickness h (m) 0.450
Span Length L(m) 8.000

NEXT

RCFS SIMPLE
117 Sheet 2: LAYOUT
B. DEMAND FORCES

B0. INPUT
FOR Slab width bw(m) 8.540
DEAD Slab thickness h (m) 0.450
LOAD Span Length L(m) 8.000

B1. DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

Self-weight of Slab 10.800
Barrier Rail 2.708
Uniform Load per meter of Girder (KN/m)
Asphalt Overlay 0.943
Total 14.450
Moment (KN-m/m) MDL 115.60
Dead Load
Shear (KN) VDL 57.80

B2. LIVE-LOAD CALCULATIONS

LIVE-LOAD Type MS18(HS20)
Number of live load wheel line 0.589
INPUT FOR LIVE LOAD
Impact factor 0.300
span 8.000
without Impact ML 154.84
Max.MS18 moment for 8.00m span /wheel line
with Impact MLL 118.46
Max.MS18 shear at a distance "d" without Impact VL 105.59
from the support/wheel line with Impact VLL 80.78

NEXT

RCFS SIMPLE
118 Sheet 3: DFDLLL
C. LOAD RATING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)
1.00 m Segment

Total area of Rebar

Nos of Rebar 10
0.45 3-28 mm Ø
Dia. (mm) 28
yb As(mm2) 6158
3-28 mm Ø yb (mm) 61
4-28 mm Ø
TYPICAL SLAB
REINFORCEMENT
C1. CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

C1. INPUT
(1) Common Input Data
Allowable Stress fc 6.9
Concrete
Material Properties Strength f'c 17.2
( Mpa ) Allowable Stress fs 137.9
Rebar
Strength fy 275.8
(2) Input Data for Moment Capacity
Total Area of Steel As(mm2) 10 x ( 28mm rebar ) 6158
Section Loss (%) 10
Total Assumed Area of Steel As(mm2) 5542
Centroid of rebars from bottom of deck , d (mm) 61
Centroid of rebars from top of deck , d (mm) 389
Effective width of deck , beff (mm) 1000
Ultimate capacity factor (Uf) 0.90

C1. MOMENT CAPACITY AT MIDSPAN

Rectangular stress block depth a (mm) 105.0
The Moment Capacity Mu (kN-m) 462.9

NEXT

RCFS SIMPLE
119 Sheet 4: CCLFM
C2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

C2.1 INPUT
Load factor for dead load 1.3
Inventory 2.17
Load factor for live load
Operating 1.3
Moment Ultimate Capacity at Midspan (kN-m) 462.92
Dead Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) 115.60
Live Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) 118.46
Rating Live Load (Tons) 33.0

Rating Load
C2.2 CALCULATIONS OF RATING FACTOR AND LOAD RATING Factor Rating
Inventory Rating 1.22 40.26
Rating Factor and Load Rating Moment ( Midspan )
Operating Rating 2.03 66.99

Depend on the minimum value of Rating Factor > 1 or <1 ,

instruction is automatically shown below
Return to GENERAL

Click following the above instruction

Return to GENERAL

LOAD POSTING

RCFS SIMPLE
120 Sheet 5: LRLFM
D. LOAD POSTING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)

D1. DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

D1.1 DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

(1) POSTING VEHICLE Type 1-1
LIVE-LOAD Type Type1-1
Number of live load wheel line 0.589
Impact factor 0.300
span 8.00
without Impact ML 133.60
Type 1-1 moment for 8.00m span /wheel line
with Impact MLL 102.21
Type 1-1 shear at a distance "d" without Impact VL 74.60
from the support/wheel line with Impact VLL 57.07
(2) POSTING VEHICLE Type 1-2
LIVE-LOAD Type Type1-2
without Impact ML 153.79
Type 1-2 moment for 8.00m span /wheel line
with Impact MLL 117.66
Type 1-2 shear at a distance "d" without Impact VL 94.94
from the support/wheel line with Impact VLL 72.64
(3) POSTING VEHICLE Type 12-2
LIVE-LOAD Type Type12-2
without Impact ML 144.93
Type 12-2 moment for 8.00m span /wheel line
with Impact MLL 110.88
Type 12-2 shear at a distance "d" without Impact VL 85.28
from the support/wheel line with Impact VLL 65.24

NEXT

RCFS SIMPLE
121 Sheet 6: POSTLL
D2. POSTING RATING CALCULATIONS

D2.1 INPUT
Load factor for dead load 1.3
Inventory 2.17
Load factor for live load
Operating 1.3
Moment
Moment Ultimate Capacity 462.92
Dead Load 115.60
Vehicle
Moment
Weight
MS18 118.46 33.0
Live Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) Type 1-1 102.21 17.0
Live Load Shear at Support (KN) Type 1-2 117.66 27.0
Type 12-2 110.88 38.0

D2.2 LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS BY LFM

Vehicle Inventory Rating Operating Rating
Posting
Vehicle Weight
Moment Moment (Metric
Type (Metric
Tons)
Tons) RF LR RF LR
MS18 33.0 1.22 40.1 2.03 67.0 33
Type 1-1 17.0 1.41 24.0 2.35 40.0 17
Type 1-2 27.0 1.22 33.1 2.04 55.2 27
Type 12-2 38.0 1.30 49.4 2.17 82.4 38

NEXT

RCFS SIMPLE
122 Sheet 7: POSTLFM
E. Load Rating by Allowable Stress Method
E1. MOMENT AND SHEAR CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

E1.1 Input
Year Built 1958
Inventory 6.9
fc
Concrete Operating 10.3
Material Properties f'c 17.2
Inventory 137.9
Rebar fs
Operating 193.1
Total Assumed Area of Steel As(mm2) 5542
Centroid of rebars from top of deck , d (mm) 389
Effective width of deck , beff (mm) 1000
Rebar Ratio ρ = As / ( beff x d ) 0.01425
Modular Ratio of Elasticity n = Es / Ec 12
2
k = √ [ 2ρn + ( ρn ) ] - ρn 0.4383
kd 170.5
j 0.8539
jd 332.2

E1.2 MOMENT CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

Capacity by concrete Inventory 195.37
allowable stress Operating 291.65
Moment (kN-m)
Inventory 253.87
Capacity by rebar allowable stress
Operating 355.49

NEXT

RCFS SIMPLE
123 Sheet 8: CCASM
E2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

E2.1 INPUT
Load factor for dead load 1.0
Load factor for live load 1.0
Inventory 195.37
Moment Capacity at Midspan (kN-m)
Operating 291.65
Dead Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) 115.60
Live Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) 118.46
Rating Live Load (Tons) 33.0

Rating Load
E2.2. RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (ASM) Factor Rating
Inventory Rating 0.67 22.11
Rating Factor and Load Rating Moment ( Midspan )
Operating Rating 1.49 49.17

NEXT

RCFS SIMPLE
124 Sheet 9: LRASM
F. LOAD POSTING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD

F1. INPUT
Load factor for dead load 1.0
Load factor for live load 1.0
Moment
Inventory 195.37
Moment Capacity
Operating 291.65
Dead Load 115.60
Vehicle
Moment
Weight
MS18 118.46 33.0
Live Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) Type 1-1 102.21 17.0
Live Load Shear at Support (KN) Type 1-2 117.66 27.0
Type 12-2 110.88 38.0

F2. LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (ASM)

Vehicle Moment
Posting
Vehicle Weight
Inventory Rating Operating Rating (Metric
Type (Metric
Tons)
Tons) RF LR RF LR
MS18 33.0 0.67 22.2 1.49 49.0 22
Type 1-1 17.0 0.78 13.3 1.72 29.3 13
Type 1-2 27.0 0.68 18.3 1.50 40.4 18
Type 12-2 38.0 0.72 27.3 1.59 60.3 27

NEXT

RCFS SIMPLE
125 Sheet 10: POSTASM
G. SUMMARY OF LOAD POSTING

SUMMARY OF RESULTS FOR LOAD POSTING

Vehicle Allowable Stress (ASM) Load Factor (LFM)
Load
Vehicle Weight
Rating Load Rating Load Posting
Type (Metric
Factor Rating Factor Rating (Tons)
Tons)
MS18 33.0 0.67 22.2 1.22 40.1 22T
Type 1-1 17.0 0.78 13.3 1.41 24.0 13T
Type 1-2 27.0 0.68 18.3 1.22 33.1 18T
Type 12-2 38.0 0.72 27.3 1.30 49.4 27T

LOAD

13T
18T
27T

BACK TO GENERAL

RCFS SIMPLE
126 Sheet 11: POSTSUM
 1 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCFS SIMPLE

A. GENERAL
A.1 BRIDGE DESCRIPTION

Bridge Location : Region VII

Bridge Type : Simple-span Reinforced Concrete Flat Slab
Br. Width / No. of Lanes : 7.32m curb to curb / Two-lanes
Bridge Length : 8.0m
Year Built : 1958
Structure
Girders : Reinforced Concrete Flat Slab
Substructure : RC Cantilever Abutments
Wearing Course : 50mm thick Asphalt Overlay
Material Properties : fc = 6.9 Mpa , fs = 137.9 Mpa
: fc = 17.2 Mpa , fs = 275.8 Mpa
Assumption : Weight of barrier rail = 18.5 KN/m
3
: Concrete unit weight = 24.0 KN/m
3
: Asphalt unit weight = 22.0 KN/m
Others : Rating Live Load is AASHTO MS18 (HS20-44)
Reqirement :
Determine the load rating of the interior girder of the span (8.0m) for MS18 (HS20)
vehicles considering damages on members ( Rebar section losses 10% )

A.2 BRIDGE LAYOUT

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

127
 2 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCFS SIMPLE

NOTES

B. DEMAND FORCES
B.1 DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

The dead loads considered in the calculations include (1) Flat Slab self-weight,
(2) Barrier rails (Assumed to be equally distributed among girders) and (3) Wearing course..

Self-weight of girder = (8.540m) (0.450m) (24 KN/m3) / (8.540m) = 10.800 KN/m

Barrier rail = (18.5m/8.540m)(1.250) = 2.708 KN/m
3
Wearing course = (0.05m) (7.320m) (22 KN/m ) = 0.943 KN/m
Total Uniform Load of Interior Girder, w = 14.450 KN/m

2
Dead Load Moment at Midspan, MDL = 14.45 x 8.00 /8 = 115.60 KN-m Md = wL2/8

Dead Load Shear at "d" from, VDL = 8.00 x 14.45 /2 = 57.80 KN Vd = wL/2
support
WDL = 14.45

8.00 m

B.2 LIVE LOAD CALCULATIONS

The carriageway width is 7.32m curb to curb. AASHTO specifies a clear lane width of 5.4m, thus Manual 1st Ed.
the deck shall carry two-lanes. Sect 3.4.2

The distribution of wheel loads for two traffic lanes for Slab shall be taken as follows AASHTO
Table 3.24.3.2
Number of live load wheel line = (1.0/0.3048)/(4+0.06*8.0/0.3048) = 0.589 ((4+0.06S) in ft.)
(4+0.06S)<7 ==> S<50 in ft. (S<50*0.3048=15.24m) 1ft.=0.3048m
S>15.24m ==> (4+0.06S) should be applied 7 in ft.

Impact factor, I = 15.24 / (8.00 + 38.00) = 0.331 DPWH

==> Use Impact = 0.300 Sect. 3.2.5.1

The live load moments and shear values are taken from the tables in Appendix III on this manual
and are used to determine the live load demand. Interpolation may be used if values are not exact

Max. MS18 moment for 8.00 m = 154.84 KN-m

span without impact/whel line

Thus, MS18 moment with MLL = (0.589) (1.300) (154.84) = 118.56 KN-m
Impact at midspan

Max. MS18 shear at support/wheel line = 105.59 KN

Thus, MS18 shear VLL = (0.589) (1.300) (105.59) = 80.85 KN

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

128
 3 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCFS SIMPLE

NOTES

C. LOAD RATING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD

C.1 CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

The strengths of concrete and rebars are determined based on the year of construction and the
allowable stresses noted in the plans. Since construction was done in 1958, the corresponding
material strengths were as follows (Sect. 3.5).

ALLOWABLE STRESSES STRENGTH This Manual

Concrete fc = 6.9 Mpa f'c = 17.2 Mpa Table 3.5-1
Rebar fs = 137.9 Mpa fy = 275.8 Mpa

C.1.1 MOMENT CAPACITY AT MIDSPAN

Total area of steel ( 28 mm rebar)

2 2
As = 10 x ( π /4 x 28 ) = 6,158 mm

Section Loss = 10 %

2
Total assumed area of Steel = 6,158 x 0.9 = 5,542 mm

Centroid of rebar from top of deck = 450 - 61 = 389 mm

Total Girder Depth = 450 mm

Cover of Rebar = 61 mm

Effective width of deck, b eff = 1 m segment Flat Slab = 1,000 mm

Ultimate capacity factor (Uf) = 0.90

The rectangular stress block is calculated as,

As fy (5542) (275.80)
a = = = 105 mm
0.85 f'c beff 0.85 (17.2) (1000)

Moment Capacity

0.9 (5542) (275.80) (389 - 105 / 2

Mu = As fy (d - a/2) = 6
10

= 462.9 KN-m

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

129
 4 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCFS SIMPLE

NOTES
C.2 LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

The manual provides the rating factor to be calculated using the Load Factor Method (LFM)
by the formula:

Rn - DD where: => L = 2.17 (Inventory) This Manual

RF =
LL (1 + I) => L = 1.30 (Operating) Eq. 3.2-4
=> L = 2.17 (Posting)

By substituting the factors and the load effects to the equation, the moment and shear rating
of the interior girder can be estimated as presented below.

RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (LFM)

LOCATION DESCRIPTION INVENTORY RATING
462.92 - 1.30 (115.6)
= 1.22
2.17 (118.46)
Midspan Moment OPERATING RATING
462.92 - 1.30 (115.6)
= 2.03
1.3 (118.46)

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS (LFM)

(Rating Live Load = MS18, W = 33 Metric Tons)
Location Description Inventory Rating (Tons) Operating Rating (Tons) This Manual

Midspan Moment 1.22 x 33 = 40.26 2.03 x 33 = 66.99 This Manual

Eq. 3.1-5

Since the Inventory Rating MLR = 40.26 metric tons are over
than the total weight of MS18 truck = 33 metric tons, load posting the bridge is not necessary

However, as a reference, Load Posting Calculation is shown in following pages.

D. LOAD POSTING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)

The procedure for load posting is similar to the above using load posting vehicles for live load.

D.1 DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

The live load moments and shears can be taken from Appendix III of the Manual corresponding This manual
to Types 1-1, 1-2 and 12-2 Posting Vehicles. Fig. 3.4-2

For a 8.00 m span bridge, the Posting Live Load demands are:

Vehicle LL Effects/Wheel Line LL Dist LL Demand

Impact
Type Moment Shear Factor Moment (KN-m) Shear (KN)

Type 1-1 133.60 74.60 0.589 1.300 102.30 57.12

Type 1-2 153.79 94.94 0.589 1.300 117.76 72.70

Type 12-2 144.93 85.28 0.589 1.300 110.97 65.30

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

130
 5 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCFS SIMPLE

NOTES

Similar calculations are done using Eqs. 3.2-4 and 3.1-5 for rating factor and load rating

LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS BY LFM

Vehicle
INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING POSTING
Vehicle Type Weight Moment Moment (Metric
(Metric Tons)
RF LR RF LR Tons)

MS18 33.0 1.22 40.1 2.03 67.0 33

Type 1-1 17.0 1.41 24.0 2.35 40.0 17

Type 1-2 27.0 1.22 33.1 2.04 55.2 27

Type 12-2 38.0 1.30 49.4 2.17 82.4 38

E. LOAD RATING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD

E1. MOMENT CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

The concrete and rebar allowable stresses are as noted in the plans as follows:

Concrete : fc = 6.9 Mpa

Rebar : fs = 137.9 Mpa <== Inventory
fs = 193.1 Mpa <== Operating

When the neutral axis is within the slab, the rectangular beam formulation can be used

2
As = 5,542 mm

d = 389 mm

bef = 1,000 mm

ρ = As / bd = 0.01425

n = Es / Ec = 12 MCEB
Sect. 6.6.2.4

Assume neutral axis (N.A.) is within slab and solving for the neutral axis position

2
k = 2ρ n+(ρ n) - ρ n

2
= 2 (0.01425)(12) + [0.01425((12)] - (0.01425)(12)

k = 0.4383

kd = (0.4383)(389) = 170.5 mm

j = 1 - k/3 = 0.8539

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

131
 6 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCFS SIMPLE

NOTES

Using k = 0.4383, kd = 170.5mm > ts = 450mm,

Therefore, the capacity will be calculated based on the N.A. .
The neutral axis depth, kd is calculated by summing moments at the top of the slab:

The compression zone resultant force (C) & location (z) is calculated as

C Z
170.5
Z = 170.5 / 3 = 56.83 mm

Slab C = 1/2 (170.5) = 85.25

ts = 450
279.5

Therefore, jd = d - Z
= 389 - 56.83 = 332.2 mm

If concrete allowable stress controls, the capacity becomes:

At Inventory Level At Operating Level

Mc = be x C x fc x jd Mc = be x C x fc x jd
= (1000)(85.25)(6.9)(332.2)(10-6) = (1000)(85.25)(10.3)(332.2)(10-6)
= 195.37 kN-m = 291.65 kN-m
<<== Governing since Mc < Ms
If rebar allowable stress controls, the capacity becomes,

At Inventory Level At Operating Level

Ms = As fs jd Ms = As fs jd
= (5542)(137.9)(332.2) = (5542)(193.1)(332.2)
= 253.87 kN-m = 355.49 kN-m

E2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

The Manual provides the rating factor to be calculated using the

Allowable Stress Method (ASM) by the formula:

R - A1 D where A1 = 1.0
RF =
A2 L ( 1 + I ) A2 = 1.0

RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (ASM)

LOCATION DESCRIPTION INVENTORY RATING
195.37 - (115.60)
= 0.67
(118.46)
Midspan Moment OPERATING RATING
291.65 - (115.60)
= 1.49
(118.46)

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

132
 7 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCFS SIMPLE

NOTES

F. LOAD POSTING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD

The procedure for load posting is similar to the above using load posting vehicles for live load
and the demand moments and shears as calculated in the previous Section D, as follows:

Vehicle LL Demand
Type Moment (KN-m)

Type 1-1 102.21

Type 1-2 117.66

Type 12-2 110.88

Similarly, using Eq. 3.2-1 and Eq. 3.1-5, load posting calculations are presented below

LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS BY ASM

Vehicle
INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING POSTING
Vehicle Type Weight Rating Load Rating Load (Metric
(Metric Tons)
Factor Rating Factor Rating Tons)

MS18 33.0 0.67 22.2 1.49 49.0 22

Type 1-1 17.0 0.78 13.3 1.72 29.3 13

Type 1-2 27.0 0.68 18.3 1.50 40.4 18

Type 12-2 38.0 0.72 27.3 1.59 60.3 27

The summary of calculation results for both the load factor and the allowable stress methods
are presented below.

SUMMARY OF RESULTS FOR LOAD POSTING

Vehicle
Allowable Stress (ASM) Load Factor (LFM) POSTING
Vehicle Type Weight Rating Load Rating Load (Metric
(Metric Tons)
Factor Rating Factor Rating Tons)

MS18 33.0 0.67 22.2 1.22 40.1 22

Type 1-1 17.0 0.78 13.3 1.41 24.0 13

Type 1-2 27.0 0.68 18.3 1.22 33.1 18

Type 12-2 38.0 0.72 27.3 1.30 49.4 27

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

133
 RCFS CONTINUOUS

A. GENERAL BACK TO MENU

A1. BRIDGE DESCRIPTION

Bridge Location REGION VII
Bridge Name
Bridge Simple or Continuous C
Type Number of Span 3
Bridge of Width (curb to curb) (m) 7.32
Number of Lanes 2
Bridge Length (m) 8.000 8.000 8.000 =24.000m
Year Built 1982
Superstructure Reinforced Concrete Slab
Structure
Substructure Wall Type RC Piers and RC Cantilever Abutments
Wearing thickness (mm) 50
Course material Asphalt
fc= 8.3 Mpa fs= 137.9 Mpa
Material Properties
f'c= 20.7 Mpa fy= 275.8 Mpa
Weight of barrier rail Wbr = 18.5 KN/m
Assumption Concrete Unit Weight Wu = 24.0 KN/m3
Asphalt Unit Weight Wa = 22.0 KN/m3
Others Rating Live Load is AASHTO MS18 (HS20-44)

NEXT

Year of fc or fs
Material f'c or fy
Construction Inventory Operating Posting
Prior to 1959 17.2 6.9 10.3 6.9
after 1959 20.7 8.3 13.1 8.3
Concrete
1977 to 1981 27.6 11.0 16.5 11.0 *pc
after 1981 31.0 12.4 18.6 12.4 *pc
Prior to 1954 227.5 124.1 172.4 124.1
after 1954 275.8 137.9 193.1 137.9
Rebar
Grade 50 344.7 137.9 224.1 137.9 *pc
Grade 60 413.7 165.5 248.2 165.5 *pc

RCFS CONTINUOUS
134 Sheet 1: GENERAL
 A2. BRIDGE LAYOUT AND DIMENSION

A1 P1 P2 A2
8.00 m 8.00 m 8.00 m

BRIDGE ELEVATION

9.54m
1.11m 7.32m 1.11m

0.45

0.50 8.54m 0.50

DECK SECTION

BRIDGE LAYOUT AND DIMENSION

Overall width (m) 9.540
Carriageway Width (m) 7.320
Slab width bw(m) 8.540
Slab thickness h (m) 0.450
Span Length L(m) 8.000

NEXT

RCFS CONTINUOUS
135 Sheet 2: LAYOUT
B. DEMAND FORCES

B0. INPUT
FOR Slab width bw(m) 8.540
DEAD Slab thickness h (m) 0.450
LOAD Span Length L(m) 8.000

B1. DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

Self-weight of Slab 10.800
Barrier Rail 2.708
Uniform Load per meter of Girder (KN/m)
Asphalt Overlay 0.943
Total 14.450
Moment (KN-m/m) MDL 115.60
Dead Load
Shear (KN) VDL 57.80

B2. LOAD DEMAND MIDSPAN AND SUPPORT OF RCS

Conducting a Structural Analysis, the load demands for the RCS should be
obtained separately and input the necessary load demands in the Table below.
LIVE-LOAD Type MS18(HS20)
Number of live load wheel line 0.589
INPUT FOR LIVE LOAD
Impact factor 0.300
span 8.000
Description At Midspan At Pier Support
Dead load moments, KN-m 115.60 -66.30
Additional Dead load moments, KN-m 7.65 -7.45
MS18 max. positive moment, KN-m 152.50 -
MS18 max. negative moment, KN-m - -109.10

NEXT

RCFS CONTINUOUS
136 Sheet 3: DFDLLL
C. LOAD RATING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)
1.00m Segment 6.7 nos-28mmØ

Total area of Rebar

yb Midspan At Pier
for Pier Nos of Rebar 10 6.7
0.45 Dia. (mm) 28 28
yb As(mm2) 6158 4126
yb (mm) 61 64
10nos.-28 mm Ø

TYPICAL SLAB for Midspan

REINFORCEMENT
C1. CAPACITY CALCULATIONS
C1. INPUT
(1) Common Input Data At Midspan At Pier
Allowable Stress fc 8.3
Concrete
Material Properties Strength f'c 20.7
( Mpa ) Allowable Stress fs 137.9
Rebar
Strength fy 275.8
(2) Input Data for Moment Capacity At Midspan At Pier
Total Area of Steel As(mm2) 10 x ( 28mm rebar ) 6158 4126
Section Loss (%) 0 0
Total Assumed Area of Steel As(mm2) 6158 4126
Centroid of rebars from bottom of deck , d (mm) 61 64
Centroid of rebars from top of deck , d (mm) 389 386
Effective width of deck , beff (mm) 1000 1000
Ultimate capacity factor (Uf) 0.90 0.90

C1. MOMENT CAPACITY AT MIDSPAN At Midspan At Pier

Rectangular stress block depth a (mm) 97.0 65.0
The Moment Capacity Mu (kN-m) 520.4 362.0

NEXT

RCFS CONTINUOUS
137 Sheet 4: CCLFM
C2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

C2.1 INPUT At Midspan At Pier

Load factor for dead load 1.3
Inventory 2.17
Load factor for live load
Operating 1.3
Moment Ultimate Capacity at Midspan (kN-m) 520.43 -362.00
Dead Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) 123.25 -73.75
Live Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) 152.50 -109.10
Rating Live Load (Tons) 33.0 33.0

Rating Load
C2.2 CALCULATIONS OF RATING FACTOR AND LOAD RATING Factor Rating
Inventory Rating 1.09 35.97
Midspan
Operating Rating 1.82 60.06
Rating Factor and Load Rating Moment
Inventory Rating 1.12 36.96
At Pier
Operating Rating 1.88 62.04

Depend on the minimum value of Rating Factor > 1 or <1 ,

instruction is automatically shown below
Return to GENERAL

Click following the above instruction

Return to GENERAL

Load Posting

RCFS CONTINUOUS
138 Sheet 5: LRLFM
D. LOAD POSTING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)

D1. DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

D1.2 POSTING VEHICLE DEMAND FORCES

Conducting a Structural Analysis, the load demands for the RCS should be
obtained separately and input the necessary load demands in the Table below.
Posting Vehicle Demand Forces At Midspan At Pier Support
Moment 105.2 -83.9
Type 1-1
Shear - -23.1
Moment 137.7 -109.2
Type 1-2
Shear - -31.2
Moment 142.8 -115.9
Type 12-2
Shear - -30.4

NEXT

RCFS CONTINUOUS

139 Sheet 6: POSTLL

D2. POSTING RATING CALCULATIONS

D2.1 INPUT
Load factor for dead load 1.3
Inventory 2.17
Load factor for live load
Operating 1.3
Midspan At Pier
Moment Ultimate Capacity 520.43 362.00
Dead Load 123.25 -73.75
Vehicle
Midspan At Pier
Weight
MS18 152.50 -109.10 33.0
Live Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) Type 1-1 105.20 -83.90 17.0
Live Load Shear at Support (KN) Type 1-2 137.70 -109.20 27.0
Type 12-2 142.80 -115.90 38.0

D2.2 LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS BY LFM

Vehicle Inventory Rating Operating Rating
Posting
Vehicle Weight
Moment Moment (Metric
Type (Metric
Tons)
Tons) RF LR RF LR
(1) AT MIDSPAN
MS18 33.0 1.09 35.9 1.82 60.0 33
Type 1-1 17.0 1.58 26.8 2.63 44.8 17
Type 1-2 27.0 1.21 32.5 2.01 54.3 27
Type 12-2 38.0 1.16 44.2 1.94 73.7 38
(2) AT PIER
MS18 33.0 1.12 37.1 1.88 61.9 33
Type 1-1 17.0 1.46 24.8 2.44 41.5 17
Type 1-2 27.0 1.12 30.3 1.87 50.6 27
Type 12-2 38.0 1.06 40.2 1.77 67.1 38

NEXT

RCFS CONTINUOUS
140 Sheet 7: POSTLFM
E. Load Rating by Allowable Stress Method
E1. MOMENT AND SHEAR CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

E1.1 Input At Midspan At Pier

Year Built 1982
Inventory 8.3
fc
Concrete Operating 13.1
Material Properties f'c 20.7
Inventory 137.9
Rebar fs
Operating 193.1
Total Assumed Area of Steel As(mm 8 x ( 28mm rebar ) 6158 4126
Centroid of rebars from top of deck , d (mm) 389 386
Effective width of deck , beff (mm) 1000 1000
Rebar Ratio ρ = As / ( beff x d ) 0.01583 0.01069
Modular Ratio of Elasticity n = Es / Ec 12 12
2
k = √ [ 2ρn + ( ρn ) ] - ρn 0.4550 0.3942
kd 177.0 152.2
j 0.8483 0.8686
jd 330.0 335.3

E1.2 MOMENT CAPACITY CALCULATIONS At Midspan At Pier

Capacity by concrete Inventory 242.40 211.72
allowable stress Operating 382.59 334.16
Moment (kN-m)
Inventory 280.21 190.74
Capacity by rebar allowable stress
Operating 392.38 267.10

NEXT

RCFS CONTINUOUS
141 Sheet 8: CCASM
E2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

E2.1 INPUT At Midspan At Pier

Load factor for dead load 1.0
Load factor for live load 1.0
Inventory 242.40 190.74
Moment Capacity at Midspan (kN-m)
Operating 382.59 267.10
Dead Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) 123.25 -73.75
Live Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) 152.50 -109.10
Rating Live Load (Tons) 33.0

Rating Load
E2.2. RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (ASM) Factor Rating
Inventory Rating 0.78 25.74
Midspan
Operating Rating 1.70 56.10
Rating Factor and Load Rating Moment ( )
Inventory Rating 1.07 35.31
At Pier
Operating Rating 1.77 58.41

NEXT

RCFS CONTINUOUS
142 Sheet 9: LRASM
F. LOAD POSTING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD

F1. INPUT
Load factor for dead load 1.0
Load factor for live load 1.0
Moment
Midspan At Pier
Inventory 242.40 -190.74
Moment Capacity
Operating 382.59 -267.10
Dead Load 123.25 -73.75
Moment Vehicle
Midspan At Pier Weight
MS18 152.50 -109.10 33.0
Live Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) Type 1-1 105.20 -83.90 17.0
Live Load Shear at Support (KN) Type 1-2 137.70 -109.20 27.0
Type 12-2 142.80 -115.90 38.0

F2. LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (ASM)

Vehicle Moment
Posting
Vehicle Weight
Inventory Rating Operating Rating (Metric
Type (Metric
Tons)
Tons) RF LR RF LR
(1) AT MIDSPAN
MS18 33.0 0.78 25.8 1.70 56.1 26
Type 1-1 17.0 1.13 19.3 2.47 41.9 17
Type 1-2 27.0 0.87 23.4 1.88 50.9 23
Type 12-2 38.0 0.83 31.7 1.82 69.0 32
(2) AT PIER
MS18 33.0 1.07 35.4 1.77 58.5 33
Type 1-1 17.0 1.39 23.7 2.30 39.2 17
Type 1-2 27.0 1.07 28.9 1.77 47.8 27
Type 12-2 38.0 1.01 38.4 1.67 63.4 38

NEXT

RCFS CONTINUOUS
143 Sheet 10: POSTASM
G. SUMMARY OF RESULTS FOR LOAD POSTING

SUMMARY OF RESULTS FOR LOAD POSTING

Vehicle Allowable Stress (ASM) Load Factor (LFM)
Load
Vehicle Weight
Rating Load Rating Load Posting
Type (Metric
Factor Rating Factor Rating (Tons)
Tons)
MS18 33.0 0.78 25.8 1.09 35.9 26T
Type 1-1 17.0 1.13 19.3 1.46 24.8 17T
Type 1-2 27.0 0.87 23.4 1.12 30.3 23T
Type 12-2 38.0 0.83 31.7 1.06 40.2 32T

LOAD

17T
23T
32T

BACK TO GENERAL

RCFS CONTINUOUS
144 Sheet 11: POSTSUM
RCFS CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 1 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCFS CONTINUOUS

A. GENERAL
A.1 BRIDGE DESCRIPTION

Bridge Location : Region VII

Bridge Type : 3-span Continuous Reinforced Concrete Flat Slab
Br. Width / No. of Lanes : 7.32m curb to curb / Two-lanes
Bridge Length : 8.0m + 8.0m + 8.0m = 24.0m
Year Built : 1982
Structure
Girders : Reinforced Concrete Flat Slab
Substructure : Wall Type RC Pier and RC Cantilever Abutments
Wearing Course : 50mm thick Asphalt Overlay
Material Properties : fc = 8.3 Mpa , fs = 137.9 Mpa
: fc = 20.7 Mpa , fs = 275.8 Mpa
Assumption : Weight of barrier rail = 18.5 KN/m
3
: Concrete unit weight = 24.0 KN/m
3
: Asphalt unit weight = 22.0 KN/m
Others : Rating Live Load is AASHTO MS18 (HS20-44)
Reqirement :
Determine the load rating of the interior girder of the span (8.0m) for MS18 (HS20)
vehicles considering no damages on members

A.2 BRIDGE LAYOUT

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

145
RCFS CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 2 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCFS CONTINUOUS

NOTES

B. DEMAND FORCES
B.1 DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

The dead loads considered in the calculations include (1) Flat Slab self-weight,
(2) Barrier rails (Assumed to be equally distributed among girders) and (3) Wearing course..

Self-weight of girder = (8.540m) (0.450m) (24 KN/m3) / (8.540m) = 10.800 KN/m

Barrier rail = (18.5m/8.540m)(1.250) = 2.708 KN/m
3
Wearing course = (0.05m) (7.320m) (22 KN/m ) = 0.943 KN/m
Total Uniform Load of Interior Girder, w = 14.450 KN/m

2
Dead Load Moment at Midspan, MDL = 14.45 x 8.00 /8 = 115.60 KN-m Md = wL2/8

Dead Load Shear at "d" from, VDL = 8.00 x 14.45 /2 = 57.80 KN Vd = wL/2
support
WDL = 14.45

8.00 m

B.2 LIVE LOAD CALCULATIONS

The carriageway width is 7.32m curb to curb. AASHTO specifies a clear lane width of 5.4m, thus Manual 1st Ed.
the deck shall carry two-lanes. Sect 3.4.2

The distribution of wheel loads for two traffic lanes for Slab shall be taken as follows AASHTO
Table 3.24.3.2
Number of live load wheel line = (1.0/0.3048)/(4+0.06*8.0/0.3048) = 0.589 ((4+0.06S) in ft.)
(4+0.06S)<7 ==> S<50 in ft. (S<50*0.3048=15.24m) 1ft.=0.3048m
S>15.24m ==> (4+0.06S) should be applied 7 in ft.

Impact factor, I = 15.24 / (8.00 + 38.00) = 0.331 DPWH

==> Use Impact = 0.300 Sect. 3.2.5.1

Conducting a Structural Analysis, the load demands for the RCFS Continuous should be obtained
separately and input the necessary load demands in the Table below.

At Midspan At Pier Support

Description
0.4L 1.0L
Dead load moments, KN-m 115.60 -66.30
Additional Dead load moments, KN-m 7.65 -7.45
MS18 max. positive moment, KN-m 152.50 -
MS18 max. negative moment, KN-m - -109.10

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

146
RCFS CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 3 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCFS CONTINUOUS

NOTES

C. LOAD RATING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD

C.1 CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

The strengths of concrete and rebars are determined based on the year of construction and the
allowable stresses noted in the plans. Since construction was done in 1958, the corresponding
material strengths were as follows (Sect. 3.5).

ALLOWABLE STRESSES STRENGTH This Manual

Concrete fc = 8.3 Mpa f'c = 20.7 Mpa Table 3.5-1
Rebar fs = 137.9 Mpa fy = 275.8 Mpa

C.1.1 MOMENT CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

AT MIDSPAN

Total area of steel ( 28 mm rebar)

2 2
As = 10 x ( π /4 x 28 ) = 6,158 mm

Centroid of rebar from top of deck = 450 - 61 = 389 mm

Total Girder Depth = 450 mm

Cover of Rebar = 61 mm

Effective width of deck, b eff = 1 m segment Flat Slab = 1,000 mm

Ultimate capacity factor (Uf) = 0.90

The rectangular stress block is calculated as,

As fy (6158) (275.80)
a = = = 97 mm
0.85 f'c beff 0.85 (20.7) (1000)

Moment Capacity

0.9 (6158) (275.80) (389 - 97 /2

Mu = As fy (d - a/2) = 6
10
= 520.43 KN-m

AT PIER SUPPORT

Total area of steel ( 28 mm rebar)

2 2
As = 6.7 x ( π /4 x 28 ) = 4,126 mm

Centroid of rebar from top of deck = 450 - 64 = 386 mm

Total Girder Depth = 450 mm

Cover of Rebar = 64 mm

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

147
RCFS CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 4 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCFS CONTINUOUS

NOTES
Effective width of deck, b eff = 1 m segment Flat Slab = 1,000 mm

Ultimate capacity factor (Uf) = 0.90

The rectangular stress block is calculated as,

As fy (4126) (275.80)
a = = = 65 mm
0.85 f'c beff 0.85 (20.7) (1000)

Moment Capacity
0.9 (4126) (275.80) (386 - 65 /2
Mu = As fy (d - a/2) = 6
10
= 362.00 KN-m

C.2 LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

The manual provides the rating factor to be calculated using the Load Factor Method (LFM)
by the formula:

Rn - DD where: => L = 2.17 (Inventory) This Manual

RF =
LL (1 + I) => L = 1.30 (Operating) Eq. 3.2-4
=> L = 2.17 (Posting)

By substituting the factors and the load effects to the equation, the moment rating
of the flat slab can be estimated as presented below.

RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (LFM)

LOCATION DESCRIPTION INVENTORY RATING
520.40 - 1.30 (123.25)
= 1.09
2.17 (152.50)
Midspan OPERATING RATING
520.40 - 1.30 (123.25)
= 1.82
1.3 (152.50)
Moment INVENTORY RATING
-362.00 - 1.30 (-73.75)
= 1.12
Pier 2.17 (-109.10)
Support OPERATING RATING
-362.00 - 1.30 (-73.75)
= 1.88
1.3 (-109.10)

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS (LFM)

(Rating Live Load = MS18, W = 33 Metric Tons)
Location Description Inventory Rating (Tons) Operating Rating (Tons) This Manual
Eq. 3.1-5
Midspan Moment 1.09 x 33 = 35.97 1.82 x 33 = 60.06

Pier Support Moment 1.12 x 33 = 36.96 1.88 x 33 = 62.04

Since the Inventory Rating MLR = 35.97 metric tons are over
than the total weight of MS18 truck = 33 metric tons, load posting the bridge is not necessary

However, as a reference, Load Posting Calculation is shown in following pages.

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

148
RCFS CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 5 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCFS CONTINUOUS

NOTES

D. LOAD POSTING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)

The procedure for load posting is similar to the above using load posting vehicles for live load.

D.1 DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

The live load moments and shears can be separately taken from conducting a structural analysis This manual
corresponding to Types 1-1, 1-2 and 12-2 Posting Vehicles. Fig. 3.4-2

For 3-span continuous ([email protected]) bridge, the Posting Live Load demands are:

Vehicle Type LL Demand At Midspan At Pier Support

Moment 105.2 -83.9
Type 1-1
Shear --- -23.1
Moment 137.7 -109.2
Type 1-2
Shear --- -31.2
Moment 142.8 -115.9
Type 12-2
Shear --- -30.4

Similar calculations are done using Eqs. 3.2-4 and 3.1-5 for rating factor and load rating

LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS BY LFM

AT MIDSPAN
Vehicle INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING POSTING
Vehicle Type Weight Moment Moment (Metric
(Metric Tons)
RF LR RF LR Tons)

MS18 33.0 1.09 35.9 1.82 60.0 33

Type 1-1 17.0 1.58 26.8 2.63 44.8 17

Type 1-2 27.0 1.21 32.5 2.01 54.3 27

Type 12-2 38.0 1.16 44.2 1.94 73.7 38

LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS BY LFM

AT PIER SUPPORT
Vehicle
INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING POSTING
Vehicle Type Weight Moment Moment (Metric
(Metric Tons)
RF LR RF LR Tons)

MS18 33.0 1.12 37.1 1.88 61.9 33

Type 1-1 17.0 1.46 24.8 2.44 41.5 17

Type 1-2 27.0 1.12 30.3 1.87 50.6 27

Type 12-2 38.0 1.06 40.2 1.77 67.1 38

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

149
RCFS CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 6 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCFS CONTINUOUS

NOTES

E. LOAD RATING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD

E1. MOMENT CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

AT MIDSPAN

The concrete and rebar allowable stresses are as noted in the plans as follows:
Concrete : fc = 8.3 Mpa
Rebar : fs = 137.9 Mpa <== Inventory
fs = 193.1 Mpa <== Operating

When the neutral axis is within the slab, the rectangular beam formulation can be used
2
As = 6,158 mm

d = 389 mm

bef = 1,000 mm

ρ = As / bd = 0.01583

n = Es / Ec = 12 MCEB
Sect. 6.6.2.4
Assume neutral axis (N.A.) is within slab and solving for the neutral axis position

2
k = 2ρ n+(ρ n) - ρ n

2
= 2 (0.01583)(12) + [0.01583((12)] - (0.01583)(12)

k = 0.4550

kd = (0.4550)(389) = 177.0 mm

j = 1 - k/3 = 0.8483

Using k = 0.4550, kd = 177.0mm > ts = 450mm,

Therefore, the capacity will be calculated based on the N.A. .
The neutral axis depth, kd is calculated by summing moments at the top of the slab:

The compression zone resultant force (C) & location (z) is calculated as

C Z
177.0
Z = 177.0 / 3 = 59.00 mm
Slab
ts = 450 C = 1/2 (177.0) = 88.5

273.0

Therefore, jd = d - Z
= 389 - 59.00 = 330.0 mm

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

150
RCFS CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 7 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCFS CONTINUOUS

NOTES
If concrete allowable stress controls, the capacity becomes:

At Inventory Level At Operating Level

Mc = be x C x fc x jd Mc = be x C x fc x jd
= (1000)(88.5)(8.3)(330.0)(10-6) = (1000)(88.5)(13.1)(330.0)(10-6)
= 242.4 kN-m = 382.6 kN-m
<<== Not governing since Mc > Ms

If rebar allowable stress controls, the capacity becomes,

At Inventory Level At Operating Level

Ms = As fs jd Ms = As fs jd
= (6158)(137.9)(330.0) = (6158)(193.1)(330.0)
= 280.21 kN-m = 392.38 kN-m

AT PIER SUPPORT

The concrete and rebar allowable stresses are as noted in the plans as follows:
Concrete : fc = 8.3 Mpa
Rebar : fs = 137.9 Mpa <== Inventory
fs = 193.1 Mpa <== Operating

When the neutral axis is within the slab, the rectangular beam formulation can be used
2
As = 4,126 mm

d = 386 mm

bef = 1,000 mm

ρ = As / bd = 0.01069

n = Es / Ec = 12 MCEB
Sect. 6.6.2.4
Assume neutral axis (N.A.) is within slab and solving for the neutral axis position

2
k = 2ρ n+(ρ n) - ρ n

2
= 2 (0.01069)(12) + [(0.01069)(12)] - (0.01069)(12)

k = 0.3942

kd = (0.3942)(386) = 152.2 mm

j = 1 - k/3 = 0.8686

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

151
RCFS CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 8 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCFS CONTINUOUS

NOTES
Using k = 0.3942, kd = 152.2 mm > ts = 450mm,
Therefore, the capacity will be calculated based on the N.A. .
The neutral axis depth, kd is calculated by summing moments at the top of the slab:

The compression zone resultant force (C) & location (z) is calculated as

C Z
152.2
Z = 152.2 / 3 = 50.73 mm
Slab
ts = 450 C = 1/2 (152.2) = 76.1

297.8

Therefore, jd = d - Z
= 386 - 50.73 = 335.3 mm

If concrete allowable stress controls, the capacity becomes:

At Inventory Level At Operating Level
Mc = be x C x fc x jd Mc = be x C x fc x jd
-6
= (1000)(76.1)(8.3)(335.3)(10 ) = (1000)(76.1)(13.1)(335.3)(10-6)
= 211.72 kN-m = 334.26 kN-m
<<== Not governing since Mc > Ms

If rebar allowable stress controls, the capacity becomes,

At Inventory Level At Operating Level
Ms = As fs jd Ms = As fs jd
= (4126)(137.9)(335.3) = (4126)(193.1)(335.3)
= 190.74 kN-m = 267.10 kN-m

E2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

The Manual provides the rating factor to be calculated using the

Allowable Stress Method (ASM) by the formula:

R - A1 D where A1 = 1.0
RF =
A2 L ( 1 + I ) A2 = 1.0

RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (ASM)

LOCATION DESCRIPTION INVENTORY RATING Posting ( Tons )
280.21 - (123.25)
= 1.03 33.99
(152.50)
Midspan OPERATING RATING
392.38 - (123.25) 58.08
= 1.76
(152.50)
Moment INVENTORY RATING
-190.74 - -(73.75) 35.31
= 1.07
Pier -(109.10)
Support OPERATING RATING
-267.10 - -(73.75) 58.41
= 1.77
-(109.10)

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

152
RCFS CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 9 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCFS CONTINUOUS

NOTES

F. LOAD POSTING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD

The procedure for load posting is similar to the above using load posting vehicles for live load
and the demand moments and shears as calculated in the previous Section D, as follows:

LL Demand
Vehicle
Moment (KN-m)
Type
At Midspan At Pier Support

Type 1-1 105.20 -83.90

Type 1-2 137.70 -109.20

Type 12-2 142.80 -115.90

Similarly, using Eq. 3.2-1 and Eq. 3.1-5, load posting calculations are presented below

LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS BY ASM

AT MIDSPAN
Vehicle INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING POSTING
Vehicle Type Weight Rating Load Rating Load (Metric
(Metric Tons)
Factor Rating Factor Rating Tons)

MS18 33.0 1.03 34.0 1.76 58.2 33

Type 1-1 17.0 1.49 25.4 2.56 43.5 17

Type 1-2 27.0 1.14 30.8 1.95 52.8 27

Type 12-2 38.0 1.10 41.8 1.88 71.6 38

LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS BY ASM

AT PIER SUPPORT
Vehicle
INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING POSTING
Vehicle Type Weight Rating Load Rating Load (Metric
(Metric Tons)
Factor Rating Factor Rating Tons)

MS18 33.0 1.07 35.4 1.77 58.5 33

Type 1-1 17.0 1.39 23.7 2.30 39.2 17

Type 1-2 27.0 1.07 28.9 1.77 47.8 27

Type 12-2 38.0 1.01 38.4 1.67 63.4 38

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

153
RCFS CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 10 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCFS CONTINUOUS

NOTES
The summary of calculation results for both the load factor and the allowable stress methods
are presented below.

SUMMARY OF RESULTS FOR LOAD POSTING

Vehicle
Allowable Stress (ASM) Load Factor (LFM) POSTING
Vehicle Type Weight Rating Load Rating Load (Metric
(Metric Tons)
Factor Rating Factor Rating Tons)

MS18 33.0 1.03 34.0 1.09 35.9 33

Type 1-1 17.0 1.39 23.7 1.46 24.8 17

Type 1-2 27.0 1.07 28.9 1.12 30.3 27

Type 12-2 38.0 1.01 38.4 1.06 40.2 38

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

154
 EXAMPLE 2
REINFORCED CONCRETE
DECK GIRDER BRIDGE

Example 2-1: Simple

Example 2-2: Continuous

155
RCDG SIMPLE Computer Based Calculation

INTERIOR RCDG SIMPLE

A. GENERAL BACK TO MENU

A1. BRIDGE DESCRIPTION

Bridge Location REGION XI
Bridge Name Sample Bridge
Bridge Simple or Continuous S Reinforced Concrete T-beams
Type Number of Span 1
Bridge of Width (curb to curb) (m) 7.32
Number of Lanes 2
Bridge Length (m) 10.400 =10.400m
Year Built 1987
Nos. of Girder 4 Multiple monotholic with deck slab.
Structure Girder Spacing (m) 2.400 on centers
Substructure Concrete bents and Abutments
Wearing thickness (mm) 50
Course material Asphalt
fc= 8.3 Mpa fs= 137.9 Mpa
Material Properties
f'c= 20.7 Mpa fy= 275.8 Mpa
Weight of barrier rail Wbr = 3.6 KN/m
3
Assumption Concrete Unit Weight Wu = 24.0 KN/m
3
Asphalt Unit Weight Wa = 22.0 KN/m
Others Rating Live Load is AASHTO MS18 (HS20-44)

NEXT

Year of fc or fs
Material f'c or fy
Construction Inventory Operating Posting
Prior to 1959 17.2 6.9 10.3 6.9
after 1959 20.7 8.3 13.1 8.3
Concrete
1977 to 1981 27.6 11.0 16.5 11.0 *pc
after 1981 31.0 12.4 18.6 12.4 *pc
Prior to 1954 227.5 124.1 172.4 124.1
after 1954 275.8 137.9 193.1 137.9
Rebar
Grade 50 344.7 137.9 224.1 137.9 *pc
Grade 60 413.7 165.5 248.2 165.5 *pc

Interior RCDG Simple

156 Sheet 1 : GENERAL
A2. BRIDGE LAYOUT AND DIMENSION

A1 A2
10.40 m

BRIDGE ELEVATION

180
780
600

SUPERSTRUCTURE CROSS SECTION

BRIDGE LAYOUT AND DIMENSION

Girder width bw(m) 0.400
Girder Web height h (m) 0.600
Fillet/Haunch width wf(m) 0.100
Fillet/Haunch height hf(m) 0.100
Slab thickness ts (m) 0.180
Span Length L(m) 10.400

NEXT

Interior RCDG Simple

157 Sheet 2: LAYOUT
B. DEMAND FORCES

B0. INPUT
Girder width bw(m) 0.400
Girder Web height h (m) 0.600
FOR Fillet/Haunch width wf(m) 0.100
DEAD Fillet/Haunch height hf(m) 0.100
LOAD Slab thickness ts (m) 0.180
Slab width ws (m) 2.400
Span Length L(m) 10.400

B1. DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

Self-weight of Girder 5.760
Fillet/Haunch 0.240
Slab Weight Continuous 10.368
Uniform Load per meter of Girder (KN/m)
Barrier Rail 1.800
Asphalt Overlay 2.640
Total 20.810
Moment (KN-m/m) MDL 281.4
Dead Load
Shear (KN) VDL 108.2

B2. LIVE-LOAD CALCULATIONS

LIVE-LOAD Type MS18(HS20)
Number of live load wheel line 1.312
INPUT FOR LIVE LOAD
Impact factor 0.300
span 10.400
without Impact ML 236.5
Max.MS18 moment for 10.40m span /wheel line
with Impact MLL 403.5
Max.MS18 shear at a distance "d" without Impact VL 117.7
from the support/wheel line with Impact VLL 200.7

NEXT

Interior RCDG Simple

158 Sheet 3: DFDLLL
C. LOAD RATING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)
2400
Total area of Rebar
Nos of Rebar 8
Dia. (mm) 28
180
As(mm2) 4926
Stirrup φ12 yb (mm) 102
600 8 - 28 mm Ø
Stirrups
Dia. (mm) 12
As(mm2) 113.1
450
Spacing (mm) 200
GIRDER AND SLAB DETAILS
C1. CAPACITY CALCULATIONS
C1. INPUT
(1) Common Input Data
Allowable Stress fc 8.3
Concrete
Material Properties Strength f'c 20.7
( Mpa ) Allowable Stress fs 137.9
Rebar
Strength fy 275.8
(2) Input Data for Moment Capacity
2
Total Area of Steel As(mm ) 4926
Section Loss due to Rebar Exposure (%) 0
Total Assumed Area of Steel As(mm2) 4926
Centroid of rebars from bottom of deck , d (mm) 102
Centroid of rebars from top of deck , d (mm) 678
12ts + bw 2560
Effective width of deck , beff (mm Span Length / 4 2600
beff 2400
Ultimate capacity factor (Uf) 0.90
(3) Input Data for Shear Capacity
Girder width bw(mm) 400
Depth of Shear Cracks (mm) 199
The Reduction Factor due to Shear Cracks 0.50
Centroid of rebars from top of deck , d (mm) 678
2
Area of rebar Av(mm ) 113.1
Section Loss due to Stirrups Exposure (%) 0
Total Assumed Area of Steel As(mm2) 113.1
Spacing of stirrups S (mm) 200
Ultimate capacity factor (Uf) 0.85

C1.1 MOMENT CAPACITY AT MIDSPAN

Rectangular stress block depth a (mm) 32.2
The Moment Capacity Mu (kN-m) 809.3
C1.2 SHEAR CAPACITY AT SUPPORT
The shear FULL capacity due to concrete section Vc (kN) 206.1
The shear capacity due to concrete section Vc (kN) 103.5
The shear FULL capacity due to shear reinforcement Vs (kN) 211.5
The shear capacity due to Stirrups Vs (kN) 211.5
The total shear capacity Vu (kN) 267.8

NEXT
Interior RCDG Simple
159 Sheet 4: CCLFM
C2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

C2.1 INPUT
Load factor for dead load 1.3
Inventory 2.17
Load factor for live load
Operating 1.3
Moment Ultimate Capacity at Midspan (kN-m) 809.3
Dead Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) 281.4
Live Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) 403.5
Shear Ultimate Capacity at Support (KN) 267.8
Dead Load Shear at Support (KN) 108.2
Live Load Shear at Support (KN) 200.7
Rating Live Load (Tons) 33.0

Rating Load
C2.2 CALCULATIONS OF RATING FACTOR AND LOAD RATING Factor Rating
Inventory Rating 0.51 16.7
Moment ( Midspan )
Operating Rating 0.85 27.9
Rating Factor and Load Rating
Inventory Rating 0.29 9.6
Shear (At Support )
Operating Rating 0.49 16.1

Depend on the minimum value of Rating Factor > 1 or <1 ,

instruction in the below cell is automatically shown
Load Posting

Click following the above instruction

Return to GENERAL

Load Posting

Interior RCDG Simple

160 Sheet 5: LRLFM
D. LOAD POSTING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)

D1. DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

D1.1 DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

(1) POSTING VEHICLE Type 1-1
LIVE-LOAD Type Type1-1
Number of live load wheel line 1.312
Impact factor 0.300
span 10.40
without Impact ML 183.0
Type 1-1 moment for 10.40m span /wheel line
with Impact MLL 312.1
Type 1-1 shear at a distance "d" without Impact VL 76.7
from the support/wheel line with Impact VLL 130.8
(2) POSTING VEHICLE Type 1-2
LIVE-LOAD Type Type1-2
without Impact ML 223.6
Type 1-2 moment for 10.40m span /wheel line
with Impact MLL 381.4
Type 1-2 shear at a distance "d" without Impact VL 103.6
from the support/wheel line with Impact VLL 176.7
(3) POSTING VEHICLE Type 12-2
LIVE-LOAD Type Type12-2
without Impact ML 208.6
Type 12-2 moment for 10.40m span /wheel line
with Impact MLL 355.8
Type 12-2 shear at a distance "d" without Impact VL 90.1
from the support/wheel line with Impact VLL 153.7

NEXT

Interior RCDG Simple

161 Sheet 6: POSTLL
D2. POSTING RATING CALCULATIONS

D2.1 INPUT
Load factor for dead load 1.3
Inventory 2.17
Load factor for live load
Operating 1.3
Moment Shear
Moment Ultimate Capacity 809.3 267.8
Dead Load 281.4 108.2
Vehicle
Moment Shear
Weight
MS18 403.5 200.7 33.0
Live Load Moment at Midspan (kN-
Type 1-1 312.1 130.8 17.0
m)
Type 1-2 381.4 176.7 27.0
Live Load Shear at Support (KN)
Type 12-2 355.8 153.7 38.0

D2.2 LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS BY LFM

Vehicle Inventory Rating Operating Rating
Posting
Vehicle Weight
Moment Shear Moment Shear (Metric
Type (Metric
Tons)
Tons) RF LR RF LR RF LR RF LR
MS18 33.0 0.51 16.7 0.29 9.6 0.85 27.9 0.49 16.1 10
Type 1-1 17.0 0.65 11.1 0.45 7.6 1.09 18.6 0.75 12.7 8
Type 1-2 27.0 0.54 14.5 0.33 8.9 0.89 24.2 0.55 14.9 9
Type 12-2 38.0 0.57 21.8 0.38 14.5 0.96 36.4 0.64 24.2 14

NEXT

Interior RCDG Simple

162 Sheet 7: POSTLFM
E. Load Rating by Allowable Stress Method
E1. MOMENT AND SHEAR CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

E1.1 Input
Inventory 8.3
fc
Concrete Operating 13.1
Material Properties f'c 20.7
Inventory 137.9
Rebar fs
Operating 193.1
Total Assumed Area of Steel As(mm 2) 4926
2
Area of rebar Av(mm ) 113.1
Spacing of stirrups S (mm) 200
Centroid of rebars from top of deck , d (mm) 678
Effective width of deck , beff (mm) 2400
Girder width bw(m) 400
Rebar Ratio ρ = As / ( beff x d ) 0.00303
Modular Ratio of Elasticity n = Es / Ec 12
2
k = √ [ 2ρn + ( ρn ) ] - ρn 0.2357
j 0.9214
kd 159.8
Slab thickness ts (mm) 180.0
k 0.2357
z 53.26
jd 624.74

Calculation of kd
n As d b ts bw
12 4926 678 2400 180.0 400
2
nAs nAsd bts 1/2bts bwy y/2+ts
59112 40077936 432000 38880000 0 180.0
ts+y y calculate yinput
180.0 0.0 0.0

E1. MOMENT AND SHEAR CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

Capacity
Inventory 994.18
by concrete allowable stress
Mc Operating 1569.13
Moment (kN-m)
Capacity Inventory 424.38
by rebar allowable stress Ms Operating 594.26
Capacity due to Inventory 49.60
Vc
concrete section Operating 74.40
Capacity Inventory 105.74
Shear (kN) Vs
due to rebar Operating 148.07
Inventory 155.34
Shear capacity Vu
Operating 222.47

NEXT
Interior RCDG Simple
163 Sheet 8: CCASM
E2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

E2.1 INPUT
Load factor for dead load 1.0
Load factor for live load 1.0
Inventory 424.4
Moment Capacity at Midspan (kN-m)
Operating 594.3
Dead Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) 281.4
Live Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) 403.5
Inventory 155.3
Shear Capacity at Support (KN)
Operating 222.5
Dead Load Shear at Support (KN) 108.2
Live Load Shear at Support (KN) 200.7
Rating Live Load (Tons) 33.0

Rating Load
E2.2. RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (ASM) Factor Rating
Inventory Rating 0.35 11.7
Moment ( Midspan )
Operating Rating 0.78 25.6
Rating Factor and Load Rating
Inventory Rating 0.23 7.7
Shear (At Support )
Operating Rating 0.57 18.8

NEXT

Interior RCDG Simple

164 Sheet 9: LRASM
F. LOAD POSTING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD

F1. INPUT
Load factor for dead load 1.0
Load factor for live load 1.0
Moment Shear
Inventory 424.4 155.3
Moment and Shear Capacity
Operating 594.3 222.5
Dead Load 281.4 108.2
Vehicle
Moment Shear
Weight
MS18 403.5 200.7 33.0
Live Load Moment at Midspan (kN-
Type 1-1 312.1 130.8 17.0
m)
Type 1-2 381.4 176.7 27.0
Live Load Shear at Support (KN)
Type 12-2 355.8 153.7 38.0

F2. LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (ASM)

Vehicle Inventory Rating Operating Rating
Posting
Vehicle Weight
Moment Shear Moment Shear (Metric
Type (Metric
Tons)
Tons) RF LR RF LR RF LR RF LR
MS18 33.0 0.35 11.7 0.23 7.7 0.78 25.6 0.57 18.8 8
Type 1-1 17.0 0.46 7.8 0.36 6.1 1.00 17.0 0.87 14.9 6
Type 1-2 27.0 0.38 10.1 0.27 7.2 0.82 22.2 0.65 17.5 7
Type 12-2 38.0 0.40 15.3 0.31 11.7 0.88 33.4 0.74 28.2 12

NEXT

Interior RCDG Simple

165 Sheet 10: POSTASM
G. SUMMARY OF LOAD POSTING

SUMMARY OF RESULTS FOR LOAD POSTING

Vehicle Allowable Stress (ASM) Load Factor (LFM)
Load
Vehicle Weight
Rating Load Rating Load Posting
Type (Metric
Factor Rating Factor Rating (Tons)
Tons)
MS18 33.0 0.23 7.7 0.29 9.6 8T
Type 1-1 17.0 0.36 6.1 0.45 7.6 6T
Type 1-2 27.0 0.27 7.2 0.33 8.9 7T
Type 12-2 38.0 0.31 11.7 0.38 14.5 12T

LOAD

6T
7T

12T

END GO TO RC DECK SLAB

Interior RCDG Simple

166 Sheet 11: POSTSUM
RCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 1 OF 9

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG SIMPLE

A. GENERAL
A.1 BRIDGE DESCRIPTION

Bridge Location : Region XI

Bridge Type : Simple-span Reinforced Concrete T-Beams
Br. Width / No. of Lanes : 7.32m curb to curb / Two-lanes
Bridge Length : 10.40m
Year Built : 1987
Structure
Girders : Multiple Girders per span (4-Girders), Monolithic with deck slab
: Girder spacing at 2.40m on center
Substructure : RC Cantilever Abutments
Wearing Course : 50mm thick Asphalt Overlay
Material Properties : fc = 8.3 Mpa , fs = 137.9 Mpa
: f'c = 20.7 Mpa , fy = 275.8 Mpa
Assumption : Weight of barrier rail = 3.6 KN/m
3
: Concrete unit weight = 24.0 KN/m
3
: Asphalt unit weight = 22.0 KN/m
Others : Rating Live Load is AASHTO MS18 (HS20-44)
Reqirement :
Determine the load rating of the interior girder of the span (10.40m) for MS18 (HS20)
vehicles considering damages on members ( Shear crack depth 199mm occurred )

A.2 BRIDGE LAYOUT 10.40 m

BRIDGE ELEVATION
1.11 7.32 1.11

0.6 0.6

0.40 2.00 0.40 2.00 0.40 2.00 0.40

DECK SECTION

0.18

-12 mm 8- 28
0.6 STR

0.06

GIRDER SECTION

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

167
RCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 2 OF 9

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG SIMPLE

NOTES

B. DEMAND FORCES
B.1 DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

The dead loads considered in the calculations include (1) Girder self-weight, (2) Fillet/haunch,
(3) Tributary area of slab, (4) Barrier rails (Assumed to be equally distributed among girders).
(5) Wearing course.

Self-weight of girder = (0.40m) (0.60m) (24 KN/m3) = 5.76 KN/m

3
Fillet/haunch = 2 (1/2) (0.1m) (0.1m) (24 KN/m ) = 0.24 KN/m
Slab Weight (Tributary) = (0.18m) (2.40m) (24 KN/m3) = 10.368 KN/m
Barrier rail = 2 (3.6/4) = 1.80 KN/m
3
Wearing course = (0.05m) (2.40m) (22 KN/m ) = 2.64 KN/m
Total Uniform Load of Interior Girder, w = 20.81 KN/m

2
Dead Load Moment at Midspan, MDL = 20.81 x 10.40 /8 = 281.4 KN-m Md = wL2/8

Dead Load Shear at "d" from, VDL = 20.81 x 10.40 /2 = 108.20 KN Vd = wL/2
support
WDL = 20.81

10.40 m

B.2 LIVE LOAD CALCULATIONS

The carriageway width is 7.32m curb to curb. AASHTO specifies a clear lane width of 5.4m, thus Manual 1st Ed.
the deck shall carry two-lanes. Sect 3.4.2

The distribution of wheel loads for two traffic lanes for T-beams shall be taken as S/1.829 DPWH
Table 3-4
Number of live load wheel line = 2.40 / 1.829 = 1.312 AASHTO
Table 3.23.1
(S/6 in ft.)

Impact factor, I = 15.24 / (10.4) + 38.00) = 0.552 DPWH

==> Use Impact = 0.300 Sect. 3.2.5.1

The live load moments and shear values are taken from the tables in Appendix III on this manual
and are used to determine the live load demand. Interpolation may be used if values are not exact

Max. MS18 moment for (10.4) m = 236.5 KN-m

span without impact/whel line

Thus, MS18 moment with MLL = (1.312m) (1.300m) (236.50) = 403.5 KN-m
Impact at midspan

Max. MS18 shear at support/wheel line = 117.7 KN

Thus, MS18 shear VLL = (1.312m) (1.300m) (117.70) = 200.7 KN

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

168
RCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 3 OF 9

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG SIMPLE

NOTES

C. LOAD RATING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD

C.1 CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

The strengths of concrete and rebars are determined based on the year of construction and the
allowable stresses noted in the plans. Since construction was done in 1987, the corresponding
material strengths were as follows (Sect. 3.5).

ALLOWABLE STRESSES STRENGTH This Manual

Concrete fc = 8.30 Mpa f'c = 20.70 Mpa Table 3.5-1
Rebar fs = 137.90 Mpa fy = 275.80 Mpa

C.1.1 MOMENT CAPACITY AT MIDSPAN

Total area of steel ( 28 mm rebar)

2 2
As = 8 x ( π /4 x 28 ) = 4,926 mm

Centroid of rebar from top of deck

Total Girder Depth = TSLAB + Girder Depth

= 180 + 600 28 G2 G2 G2 G2

= 780 mm 28 SPACER BAR

28 G1 G1 G1 G1 Yb
Bar No. Area No. Y-Dist ATOT ATOT * Y 60
G1 615.8 4 74 2463.009 182263
G2 615.8 4 130 2463.009 320191 0
4926 502454

ATOT * Y 502,454
Rebar centroid from bottom = = = 102 mm
ATOT 4,926

Rebar centroid from top = 780 - 102 = 678 mm

Effective width of deck, b eff = Minimum of the following :

12 ts + bw = 2560 mm beff
Span /4 = 2600 mm
Controls Spacing = 2400 mm

The rectangular stress block is calculated as,

As fy (4,926) (275.80)
a = = = 32.2 mm < ts
0.85 f'c beff 0.85 (20.70) (2,400)

Moment Capacity

0.9 (4,926) (275.80) 678 - 32.17 / 2

Mu = As fy (d - a/2) = 6
10

= 809.3 KN-m

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

169
RCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 4 OF 9

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG SIMPLE

NOTES
C.1.2 SHEAR CAPACITY AT SUPPORT

The AASHTO Design Specification requires that the design shear be taken at a distance "d" from
the support. However, shear at support may be used conservatively.
In the absence of data, the standard reinforcement for a 10.0m span under DPWH
standards had been used.
The shear capacity of the concrete section

Vc = 0.167 Sqrt(f'c) b d = 0.167 Sqrt (20.70) (400) (678)

= 206.1 KN ==>> Full Capacity

Vc' (reduced) = 0.5 x 206.1 = 103.5 KN ==>> Use 50% concrete capacity
due to shear cracks (199mm depth)
The shear capacity of the shear reinforcement
Stirrups :
Vs = 2 Av fy deff / S = 2 (113.1) (275.80) (678.00) / 200 D12mm
= 211.5 KN A = 113.1 mm2

The total shear capacity becomes

Vu = (Vc + Vs) = 0.85 (103.5 + 211.5)

= 267.8 KN

C.2 LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

The manual provides the rating factor to be calculated using the Load Factor Method (LFM)
by the formula:

Rn - DD where: => L = 2.17 (Inventory) This Manual

RF =
LL (1 + I) => L = 1.30 (Operating) Eq. 3.2-4
=> L = 2.17 (Posting)

By substituting the factors and the load effects to the equation, the moment and shear rating
of the interior girder can be estimated as presented below.

RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (LFM)

LOCATION DESCRIPTION INVENTORY RATING This Manual
809.3 - 1.30 (281.4) Eq. 3.2-4
= 0.51
2.17 (403.5)
Midspan Moment OPERATING RATING
809.3 - 1.30 (281.4)
= 0.85
1.3 (403.5)
LOCATION DESCRIPTION INVENTORY RATING This Manual
267.8 - 1.30 (108.2) Eq. 3.2-4
= 0.29
2.17 (200.7)
At Support Shear OPERATING RATING
267.8 - 1.30 (108.2)
= 0.49
1.3 (200.7)

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

170
RCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 5 OF 9

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG SIMPLE

NOTES

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS (LFM)

(Rating Live Load = MS18, W = 33 Metric Tons)
Location Description Inventory Rating (Tons) Operating Rating (Tons) This Manual
Midspan Moment 0.51 x 33 = 16.7 0.85 x 33 = 27.9 Eq. 3.1-5

At Support Shear 0.29 x 33 = 9.6 0.49 x 33 = 16.1 This Manual

Eq. 3.1-5

Since the Inventory Rating MLR = 16.7 metric tons and VLR = 9.6 metric tons are less
than the total weight of MS18 truck = 33 metric tons, load posting the bridge is necessary

D. LOAD POSTING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)

The procedure for load posting is similar to the above using load posting vehicles for live load.

D.1 DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

The live load moments and shears can be taken from Appendix III of the Manual corresponding This manual
to Types 1-1, 1-2 and 12-2 Posting Vehicles. Fig. 3.4-2

For a 10.40 m span bridge, the Posting Live Load demands are:

Vehicle LL Effects/Wheel Line LL Dist LL Demand

Impact
Type Moment Shear Factor Moment (KN-m) Shear (KN)

Type 1-1 183.0 76.7 1.312 1.300 312.1 130.8

Type 1-2 223.6 103.6 1.312 1.300 381.4 176.7

Type 12-2 208.6 90.1 1.312 1.300 355.8 153.7

Similar calculations are done using Eqs. 3.2-4 and 3.1-5 for rating factor and load rating

LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS BY LFM

Vehicle
INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING POSTING
Vehicle Type Weight Moment Shear Moment Shear (Metric
(Metric Tons)
RF LR RF LR RF LR RF LR Tons)

MS18 33.0 0.51 16.7 0.29 9.6 0.85 27.9 0.49 16.1 10

Type 1-1 17.0 0.65 11.1 0.45 7.6 1.09 18.6 0.75 12.7 8

Type 1-2 27.0 0.54 14.5 0.33 8.9 0.89 24.2 0.55 14.9 9

Type 12-2 38.0 0.57 21.8 0.38 14.5 0.96 36.4 0.64 24.2 14

RATED BY : EAB DATE : 1900/1/0 0:00 CHECKED BY : JCS DATE :

171
RCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 6 OF 9

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG SIMPLE

NOTES

E. LOAD RATING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD

E1. MOMENT AND SHEAR CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

The concrete and rebar allowable stresses are as noted in the plans as follows:

Concrete : fc = 8.3 Mpa

Rebar : fs = 137.9 Mpa <== Inventory
fs = 193.1 Mpa <== Operating

When the neutral axis is within the slab, the rectangular beam formulation can be used

2
As = 4,926 mm

d = 678 mm

bef = 2,400 mm

ρ = As / bd = 0.00303

n = Es / Ec = 12 MCEB
Sect. 6.6.2.4

Assume neutral axis (N.A.) is within slab and solving for the neutral axis position

2
k = 2ρ n+(ρ n) - ρ n

2
= 2 (0.00303)(12) + [0.00303((12)] - (0.00303)(12)

k = 0.2357

kd = (0.2357)(678) = 159.8 mm

j = 1 - k/3 = 0.9214

Using k = 0.2357, kd = 159.8mm < ts = 180mm, therefore N.A. lies above

the web and into the slab. Therefore, the capacity will be calculated
based on the N.A. above the web. The neutral axis depth, kd is
calculated by summing moments at the top of the slab:

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

172
RCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 7 OF 9

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG SIMPLE

NOTES

The compression zone resultant force (C) & location (z) is calculated as

C Z
159.8
Slab Z = 159.8 / 3 = 53.26 mm
ts = 180
20.2 C = 1/2 (159.8) = 79.89

Therefore, jd = d - Z
= 678 - 53.26 = 624.74 mm

If concrete allowable stress controls, the capacity becomes:

Mc = be x C x fc x jd
= (2400)(79.89)(8.3)(624.74)(10-6)
= 994.18 kN-m <<== Not governing since Mc > Ms

If rebar allowable stress controls, the capacity becomes,

At Inventory Level At Operating Level

Ms = As fs jd Ms = As fs jd
= (4926)(137.9)(624.74) = (4926)(193.1)(624.74)
= 424.38 kN-m = 594.26 kN-m

SHEAR CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

The conditions for shear capacity calculations is the same as that previously calculated.

The shear capacity due to concrete section:

At Inventory Level
Vc = 0.08 fc bw d = 0.08 (20.7) (400) (678) = 99.20
Vc' (reduced) = 99.2 x 0.5 = 49.60 KN ==>> Use 50% concrete capacity
due to shear cracks (199mm depth)
At Operating Level
Vc = 0.12 fc bw d = 0.12 (20.7) (400) (678) = 148.80
Vc' (reduced) = 148.8 x 0.5 = 74.40 KN ==>> Use 50% concrete capacity
due to shear cracks (199mm depth)

The shear capacity due to shear reinforcement:

At Inventory Level
Vs = 2 Av fs ds / S = 2(113.10)(137.9)(678)/200
= 105.74 kN

At Operating Level
Vs = 2 Av fs ds / S = 2(113.10)(193.1)(678)/200
= 148.07 kN

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

173
RCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 8 OF 9

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG SIMPLE

NOTES

The total shear capacity becomes:

At Inventory Level
Vs = Vc + Vs = 49.6 + 105.74
= 155.34 kN

At Operating Level
Vs = Vc + Vs = 74.4 + 148.07
= 222.47 kN

E2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

The Manual provides the rating factor to be calculated using the

Allowable Stress Method (ASM) by the formula:

RF =
R - A1 D where A1 = 1.0
A2 L ( 1 + I ) A2 = 1.0

RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (ASM)

LOCATION DESCRIPTION INVENTORY RATING Posting ( Tons )
424.4 - (281.4)
= 0.35 11.7
(403.5)
Midspan Moment OPERATING RATING
594.3 - (281.4) 25.6
= 0.78
(403.5)
LOCATION DESCRIPTION INVENTORY RATING
155.3 - (108.2) 7.7
= 0.23
(200.7)
At Support Shear OPERATING RATING
222.5 - (108.2) 18.8
= 0.57
(200.7)

Since the Inventory Rating Factor MRF = 0.57 and VRF = 0.34
are less than one, load posting calculations are necessary.

F. LOAD POSTING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD

The procedure for load posting is similar to the above using load posting vehicles for live load
and the demand moments and shears as calculated in the previous Section D, as follows:

Vehicle LL Demand
Type Moment (KN-m) Shear (KN)

Type 1-1 312.1 130.8

Type 1-2 381.4 176.6

Type 12-2 355.8 153.7

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

174
RCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 9 OF 9

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG SIMPLE

NOTES

Similarly, using Eq. 3.2-1 and Eq. 3.1-5, load posting calculations are presented below

LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS BY LFM

Vehicle
INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING POSTING
Vehicle Type Weight Moment Shear Moment Shear (Metric
(Metric Tons)
RF LR RF LR RF LR RF LR Tons)

MS18 33.0 0.35 11.7 0.23 7.7 0.78 25.6 0.57 18.8 8

Type 1-1 17.0 0.46 7.8 0.36 6.1 1.00 17.0 0.87 14.89 6

Type 1-2 27.0 0.38 10.1 0.27 7.2 0.82 22.2 0.65 17.5 7

Type 12-2 38.0 0.40 15.3 0.31 11.7 0.88 33.4 0.74 28.2 12

The summary of calculation results for both the load factor and the allowable stress methods
are presented below.

SUMMARY OF RESULTS FOR LOAD POSTING

Vehicle Allowable Stress (ASM) Load Factor (LFM) POSTING

Vehicle Type Weight Rating Load Rating Load (Metric
(Metric Tons)
Factor Rating Factor Rating Tons)

MS18 33.0 0.23 7.7 0.29 9.6 8

Type 1-1 17.0 0.36 6.1 0.45 7.6 6

Type 1-2 27.0 0.27 7.2 0.33 8.9 7

Type 12-2 38.0 0.31 11.7 0.38 14.5 12

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

175
RCDG CONTINUOUS Computer Based Calculation

INTERIOR RCDG CONTINUOUS

A. GENERAL BACK TO MENU

A1. BRIDGE DESCRIPTION

Bridge Location REGION
Bridge Name STANDARD BRIDGE
Bridge Simple or Continuous C Reinforced Concrete T-beams
Type Number of Span 3
Bridge of Width (curb to curb) (m) 7.32
Number of Lanes 2
Bridge Length (m) 15.000 15.000 15.000 =45.000m
Year Built 2000
Nos. of Girder 4 Multiple monotholic with deck slab.
Structure Girder Spacing (m) 2.400 on centers
Substructure Wall Type RC Piers and RC Cantilever Abutments
Wearing thickness (mm) 0
Course material Asphalt
fc= 8.3 Mpa fs= 137.9 Mpa
Material Properties
f'c= 20.7 Mpa fy= 275.8 Mpa
Weight of barrier rail Wbr = 13.0 KN/m
3
Assumption Concrete Unit Weight Wu = 24.0 KN/m
3
Asphalt Unit Weight Wa = 22.0 KN/m
Others Rating Live Load is AASHTO MS18 (HS20-44)

NEXT

Year of fc or fs
Material f'c or fy
Construction Inventory Operating Posting
Prior to 1959 17.2 6.9 10.3 6.9
after 1959 20.7 8.3 13.1 8.3
Concrete
1977 to 1981 27.6 11.0 16.5 11.0 *pc
after 1981 31.0 12.4 18.6 12.4 *pc
Prior to 1954 227.5 124.1 172.4 124.1
after 1954 275.8 137.9 193.1 137.9
Rebar
Grade 50 344.7 137.9 224.1 137.9 *pc
Grade 60 413.7 165.5 248.2 165.5 *pc

INTERIOR RCDG CONTINUOUS

176 Sheet 1: GENERAL
A2. BRIDGE LAYOUT AND DIMENSION

BRIDGE ELEVATION

SUPERSTRUCTURE CROSS SECTION

BRIDGE LAYOUT AND DIMENSION

Girder width bw(m) 0.400
Girder Web height h (m) 1.000
Fillet/Haunch width wf(m) 0.100
Fillet/Haunch height hf(m) 0.100
Slab thickness ts (m) 0.200
Span Length L(m) 15.000

NEXT

INTERIOR RCDG CONTINUOUS

177 Sheet 2: LAYOUT
B. DEMAND FORCES

B0. INPUT
Girder width bw(m) 0.400
Girder Web height h (m) 1.000
FOR Fillet/Haunch width wf(m) 0.100
DEAD Fillet/Haunch height hf(m) 0.100
LOAD Slab thickness ts (m) 0.200
Slab width ws (m) 2.400
Span Length L(m) 15.000

B1. DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

Self-weight of Girder 9.600
Fillet/Haunch 0.240
Slab Weight Continuous 11.520
Barrier Rail 6.500
Uniform Load per meter of Girder (KN/m)
Asphalt Overlay 0.000
Total Load 27.860
Total DeadLoad 21.360
Total Superimposed Dead Load 6.500

B2. LOAD DEMAND MIDSPAN AND SUPPORT OF RCDG

Conducting a Structural Analysis, the load demands for the RCDG should be
obtained
At Midspan At Pier Support
Description
0.4L 1.0L
Dead load moments, KN-m 496.7 -620.1
Dead load shears, KN - -248.2
MS18 max. positive moment, KN-m 536.3 0.0
MS18 max. negative moment, KN-m - -416.4
MS18 max. negative Shear force, KN - -334.5

NEXT

INTERIOR RCDG CONTINUOUS

178 Sheet 3: DFDLLL
C. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS
Total area of Rebar
Midspan Pier
Nos of Rebar 10 13
Dia. (mm) 36 28
As(mm2) 10179 8005
yb (mm) 126 63

Stirrups
At Pier
Dia. (mm) 16
As(mm2) 201.1
SECTION AT MIDSPAN SECTION AT PIER SUPPORT
Spacing (mm) 150

C1. CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

C1. INPUT
(1) Common Input Data At Midspan At Pier
Allowable Stress fc 8.3
Concrete
Material Properties Strength f'c 20.7
( Mpa ) Allowable Stress fs 137.9
Rebar
Strength fy 275.8
(2) Input Data for Moment Capacity At Midspan At Pier
Total Area of Steel As(mm 2) 10179 8005
Section Loss due to Rebar Exposure (%) 0 0
Total Assumed Area of Steel As(mm2) 10179 8005
Centroid of rebars from bottom of deck , yb (mm) 126 63
Centroid of rebars from top of deck , d (mm) 1074 1137
12ts + bw 2800 -
Effective width of deck , beff (mm Span Length / 4 3750 -
beff 2400 400
Ultimate capacity factor (Uf) 0.90 0.90
(3) Input Data for Shear Capacity At Midspan At Pier
Girder width bw(mm) - 400
Depth of Shear Cracks (mm) - 0
The Reduction Factor due to Shear Cracks - 1.00
Centroid of rebars from top of deck , d (mm) - 1137
Area of rebar Av(mm 2) - 201.1
Section Loss due to Stirrups Exposure (%) - 0
Total Assumed Area of Steel As(mm2) - 201.1
Spacing of stirrups S (mm) - 150
Ultimate capacity factor (Uf) - 0.85
C1.1 MOMENT CAPACITY AT MIDSPAN At Midspan At Pier
Rectangular stress block depth a (mm) 66.5 313.7
The Moment Capacity Mu (kN-m) 2629.6 1947.6
C1.2 SHEAR CAPACITY AT SUPPORT At Midspan At Pier
The shear FULL capacity due to concrete section Vc (kN) - 345.6
The shear capacity due to concrete section Vc (kN) - 345.6
The shear FULL capacity due to shear reinforcement Vs (kN) - 840.7
The shear capacity due to Stirrups Vs (kN) - 840.7
The total shear capacity Vu (kN) - 1008.3

NEXT
INTERIOR RCDG CONTINUOUS
179 Sheet 4: CCLFM
C2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

C2.1 INPUT At Midspan At Pier

Load factor for dead load 1.3
Inventory 2.17
Load factor for live load
Operating 1.3
Moment Ultimate Capacity at Midspan (kN-m) 2629.6 -1947.6
Dead Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) 496.7 -620.1
Live Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) 536.3 -416.4
Shear Ultimate Capacity at Support (KN) - -1008.3
Dead Load Shear at Support (KN) - -248.2
Live Load Shear at Support (KN) - -334.5
Rating Live Load (Tons) 33.0

Rating Load
C2.2 CALCULATIONS OF RATING FACTOR AND LOAD RATING Factor Rating
Inventory Rating 1.70 56.3
Midspan
Operating Rating 2.85 93.9
Moment
Inventory Rating 1.26 41.7
Rating Factor and Load Rating At Pier
Operating Rating 2.11 69.6
Inventory Rating 0.94 31.2
Shear At Pier
Operating Rating 1.58 52.0

Depend on the minimum value of Rating Factor > 1 or <1 ,

instruction in the below cell is automatically shown
Load Posting

Click following the above instruction

Return to GENERAL

Load Posting

INTERIOR RCDG CONTINUOUS

180 Sheet 5: LRLFM
D. LOAD POSTING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)

D1. DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

D1.2 POSTING VEHICLE DEMAND FORCES

Conducting a Structural Analysis, the load demands for the RCDG should be obtained
separately and input the necessary load demands in the Table below.
Posting Vehicle Demand Forces At Midspan At Pier Support
Moment 382.8 -205.0
Type 1-1
Shear - -130.0
Moment 492.6 -303.4
Type 1-2
Shear - -188.1
Moment 450.5 -392.6
Type 12-2
Shear - -201.1

NEXT

INTERIOR RCDG CONTINUOUS

181 Sheet 6: POSTLL
D2. POSTING RATING CALCULATIONS

D2.1 INPUT
Load factor for dead load 1.3
Inventory 2.17
Load factor for live load
Operating 1.3
Moment Shear
Midspan At Pier At Pier
Moment Ultimate Capacity 2629.6 1947.6 1008.3
Dead Load 496.7 620.1 248.2
Moment Shear Vehicle
Midspan At Pier Weight
MS18 536.3 416.4 334.5 33.0
Live Load Moment at Midspan (kN-
Type 1-1 382.8 205.0 130.0 17.0
m)
Type 1-2 492.6 303.4 188.1 27.0
Live Load Shear at Support (KN)
Type 12-2 450.5 392.6 201.1 38.0

D2.2 LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS BY LFM

Vehicle Inventory Rating Operating Rating
Posting
Vehicle Weight
Moment Shear Moment Shear (Metric
Type (Metric
Tons)
Tons) RF LR RF LR RF LR RF LR
(1) At Midspan
MS18 33.0 1.70 56.3 - - 2.85 93.9 - - 33
Type 1-1 17.0 2.39 40.6 - - 3.99 67.8 - - 17
Type 1-2 27.0 1.86 50.1 - - 3.10 83.6 - - 27
Type 12-2 38.0 2.03 77.1 - - 3.39 128.7 - - 38
(2) At Pier Support
MS18 33.0 1.26 41.7 0.94 31.2 2.11 69.6 1.58 52.0 31
Type 1-1 17.0 2.57 43.6 2.43 41.3 4.28 72.8 4.06 69.0 17
Type 1-2 27.0 1.73 46.8 1.68 45.4 2.89 78.1 2.80 75.7 27
Type 12-2 38.0 1.34 50.9 1.57 59.7 2.24 85.0 2.62 99.7 38

NEXT

INTERIOR RCDG CONTINUOUS

182 Sheet 7: POSTLFM
E. Load Rating by Allowable Stress Method
E1. MOMENT AND SHEAR CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

E1.1 Input Midspan At Pier

Inventory 8.3
fc
Concrete Operating 13.1
Material Properties f'c 20.7
Inventory 137.9
Rebar fs
Operating 193.1
2
Total Assumed Area of Steel As(mm ) 10179 8005
2
Area of rebar Av(mm ) 201.1 201.1
Spacing of stirrups S (mm) 150 150
Centroid of rebars from top of deck , d (mm) 1074 1137
Effective width of deck , beff (mm) 2400 400
Girder width bw(m) 400 400
Rebar Ratio ρ = As / ( beff x d ) 0.00395 0.01760
Modular Ratio of Elasticity n = Es / Ec 12 12
2
k = √ [ 2ρn + ( ρn ) ] - ρn 0.2641 0.4722
j 0.9120 0.8426
kd 294.6 536.9
Slab thickness ts (mm) 200.0 200.0
k 0.2743 -
z 98.20 -
jd 975.80 958.04

Calculation of kd
n As d b ts bw
12 10179 1074 2400 200.0 400
2
nAs nAsd bts 1/2bts bwy y/2+ts
122148 131186952 480000 48000000 37840 247.3
ts+y y calculate yinput
294.6 94.6 94.6

E1.2 MOMENT AND SHEAR CAPACITY CALCULATIONS Midspan At Pier

Capacity Inventory 2617.2 -853.8
by concrete allowable stress Mc Operating 4130.8 -1347.6
Moment (kN-m)
Capacity Inventory 1369.7 -1057.6
by rebar allowable stress Ms Operating 1918.0 -1480.9
Capacity due to Inventory - 165.5
Vc
concrete section Operating - 248.3
Capacity Inventory - 420.3
Shear (kN) Vs
due to rebar Operating - 588.6
Inventory - 585.9
Shear capacity Vu
Operating - 836.9

NEXT

INTERIOR RCDG CONTINUOUS

183 Sheet 8: CCASM
E2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

E2.1 INPUT Midspan At Pier

Load factor for dead load 1.0
Load factor for live load 1.0
Inventory 1369.71 -853.82
Moment Capacity at Midspan (kN-m)
Operating 1918.0 -1347.6
Dead Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) 496.7 -620.1
Live Load Moment at Midspan (kN-m) 536.3 -416.4
Inventory - -585.9
Shear Capacity at Support (KN)
Operating - -836.9
Dead Load Shear at Support (KN) - -248.2
Live Load Shear at Support (KN) - -334.5
Rating Live Load (Tons) 33.0

Rating Load
E2.2. RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (ASM) Factor Rating
Inventory Rating 1.63 53.72
Midspan
Operating Rating 2.65 87.46
Moment
Inventory Rating 0.56 18.52
Rating Factor and Load Rating At Pier
Operating Rating 1.75 57.65
Inventory Rating 1.01 33.31
Shear At Pier
Operating Rating 1.76 58.08

NEXT

INTERIOR RCDG CONTINUOUS

184 Sheet 9: LRASM
F. LOAD POSTING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD

F1. INPUT
Load factor for dead load 1.0
Load factor for live load 1.0
Moment Shear
Midspan At Pier At Pier
Inventory 1369.7 -853.8 -585.9
Moment and Shear Capacity
Operating 1918.0 -1347.6 -836.9
Dead Load 496.7 -620.1 -248.2
Moment Shear Vehicle
Midspan At Pier At Pier Weight
MS18 536.3 -416.4 -334.5 33.0
Live Load Moment at Midspan (kN-
Type 1-1 382.8 -205.0 -130.0 17.0
m)
Type 1-2 492.6 -303.4 -188.1 27.0
Live Load Shear at Support (KN)
Type 12-2 450.5 -392.6 -201.1 38.0

F2. LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (ASM)

Vehicle Inventory Rating Operating Rating
Posting
Vehicle Weight
Moment Shear Moment Shear (Metric
Type (Metric
Tons)
Tons) RF LR RF LR RF LR RF LR
(1) AT MIDSPAN
MS18 33.0 1.63 53.7 - - 2.65 87.5 - - 33
Type 1-1 17.0 2.28 38.8 - - 3.71 63.1 - - 17
Type 1-2 27.0 1.77 47.9 - - 2.89 77.9 - - 27
Type 12-2 38.0 1.94 73.6 - - 3.15 119.9 - - 38
(2) AT PIER SUPPORT
MS18 33.0 0.56 18.5 1.01 33.3 1.75 57.7 1.76 58.1 19
Type 1-1 17.0 1.14 19.4 2.60 44.2 3.55 60.3 4.53 77.0 17
Type 1-2 27.0 0.77 20.8 1.80 48.5 2.40 64.7 3.13 84.5 21
Type 12-2 38.0 0.60 22.6 1.68 63.8 1.85 70.4 2.93 111.2 23

NEXT

INTERIOR RCDG CONTINUOUS

185 Sheet 10: POSTASM
G. SUMMARY OF LOAD POSTING

SUMMARY OF RESULTS FOR LOAD POSTING

Vehicle Allowable Stress (ASM) Load Factor (LFM)
Load
Vehicle Weight
Rating Load Rating Load Posting
Type (Metric
Factor Rating Factor Rating (Tons)
Tons)
MS18 33.0 0.56 18.5 0.94 31.2 19T
Type 1-1 17.0 1.14 19.4 2.39 40.6 17T
Type 1-2 27.0 0.77 20.8 1.68 45.4 21T
Type 12-2 38.0 0.60 22.6 1.34 50.9 23T

LOAD

17T
21T
23T

END AND GO TO DECK SLAB

INTERIOR RCDG CONTINUOUS

186 Sheet 11: POSTSUM
RCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 1 OF 12

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG CONTINUOUS

A. GENERAL
A.1 BRIDGE DESCRIPTION

Bridge Location : None (Standard Bridge)

Bridge Type : 3-span Continuous Reinforced Concrete T-Beams
Br. Width / No. of Lanes : 7.32m curb to curb / Two-lanes
Bridge Length : 15.0m + 15.0m +15.0m = 45.0m
Year Built : 2000
Structure
Girders : Multiple Girders per span (4-Girders), Monolithic with deck slab
: Girder spacing at 2.40m on center
Substructure : Wall Type RC Pier and RC Cantilever Abutments
Wearing Course : None
Material Properties : fc = 8.3 Mpa , fs = 137.9 Mpa
: f'c = 20.7 Mpa , fy = 275.8 Mpa
Assumption : Weight of barrier rail = 13.0 KN/m
3
: Concrete unit weight = 24.0 KN/m
3
: Asphalt unit weight = 22.0 KN/m
Others : Rating Live Load is AASHTO MS18 (HS20-44)
Reqirement :
Determine the load rating of the interior girder of the span (10.40m) for MS18 (HS20)
vehicles considering no damages on members

A.2 BRIDGE LAYOUT

BRIDGE ELEVATION

SUPERSTRUCTURE CROSS SECTION

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

187
RCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 2 OF 12

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES

B. DEMAND FORCES
B.1 DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

The dead loads considered in the calculations include (1) Girder self-weight, (2) Fillet/haunch,
(3) Tributary area of slab, (4) Barrier rails (Assumed to be equally distributed among girders).

Self-weight of girder = (0.40m) (1.00m) (24 KN/m3) = 9.600 KN/m

3
Fillet/haunch = 2 (1/2) (0.1m) (0.1m) (24 KN/m ) = 0.240 KN/m
Slab Weight (Tributary) = (0.20m) (2.40m) (24 KN/m3) = 11.520 KN/m
Barrier rail = 2 (3.6/4) = 6.500 KN/m
Total Uniform Load of Interior Girder, w = 27.860 KN/m

B.2 LOAD DEMAND MIDSPAN AND SUPPORT OF RCDG

The carriageway width is 7.32m curb to curb. AASHTO specifies a clear lane width of 5.4m, thus Manual 1st Ed.
the deck shall carry two-lanes. Sect 3.4.2

The distribution of wheel loads for two traffic lanes for T-beams shall be taken as S/1.829 DPWH
Table 3-4
Number of live load wheel line = 3.20 / 1.829 = 1.750 AASHTO
Table 3.23.1
(S/6 in ft.)

Impact factor, I = 15.24 / (15.0) + 38.00) = 0.287 DPWH

Sect. 3.2.5.1
Conducting a Structural Analysis, the load demands for the RCDGContinuous should be obtained
separately and input the necessary lo

At Midspan At Pier Support

Description
0.4L 1.0L
Dead load moments, KN-m 496.7 -620.1
Dead load shears, KN - -248.2
MS18 max. positive moment, KN-m 536.3 0.0
MS18 max. negative moment, KN-m - -416.4
MS18 max. negative Shear force, KN - -334.5

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

188
RCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 3 OF 12

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES

C. LOAD RATING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD

C.1 CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

The strengths of concrete and rebars are determined based on the year of construction and the
allowable stresses noted in the plans. Since construction was done in 2000, the corresponding
material strengths were as follows (Sect. 3.5).

ALLOWABLE STRESSES STRENGTH This Manual

Concrete fc = 8.30 Mpa f'c = 20.70 Mpa Table 3.5-1
Rebar fs = 137.90 Mpa fy = 275.80 Mpa

C.1.1 MOMENT CAPACITY AT MIDSPAN

Total area of steel ( 36 mm rebar)

2 2
As = 10 x ( π /4 x 36 ) = 10,179 mm

Centroid of rebar from top of deck

Total Girder Depth = TSLAB + Girder Depth 36 G3 G3 G3 G3

= 200 + 1000 30 SPACER BAR

= 1200 mm 36 G2 G2

36 G1 G1 G1 G1 Yb
Bar No. Area No. Y-Dist ATOT ATOT * Y 60
G1 1017.9 4 78 4071.504 317577
G2 1017.9 2 114 2035.752 232076 400
G3 1017.9 4 180 4071.50 732871
10179 1282524

ATOT * Y 1,282,524
Rebar centroid from bottom = = = 126 mm
ATOT 10,179

Rebar centroid from top = 1200 - 126 = 1074 mm

Effective width of deck, b eff = Minimum of the following :

12 ts + bw = 2800 mm beff
Span /4 = 3750 mm
Controls Spacing = 2400 mm

The rectangular stress block is calculated as,

As fy (10,179) (275.80)
a = = = 66.5 mm < ts
0.85 f'c beff 0.85 (20.70) (2,400)

Moment Capacity

0.9 (10,179) (275.80) 1074 - 66.5 / 2

Mu = As fy (d - a/2) = 6
10

= 2,629.6 KN-m

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

189
RCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 4 OF 12

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES
C.1.1 MOMENT CAPACITY AT PIER

Total area of steel ( 36 mm rebar)

2 2
As = 13 x ( π /4 x 28 ) = 8,005 mm 49
28 Slab
Centroid of rebar from top of deck 200
G1
Total Girder Depth = TSLAB + Girder Depth
= 200 + 1000
= 1200 mm

Bar No. Area No. Y-Dist ATOT ATOT * Y

G1 615.8 13 63 8005.4 504340 Web 400
8005 504340

ATOT * Y 504,340
Rebar centroid from bottom = = = 63 mm
ATOT 8,005

Rebar centroid from top = 1200 - 63 = 1137 mm

Effective width of girder, b eff = 400 mm

The rectangular stress block is calculated as,

As fy (8,005) (275.80)
a = = = 313.7 mm < ts
0.85 f'c beff 0.85 (20.70) (0,400)

Moment Capacity

0.9 (8,005) (275.80) 1137 - 313.7 / 2

Mu = As fy (d - a/2) = 6
10
= 1,947.6 KN-m

C.1.2 SHEAR CAPACITY AT SUPPORT

The AASHTO Design Specification requires that the design shear be taken at a distance "d" from
the support. However, shear at support may be used conservatively.
In the absence of data, the standard reinforcement for a 10.0m span under DPWH
standards had been used.

The shear capacity of the concrete section

Vc = 0.167 Sqrt(f'c) b d = 0.167 Sqrt (20.70) (400) (1137)

= 345.6 KN ==>> Full Capacity

The shear capacity of the shear reinforcement

Stirrups :
Vs = 2 Av fy deff / S = 2 (201.1) (275.80) (1137) / 150 D16mm
= 840.7 KN ==>> Full Capacity A = 201.1 mm2

The total shear capacity becomes

Vu = (Vc + Vs) = 0.85 (345.6 + 840.7)

= 1008.3 KN
RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

190
RCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 5 OF 12

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES

C.2 LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

The manual provides the rating factor to be calculated using the Load Factor Method (LFM)
by the formula:

Rn - DD where: => L = 2.17 (Inventory) This Manual

RF =
LL (1 + I) => L = 1.30 (Operating) Eq. 3.2-4
=> L = 2.17 (Posting)

By substituting the factors and the load effects to the equation, the moment and shear rating
of the interior girder can be estimated as presented below.

RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (LFM)

LOCATION DESCRIPTION INVENTORY RATING This Manual
2,629.6 - 1.30 (496.7) Eq. 3.2-4
= 1.70
2.17 (536.3)
Midspan Moment OPERATING RATING
2,629.6 - 1.30 (496.7)
= 2.85
1.3 (536.3)
LOCATION DESCRIPTION INVENTORY RATING This Manual
1,947.6 - 1.30 (620.1) Eq. 3.2-4
= 1.26
2.17 (416.4)
Moment OPERATING RATING
1,947.6 - 1.30 (620.1)
= 2.11
1.3 (416.4)
At Support DESCRIPTION INVENTORY RATING
1,008.3 - 1.30 (248.2)
= 0.94
2.17 (334.5)
Shear OPERATING RATING
1,008.3 - 1.30 (248.2)
= 1.58
1.3 (334.5)

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS (LFM)

(Rating Live Load = MS18, W = 33 Metric Tons)
Location Description Inventory Rating (Tons) Operating Rating (Tons) This Manual
Eq. 3.1-5
Midspan Moment 1.70 x 33 = 56.3 2.85 x 33 = 93.9

At Support Moment 1.26 x 33 = 41.7 2.11 x 33 = 69.6

At Support Shear 0.94 x 33 = 31.2 1.58 x 33 = 52.0

Since the Inventory Rating MLR = 41.7 metric tons and VLR = 31.2 metric tons are less
than the total weight of MS18 truck = 33 metric tons, load posting the bridge is necessary

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

191
RCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 6 OF 12

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES

D. LOAD POSTING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)

The procedure for load posting is similar to the above using load posting vehicles for live load.

D.1 DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

The live load moments and shears can be separately taken from conducting a structural analysis
corresponding to Types 1-1, 1-2 and 12-2 Posting Vehicles.

For 3-span continuous ([email protected]) bridge, the Posting Live Load demands are:

Vehicle Type LL Demand At Midspan At Pier Support

Moment 382.8 -205.0
Type 1-1
Shear --- -130.0
Moment 492.6 -303.4
Type 1-2
Shear --- -188.1
Moment 450.5 -392.6
Type 12-2
Shear --- -201.1

Similar calculations are done using Eqs. 3.2-4 and 3.1-5 for rating factor and load rating

LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS BY LFM

AT MIDSPAN
Vehicle INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING POSTING
Vehicle Type Weight Moment Shear Moment Shear (Metric
(Metric Tons)
RF LR RF LR RF LR RF LR Tons)

MS18 33.0 1.70 56.3 --- --- 2.85 93.9 --- --- 33

Type 1-1 17.0 2.39 40.6 --- --- 3.99 67.8 --- --- 17

Type 1-2 27.0 1.86 50.1 --- --- 3.10 83.6 --- --- 27

Type 12-2 38.0 2.03 77.1 --- --- 3.39 128.7 --- --- 38

LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS BY LFM

AT PIER SUPPORT
Vehicle
INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING POSTING
Vehicle Type Weight Moment Shear Moment Shear (Metric
(Metric Tons)
RF LR RF LR RF LR RF LR Tons)

MS18 33.0 1.26 41.7 0.94 31.2 2.11 69.6 1.58 52.0 31

Type 1-1 17.0 2.57 43.6 2.43 41.3 4.28 72.8 4.06 69.0 17

Type 1-2 27.0 1.73 46.8 1.68 45.4 2.89 78.1 2.80 75.7 27

Type 12-2 38.0 1.34 50.9 1.57 59.7 2.24 85.0 2.62 99.7 38

RATED BY : EAB DATE : 1900/1/0 0:00 CHECKED BY : JCS DATE :

192
RCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 7 OF 12

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES

E. LOAD RATING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD

E1. MOMENT AND SHEAR CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

MOMENT CAPACITY CALCULATIONS AT MIDSPAN

The concrete and rebar allowable stresses are as noted in the plans as follows:

Concrete : fc = 8.3 Mpa

Rebar : fs = 137.9 Mpa <== Inventory
fs = 193.1 Mpa <== Operating

When the neutral axis is within the slab, the rectangular beam formulation can be used

2
As = 10,179 mm

d = 1,074 mm

bef = 2,400 mm

ρ = As / bd = 0.00395

n = Es / Ec = 12 MCEB
Sect. 6.6.2.4

Assume neutral axis (N.A.) is within slab and solving for the neutral axis position

2
k = 2ρ n+(ρ n) - ρ n

2
= 2 (0.00395)(12) + [0.00395((12)] - (0.00395)(12)

k = 0.2641 kd = 0.2641 x 1074 = 283.6 mm

j = 1 - k/3 = 0.9120

Using k = 0.2641, kd = 283.6mm > ts = 180mm, therefore N.A. lies below

the slab and into the web. Therefore, the capacity will be calculated
based on the N.A. below the slab. The neutral axis depth, kd is
calculated by summing moments at the top of the slab:

n As d + 1/2 b ts2 + bw y (y/2 + ts)

kd = ts + y =
nAs + b ts + bw y

2
(12)(10,179)(1074) + 1/2(2400)(200) + (400)y ( y/2 + 200 )
=
(12)(10,179) + (2400)(200) + (400) y

2
200 y +80,000y + 179,186,952
= = 200 + y ===> y = 94.6 mm
400y + 602,148

k = kd / d = 294.6 / 1074 = 0.2743

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

193
RCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 8 OF 12

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES
The compression zone resultant force (C) & location (z) is calculated as

Z
C3
Slab C
C2
ts = 180

294.6
C1

94.6
Girder Web

Magnitude Dist. From top Moment

C1 15.19 231.54 3517.14 Z = 14465.53 / 147.31 = 98.20mm
C2 64.23 100 6422.58
C3 67.89 66.67 4525.81
147.31 14465.53

Therefore, jd = d - Z
= 1074 - 98.20 = 975.8 mm

If concrete allowable stress controls, the capacity becomes:

At Inventory Level
Mc = ( bw C1 + bef C2 + bef C3 ) fc jd
= [ {(400)(15.19) + (2,400) (64.23) + (2,400)(67.89)}(8.3)(975.8) ] / (10-6)
= 2,617.2 kN-m <<== Not governing since Mc > Ms

At Operating Level
Mc = ( bw C1 + bef C2 + bef C3 ) fc jd
= [ {(400)(15.19) + (2,400) (64.23) + (2,400)(67.89)}(13.1)(975.8) ] / (10-6)
= 4,130.8 kN-m <<== Not governing since Mc > Ms

If rebar allowable stress controls, the capacity becomes,

At Inventory Level At Operating Level

Ms = As fs jd Ms = As fs jd
= (10,179)(137.9)(975.80) = (10,179)(193.1)(975.80)
= 1,369.70 kN-m = 1,918.00 kN-m

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

194
RCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 9 OF 12

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES

MOMENT CAPACITY CALCULATIONS AT PIER SUPPORT

The concrete and rebar allowable stresses are as noted in the plans as follows:

Concrete : fc = 8.3 Mpa

Rebar : fs = 137.9 Mpa <== Inventory
fs = 193.1 Mpa <== Operating

When the neutral axis is within the slab, the rectangular beam formulation can be used

2
As = 8,005 mm

d = 1,137 mm

bef = 400 mm

ρ = As / bd = 0.01760

n = Es / Ec = 12 MCEB
Sect. 6.6.2.4

Assume neutral axis (N.A.) is within slab and solving for the neutral axis position

2
k = 2ρ n+(ρ n) - ρ n

2
= 2 (0.01760)(12) + [0.01760((12)] - (0.01760)(12)

k = 0.4722 kd = (0.4722)(1137) = 536.9 mm

j = 1 - k/3 = 0.8426 jd = (0.8426)(1137) = 958.0 mm

Using k = 0.4722, kd = 536.9mm < ts = 1000mm,

Therefore, the capacity will be calculated based on the N.A. .
The neutral axis depth, kd is calculated by summing moments at the bottom of the girder:

The compression zone resultant force (C) & location (z) is calculated as

C Z
536.9
Web Z = 536.9 / 3 = 178.96 mm
height = 1000
C = 1/2 (536.9) = 268.45
463.1

Therefore, jd = d - Z
= 1,137 - 178.96 = 958.04 mm

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

195
RCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 10 OF 12

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG CONTINUOUS

If concrete allowable stress controls, the capacity becomes:

At Inventory Level At Operating Level

Mc = - ( be x C x fc x jd ) Mc = - ( be x C x fc x jd )
-6
= - (400)(268.45)(8.3)(958.04)(10 ) = - (400)(268.45)(13.1)(958.04)(10-6)
= - 853.8 kN-m = - 1,347.6 kN-m
<<== Governing since Mc < Ms
If rebar allowable stress controls, the capacity becomes,

At Inventory Level At Operating Level

Ms = - As fs jd Ms = - As fs jd
= - (8,005)(137.9)(958.04) = - (8,005)(193.1)(958.04)
= -1,057.60 kN-m = -1,480.90 kN-m

SHEAR CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

The conditions for shear capacity calculations is the same as that previously calculated.

The shear capacity due to concrete section:

At Inventory Level
Vc = 0.08 fc bw d = 0.08 (20.7) (400) (1,137) = 165.50
==>> full concrete capacity

At Operating Level
Vc = 0.12 fc bw d = 0.12 (20.7) (400) (1,137) = 248.30
==>> full concrete capacity

The shear capacity due to shear reinforcement:

At Inventory Level
Vs = 2 Av fs ds / S = 2(201.1)(137.9)(1,137)/150
= 420.3 kN

At Operating Level
Vs = 2 Av fs ds / S = 2(201.1)(193.1)(1,137)/150
= 588.6 kN

The total shear capacity becomes:

At Inventory Level
Vu = Vc + Vs = 165.5 + 420.3
= 585.9 kN

At Operating Level
Vu = Vc + Vs = 248.3 + 588.6
= 836.9 kN

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

196
RCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 11 OF 12

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES

E2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

The Manual provides the rating factor to be calculated using the

Allowable Stress Method (ASM) by the formula:

R - A1 D where A1 = 1.0
RF =
A2 L ( 1 + I ) A2 = 1.0

RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (ASM)

LOCATION DESCRIPTION INVENTORY RATING
1,369.7 - (496.7)
= 1.63
(536.3)
Midspan OPERATING RATING
1,918.0 - (496.7)
= 2.65
(536.3)
Moment INVENTORY RATING
-853.8 - -(620.1)
= 0.56
-(416.4)
At Support
OPERATING RATING
-1,347.6 - -(620.1)
= 1.75
-(416.4)
LOCATION DESCRIPTION INVENTORY RATING
-585.9 - -(248.2)
= 1.01
-(334.5)
At Support Shear OPERATING RATING
-836.9 - -(248.2)
= 1.76
-(334.5)

Since the Inventory Rating Factor MRF = 0.56 and VRF = 1.01
are less than one, load posting calculations is necessary.

F. LOAD POSTING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD

The procedure for load posting is similar to the above using load posting vehicles for live load
and the demand moments and shears as calculated in the previous Section D, as follows:

LL Demand
Vehicle
Moment (KN-m) Shear (KN)
Type
At Midspan At Pier Support At Pier Support

Type 1-1 382.8 -205.0 -130.0

Type 1-2 492.6 -303.4 -188.1

Type 12-2 450.5 -392.6 -201.1

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

197
RCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 12 OF 12

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES
Similarly, using Eq. 3.2-1 and Eq. 3.1-5, load posting calculations are presented below

LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS BY ASM

AT MIDSPAN
Vehicle
INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING POSTING
Vehicle Type Weight Moment Shear Moment Shear (Metric
(Metric Tons)
RF LR RF LR RF LR RF LR Tons)

MS18 33.0 1.63 53.7 --- --- 2.65 87.5 --- --- 33
Type 1-1 17.0 2.28 38.8 --- --- 3.71 63.1 --- --- 17
Type 1-2 27.0 1.77 47.9 --- --- 2.89 77.9 --- --- 27
Type 12-2 38.0 1.94 73.6 --- --- 3.15 119.9 --- --- 38

LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS BY ASM

AT PIER SUPPORT
Vehicle
INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING POSTING
Vehicle Type Weight Moment Shear Moment Shear (Metric
(Metric Tons)
RF LR RF LR RF LR RF LR Tons)

MS18 33.0 0.56 18.5 1.01 33.3 1.75 57.7 1.76 58.1 18
Type 1-1 17.0 1.14 19.4 2.60 44.2 3.55 60.3 4.53 77.0 17
Type 1-2 27.0 0.77 20.8 1.80 48.5 2.40 64.7 3.13 84.5 21
Type 12-2 38.0 0.60 22.6 1.68 63.8 1.85 70.4 2.93 111.2 23

The summary of calculation results for both the load factor and the allowable stress methods
are presented below.

SUMMARY OF RESULTS FOR LOAD POSTING

Vehicle
Allowable Stress (ASM) Load Factor (LFM) POSTING
Vehicle Type Weight Rating Load Rating Load (Metric
(Metric Tons)
Factor Rating Factor Rating Tons)

MS18 33.0 0.56 18.5 0.94 31.2 18

Type 1-1 17.0 1.14 19.4 2.38 40.6 17
Type 1-2 27.0 0.77 20.8 1.68 45.4 21
Type 12-2 38.0 0.60 22.6 1.34 50.9 23

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

198
 EXAMPLE 3
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
DECK GIRDER BRIDGE

Example 3-1: Simple

Example 3-2: Continuous

199
PCDG SIMPLE Computer Based Calculation

INTERIOR PCDG SIMPLE

A. GENERAL BACK TO MENU

A1. BRIDGE DESCRIPTION

Bridge Location REGION
Bridge Name
Bridge Simple or Continuous S Precast, Prestressed I Girder Bridge
Type Number of Span 1
Bridge Width (curb to curb) (m) 7.32
Number of Lanes 2
Bridge Length (m) 35.000 =35.000 m
Year Built 2003
Nos. of Girder 4
Structure Girder Spacing (m) 2.100 on centers
Substructure Concrete bents and abutments
Wearing thickness (mm) 50
Course material Asphalt
f'c (Girder) 38 MPa
f'c (Slab) 24.2 MPa
Ultimate Strength of Tendons fu 1860 MPa
Notes on Plans
Working Force 5270 kN (Effective after losses)
100 mm (from soffit at Midspan)
Centroid of PC Tendons
824 mm (from soffit at Anchorage)
Weight of barrier rail Wbr = 13.0 KN/m
fy (Reinforcing Bars) 415 Mpa
Assumption
Concrete Unit Weight Wu = 24.0 KN/m3
Asphalt Unit Weight Wa = 22.0 KN/m3
Others Rating Live Load is AASHTO MS18 (HS20-44)

NEXT

Year of fc or fs
Material f'c or fy
Construction Inventory Operating Posting
Prior to 1959 17.2 6.9 10.3 6.9
after 1959 20.7 8.3 13.1 8.3
Concrete
1977 to 1981 27.6 11.0 16.5 11.0 *pc
after 1981 31.0 12.4 18.6 12.4 *pc
Prior to 1954 227.5 124.1 172.4 124.1
after 1954 275.8 137.9 193.1 137.9
Rebar
Grade 50 344.7 137.9 224.1 137.9 *pc
Grade 60 413.7 165.5 248.2 165.5 *pc

INTERIOR PCDG SIMPLE

200 Sheet 1: GENERAL
A2. BRIDGE LAYOUT AND DIMENSION
A1 A2
35.00 m

BRIDGE ELEVATION

SUPERSTRUCTURE CROSS SECTION

GIRDER SECTION
Girder Height 1.600
Dimension b h
Slab 2.100 0.2 *1.00 (Modulas Ratio)
1.067 0.127
0.330 0.076
Uflg
0.102 0.076
0.102 0.102
Web 0.203 1.270
0.254 0.254
Lflg
0.711 0.203

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG SIMPLE

201 Sheet 2: LAYOUT
B. DEMAND FORCES
B1. DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

B1.1 INPUT
Area of Girder (m2) 0.645
Span Length (m) 35.0
Composite Girder Height (m) 1.800
FOR Girder Height (m) 1.600
DEAD Slab thickness (m) 0.200
LOAD Slab Spacing (m) 2.100
Weight of Diaphram (kN/m) 1.5
Weight of Barrier Rail (kN/m) 13
Number of Girder (nos.) 4

B1.2 DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

Self-weight of Girder 15.49
Slab weight 10.08
Weight of Diaphram 1.50
Uniform Load
Barrier Rail 6.50
per meter of Girder
(KN/m) Asphalt Overlay 2.31
Total 35.88
Total of Dead Load 27.07
Total of Superimposed Dead Load 8.81
Dead Load Moment at Midspan MDL(kN-m) 4145.0
Superimposed Dead Load Moment at Midspan MSDL (kN-m) 1349.0
Dead Load Shear at Support VDL (kN) 473.7
Superimposed Dead Load Shear at Support VSDL (kN) 154.2

B2. LIVE LOAD CALCULATIONS

B2. LIVE-LOAD CALCULATIONS

LIVE-LOAD Type MS18(HS20)
Number of live load wheel line 1.148
INPUT FOR LIVE LOAD
Impact factor 0.209
span 35.00
without Impact ML 1227.9
Max.MS18 moment for 35.00m span /wheel line
with Impact MLL 1704.1
Max.MS18 shear at a distance "d" without Impact VL 148.8
from the support/wheel line with Impact VLL 206.6

B2. FORCE DEMAND CALCULATIONS

Moment Shear
Description
C (0.5L) At Support
Dead load (kN-m) 4145.0 473.7
Superimposed Dead load (kN-m) 1349.0 154.2
MS18 moment with Impact (kN-m) 1704.1 206.6

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG SIMPLE

202 Sheet 3: DFDLLL
 B3. SECTION PROPERTIES CALCULATION
Load Condition A (m2) Iz (m4) Yb (m) Yt (m) Yt slab (m)
For Dead Loads 0.645 0.214 0.804 0.796 NA
For Superposed Dead Load and Live Loads 1.065 0.419 1.157 0.443 0.643

B4. STRESS CALCULATIONS

(1) Stress at Midspan

Stresses in the PCI Girder (Mpa)
Loading Top Concrete Bottom Concrete Centroid of
Fiber Fiber Composite
Dead Load (Self + Slab) 15.44 -15.61 6.85
Prestress (Pef=5270kN) -5.66 22.14 2.03
Superimposed Dead Load 1.42 -3.73 0.00
Live Load 1.80 -4.71 0.00

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG SIMPLE

203 Sheet 4: DSC
C2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

C2.1 LOAD RATING BASED ON SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE

(1) USING COMPRESSIVE STRESS
For Strength Factor 0.6
For Strength Factor 0.4
For Dead Load Factor 0.5
Concrete Compressive Stress 38
Dead Load Stress 16.87
Prestress after all losses -5.66
Secondary Prestress 0.00
Live Load stresses including Impact 1.80
Using Compressive Stress Under All Load Combination 6.44
Using Compressive Stress Under Live Load 5.33
(2) USING ALLOWABLE TENSION STRESS
Dead Load Stress -19.33
Prestress after all losses 22.14
Secondary Prestress 0.00
Live Load stresses including Impact -4.71
Using the Allowable Tension in Concrete 1.25

C2.2 LOAD RATING BASED ON STRENGTH LIMIT STATE

Dead Load Factor 1.3
Inventory 2.17
Live Load factors
Operating 1.3
Section C (at Midspan Section B (Support)
Moment Shear
Moment and Shear Capacity 12006.6 1489.4
Moment and Shear due to Dead Load 4145.0 473.7
Moment and Shear due to Superimposed Dead Load 1349.0 154.2
Moment and Shear due to Live Load 1704.1 206.6

C2.3 LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

Moment Shear
Description
Inventory Operating Inventory Operating
Rating Factor 1.32 2.20 1.50 2.51
Rating Live Load (MS18) (Metic Tons) 33.0
Load Rating Calculations 43.4 72.5 49.6 82.7

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG SIMPLE

204 Sheet 6: LRC
C. LOAD RATING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)
C1. CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

C1.1 MOMENT CAPACITY at MIDSPAN

Assumed total prestressing loss σLOSS (Mpa) 158.1
Ultimate Strength of Tendons fu (Mpa) 1860
Web Width bw (mm) 203
Φ 1.00
2
Prestressing Steel Area As* (mm ) 4261
Section Loss (%) 0
Total Assumed Area of Steel As(mm2) 4261
Effective width of deck , beff (mm) 2100
Centroid of Prestressing Steel from top of deck , d (mm) 1700
Yield Strength of Tendons fy (Mpa) 1570
k=2(1.04-fy/fu) 0.39 cinput
Neutral axis location (mm) 231.2 231.2
Moment Capacity at Midspan R (kN-m) 12007

C1.2 SHEAR CAPACITY at SUPPORT

Web Width bw (mm) 203
Depth of Shear Cracks (mm) 0
The Reduction Factor due to Shear Cracks 1.00
Diameter of Stirrups (mm) 12
2
Area of Stirrups Φs (mm ) 113.1
Spacing of Stirrups (mm) 200
Section Loss due to Stirrups Exposure (%) 0
Total Assumed Area of Steel As(mm2) 113.1
Nominal Shear Capacity Factor　Φc 0.85
Nominal Shear Strength provided by concrete Vc (kN) 109.5
Nominal Shear Strength provided by Rebar Vs (kN) 1642.7
Shear Capacity Vu 1489.4

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG SIMPLE

205 Sheet 5: CCMS
 C2.3 SUMMARY OF RATING FACTOR AND LOAD RATING
At Midspan At Support
Weight of Vehicle (Metric Tons) 33
RF LR RF LR
All Load 6.44 212.6 - -
Serviceability Compression
Rating Live Load 5.33 176.0 - -
Limit State
Factor Allowable Tension 1.25 41.3 - -
and Inventory 1.32 43.4 - -
Moment
Load Operating 2.20 72.5 - -
Rating Strength Limit State
Inventory - - 1.50 49.6
Shear
Operating - - 2.51 82.7
Minimum Rating Factor and Load Rating 1.25 41.3 1.50 49.6

Depend on the minimum value of Rating Factor > 1 or <1 ,

instruction in the below cell is automatically shown
Return to GENERAL

Click following the above instruction

Return to GENERAL

Load Posting

INTERIOR PCDG SIMPLE

206 Sheet 7: LRSUM
D. LOAD POSTING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)

D1. DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

D1.1 DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

(1) POSTING VEHICLE Type 1-1
LIVE-LOAD Type Type1-1
Number of live load wheel line 1.148
Impact factor 0.209
span 35.00
without Impact ML 695.45
Type 1-1 moment for 35.00m span /wheel line
with Impact MLL 965.19
Type 1-1 shear at a distance "d" without Impact VL 81.46
from the support/wheel line with Impact VLL 113.06
(2) POSTING VEHICLE Type 1-2
LIVE-LOAD Type Type1-2
without Impact ML 1036.00
Type 1-2 moment for 35.00m span /wheel line
with Impact MLL 1437.83
Type 1-2 shear at a distance "d" without Impact VL 123.91
from the support/wheel line with Impact VLL 171.97
(3) POSTING VEHICLE Type 12-2
LIVE-LOAD Type Type12-2
without Impact ML 1261.27
Type 12-2 moment for 35.00m span /wheel line
with Impact MLL 1750.48
Type 12-2 shear at a distance "d" without Impact VL 156.27
from the support/wheel line with Impact VLL 216.88

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG SIMPLE

207 Sheet 8: POSTLL
D2. POSTING RATING CALCULATIONS

D2.1 POSTING RATING BASED ON SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE

(1) USING COMPRESSIVE STRESS
Description At Midspan At Support
For Strength Factor 0.6
For Strength Factor 0.4
For Dead Load Factor 0.5
Concrete Compressive Stress 38
Dead Load Stress 16.87 -
Prestress after all losses -5.66 -
Secondary Prestress 0.00 -
Type 1-1 1.02 -
Live Load stresses including Impact Type 1-2 1.52 -
Type 12-2 1.85 -
Type 1-1 11.37 -
Using Compressive Stress
Type 1-2 7.64 -
Under All Load Combination
Type 12-2 6.27 -
Type 1-1 9.42 -
Using Compressive Stress of Live Load Type 1-2 6.32 -
Type 12-2 5.19 -
(2) USING ALLOWABLE TENSION STRESS
Dead Load Stress -19.33 -
Prestress after all losses 22.14 -
Secondary Prestress 0.00 -
Type 1-1 -2.67 -
Live Load stresses including Impact Type 1-2 -3.97 -
Type 12-2 -4.83 -
Type 1-1 2.21 -
Using the Allowable Tension in Concrete Type 1-2 1.48 -
Type 12-2 1.22 -

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG SIMPLE

208 Sheet 9: POSTLR1
D3. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

D3.1 POSTING RATING BASED ON STRENGTH LIMIT STATE

Dead Load Factor 1.3
Inventory 2.17
Live Load factors
Operating 1.3
Description Moment at Midspan Shear at Support
Moment and Shear Capacity 12007 1489
Moment and Shear due to Dead Load 4145.0 473.7
Moment and Shear due to Superimposed Dead Load 1349.0 154.2
Type 1-1 965.2 113.1
Moment and Shear due to Live Load Type 1-2 1437.8 172.0
Type 12-2 1750.5 216.9

D3.2 POSTING RATING CALCULATIONS

Moment at Midspan Shear at Support
Description
Inventory Operating Inventory Operating
Type 1-1 2.32 3.88 2.74 4.58
Rating Factor Type 1-2 1.56 2.60 1.80 3.01
Type 12-2 1.28 2.14 1.43 2.39
Type 1-1 17.0
Postting Live Load
Weight of vehicle Type 1-2 27.0
(Metic Tons)
Type 12-2 38.0
Type 1-1 39.5 65.9 46.6 77.9
Load Rating Calculations Type 1-2 26.5 70.3 30.7 81.3
Type 12-2 21.8 81.2 24.3 90.7

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG SIMPLE

209 Sheet 10: POSTLR2
 D3.3 SUMMARY OF POSTING RATING FACTOR AND LOAD RATING
At Midspan At Support
RF LR RF LR
(1) POSTING VEHICLE TYPE 1-1 Weight of Vehicle 17 (Metoric Tons)
All Load 11.37 193.4 - -
Serviceability Compression
Rating Live Load 9.42 160.1 - -
Limit State
Factor Allowable Tension 2.21 37.6 - -
and Inventory 2.32 39.5 - -
Moment
Load Operating 3.88 65.9 - -
Strength Limit State
Rating Inventory - - 2.74 46.6
Shear
Operating - - 4.58 77.9
Minimum Rating Factor and Load Rating 2.21 37.6 2.74 46.6
(2) POSTING VEHICLE TYPE 1-2 Weight of Vehicle 27 (Metoric Tons)
All Load 7.64 206.2 - -
Serviceability Compression
Rating Live Load 6.32 170.7 - -
Limit State
Factor Allowable Tension 1.48 40.1 - -
and Inventory 1.56 42.1 - -
Moment
Load Operating 2.60 70.3 - -
Strength Limit State
Rating Inventory - - 1.80 48.7
Shear
Operating - - 3.01 81.3
Minimum Rating Factor and Load Rating 1.48 40.1 1.80 48.7
(3) POSTING VEHICLE TYPE 12-2 Weight of Vehicle 38 (Metoric Tons)
All Load 6.27 238.3 - -
Serviceability Compression
Rating Live Load 5.19 197.3 - -
Limit State
Factor Allowable Tension 1.22 46.3 - -
and Inventory 1.28 48.7 - -
Moment
Load Operating 2.14 81.2 - -
Strength Limit State
Rating Inventory - - 1.43 54.4
Shear
Operating - - 2.39 90.7
Minimum Rating Factor and Load Rating 1.22 46.3 1.43 54.4

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG SIMPLE

210 Sheet 11: POSTSUM
E. SUMMARY OF LOAD POSTING

SUMMARY OF RESULTS FOR LOAD POSTING

Vehicle AT MIDSPAN AT SUPPORT
Load
Vehicle Weight
Rating Load Rating Load Posting
Type (Metric
Factor Rating Factor Rating (Tons)
Tons)
MS18 33.0 1.25 41.3 1.50 49.6 33T
Type 1-1 17.0 2.21 37.6 2.74 46.6 17T
Type 1-2 27.0 1.48 40.1 1.80 48.7 27T
Type 12-2 38.0 1.22 46.3 1.43 54.4 38T

LOAD

17T

27T
38T

END AND GO TO DECK SLAB

INTERIOR PCDG SIMPLE

211 Sheet 12: SUMMARY
PCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 1 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG SIMPLE

A. GENERAL
A.1 BRIDGE DESCRIPTION

Bridge Location : None (Sample)

Bridge Type : Simple-span Precast, Prestressed I Girder Bridge
Br. Width / No. of Lanes : 7.32m curb to curb / Two-lanes
Bridge Length : 35.00m
Year Built : 2003
Structure
Girders : Precast, Prestressed I Girder Bridge (4-Girders), Monolithic with deck slab
: Girder spacing at 2.10m on center
Substructure : RC Cantilever Abutments
Wearing Course : 50mm thick Asphalt Overlay
Material Properties : f'c = 38 Mpa (Girder) , 24.2 Mpa (Slab)
: fu = 1860 Mpa , Workinf Force: 5270.0 kN (effective after losses)
: Centroid of PS Tendons: 100 mm from soffit @ midspan, 824mm at Anchorage
Assumption : Weight of barrier rail = 13.0 KN/m
: fy (reinforcing bars) = 415 Mpa
3
: Concrete unit weight = 24.0 KN/m
3
: Asphalt unit weight = 22.0 KN/m
Others : Rating Live Load is AASHTO MS18 (HS20-44)
Reqirement :
Determine the load rating of the interior girder of the span (35.0m) for MS18 (HS20)
vehicles considering damages on members

A.2 BRIDGE LAYOUT

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

212
PCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 2 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG SIMPLE

NOTES

B. DEMAND FORCES
B.1 DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

The dead loads considered in the calculations include (1) Girder self-weight, (2) Fillet/haunch,
(3) Tributary area of slab, (4) Barrier rails (Assumed to be equally distributed among girders).
(5) Wearing course.

3
Self-weight of girder = (0.6454m2) (24 KN/m ) = 15.49 KN/m
3
Slab Weight (Tributary) = (0.20m) (2.10m) (24 KN/m ) = 10.08 KN/m
Weight of Diaphram = = 1.50 KN/m
Barrier rail = 2 (13.0/4) = 6.50 KN/m
Wearing course = (0.05m) (2.10m) (22 KN/m3) = 2.31 KN/m
Total Uniform Load of Interior Girder, w = 35.88 KN/m
Total Uniform Dead Load of Girder, wDL = 27.07 KN/m
Total Uniform Superimposed Dead Load of Girder, wSDL = 8.81 KN/m

2
Dead Load Moment at Midspan, MDL = 27.07 x 35.00 /8 = 4145.0 KN-m Md = wL2/8

2
Superimposed Dead Load Moment = 8.81 x 35.00 /8 = 1349.0 KN-m
at Midspan, MSDL

Dead Load Shear at support, VDL = 27.07 x 35.00 /2 = 473.7 KN Vd = wL/2

Superimposed Dead Load Shear at support, VSDL = 8.81 x 35.00 / 2 = 154.2 KN

WDL = 27.07 kN/m WSDL = 8.81 kN/m

35.00 m

B.2 LIVE LOAD CALCULATIONS

The carriageway width is 7.32m curb to curb. AASHTO specifies a clear lane width of 5.4m, thus Manual 1st Ed.
the deck shall carry two-lanes. Sect 3.4.2

The distribution of wheel loads for two traffic lanes for T-beams shall be taken as S/1.829 DPWH
Table 3-4
Number of live load wheel line = 2.10 / 1.829 = 1.148 AASHTO
Table 3.23.1
(S/6 in ft.)

Impact factor, I = 15.24 / (35.00 + 38.00) = 0.209 DPWH

Sect. 3.2.5.1

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

213
PCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 3 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG SIMPLE

NOTES
The live load moments and shear values are taken from the tables in Appendix III on this manual
and are used to determine the live load demand. Interpolation may be used if values are not exact

Max. MS18 moment for 35.00 m = 1227.9 KN-m

span without impact/whel line

Thus, MS18 moment with MLL = (1.148) (1.209) (1227.90) = 1704.1 KN-m
Impact at midspan

Max. MS18 shear at support/wheel line = 148.8 KN

Thus, MS18 shear VLL = (1.148) (1.209) (148.80) = 206.6 KN

LOAD DEMANDS ON DIFFERENT SECTIONS OF CONCRETE I GIRDER

ESTIMATED LOAD DEMANDS AT GIRDER SECTIONS (MS18)

Moment (kN-m) Shear (kN)

LOADING
At Midspan At Support
Dead load 4145.0 473.7
Superimposed Dead load 1349.0 154.2
Live Load + Impact 1704.1 206.6

B.3 SECTION PROPERTIES CALCULATION

The section properties of the prestressed concrete I-girder including that for
the composite girder are calculated and given in thetable below:

Moment of
Area Ybot Girder Ytop Girder Ytop Slab
Description 2 Inertia
(m ) 4 (m) (m) (m)
(m )
For Dead Load 0.645 0.214 0.804 0.796 NA
For (SDL) and (LL+I) 1.065 0.419 1.157 0.443 0.643

B.4 LOAD STRESS CALCULATIONS

The stresses at different fiber locations are calculated using

P Mc
σ = +
A y/I

The summary of results at Midspan are shown in the table below.

Estimated Stress Demands at Girder Sections

Stresses in the PCI Girder (Mpa)
LOADING Top Concrete Bottom Concrete Centroid of
Fiber Fiber Composite
Dead Load (Self + Slab) 15.44 -15.61 6.85
Prestress (Pef = 5270 kN) -5.66 22.14 2.03
Superimposed Dead Load 1.42 -3.73 0.00
Live Load 1.80 -4.71 0.00

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

214
PCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 4 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG SIMPLE

NOTES
Stresses due to Dead Load
Top Concrete Fiber = 4,145.0 x 0.796 / 0.214 / 1000 = 15.44 Mpa
Bottom Concrete Fiber = 4,145.0 x (-0.804) / 0.214 / 1000 = -15.61Mpa
Centroid of Composite = 15.44 - (15.44 - ( - 15.61) x ( 0.443 / 1.600 ) = 6.85 Mpa

Stresses due to Prestress

Top Concrete Fiber = ( 5270 / 0.645 - 5270 x ( 0.804 - 0.100 ) x 0.796 / 0.214 ) / 1000
= -5.66 Mpa
Bottom Concrete Fiber = ( 5270 / 0.645 + 5270 x ( 0.804 - 0.100 ) x 0.804 / 0.214 ) / 1000
= 22.14 Mpa
Centroid of Composite = -5.66 - (-5.66-22.14) x (0.443/1.6) = 2.03 Mpa

Stresses due to Superimposed Dead Load

Top Concrete Fiber = 1,349.0 x 0.443 / 0.419 / 1000 = 1.42 Mpa
Bottom Concrete Fiber = 1,349.0 x ( -1.157 ) / 0.419 / 1000 = -3.73 Mpa
Centroid of Composite = 1.42 - (1.42 - ( - 3.73) x ( 0.443 / 1.600 ) = 0.00 Mpa

Stresses due to Live Load

Top Concrete Fiber = 1,704.1 x 0.443 / 0.419 / 1000 = 1.80 Mpa
Bottom Concrete Fiber = 1,704.1 x ( -1.157 ) / 0.419 / 1000 = -4.71 Mpa
Centroid of Composite = 1.80 - (1.80 - ( - 4.71) x ( 0.443 / 1.600 ) = 0.00 Mpa

200 Slab 15.44 -5.66 1.42 1.80

796
1800 N.A. of Girder
1600

804

PCI Girder

-15.61 22.14 -3.73 -4.71

Dead Load Prestress SDL Live Load

STRESSES AT SECTION C (MIDSPAN) OF GIRDER

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

215
PCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 5 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG SIMPLE

NOTES
C. LOAD RATING UNDER SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD (ASM)
AND UNDER STRENGTH LIMIT STATE BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)

C.1 CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

C.1.1 MOMENT CAPACITY AT MIDSPAN

The actual area of prestressing steel can be obtained from as-built plans.
However in the absence of as-built darwings, the following approach can be used.
Assume total loss including creep loss to be
σLOSS = 158.1 Mpa with fu(Tendons) = 1860.0 Mpa fy = 1570.0 Mpa

Therefore, Working Force 5270

= = x (1000)
Prestressing steel area Effective Stress ( 0.75 x 1860 - 158.1 )
2
= 4261 mm

beff = 2100 mm , ts = 200 mm , bw = 203 mm

dp = 1800 - 100 = 1700 mm , f'c (girder) = 38 Mpa , f'c (slab) = 24.2 Mpa

k = 2 x ( 1.04 - fy / fu ) = 2 x ( 1.04 - 1570.0 / 1860.0 ) = 0.39

β (girder) = 0.85 - 0.05 / 7 x ( f'c - 28 ) = 0.85 - 0.05 / 7 x ( 38 - 28 ) = 0.7786

[ in case of, 56 > f'c > 28 ==> β = 0.85 - 0.05 / 7 x ( f'c - 28 )]

β (slab) = 0.85 [ in case of, f'c < 28 ==> β = 0.85 ]

2
Ac (girder) = bw x ( N.A. - ts ) = 203 x ( 231.2 - 200 ) = 6,333.6 mm (N.A.: Neutral axis location)

2
Ac (slab) = beff x ts = 2100 x 200 = 420,000 mm

[ f'c (slab) x Ac (slab) x β (slab) + f'c (girder) x Ac (girder) x β (girder) ]

β (average) =
[ f'c (slab) x Ac (slab) + f'c (girder) x Ac (girder) ]

( 24.2 x 420,000 x 0.85 + 38 x 6333.6 x 0.7786 )

= = 0.848348
( 24.2 x 420,000 + 38 x 6333.6 )

Ap x fu
C (slab) =
[ 0.85 x f'c (slab) x β (slab) x beff + k x Ap x fu / dp ]

4,261 x 1,860
= = 205.6 mm
[ 0.85 x 24.2 x 0.85 x 2,100 + 0.39 x 4,261 x 1,860 / 1,700 ]

fps = fu x [ 1 - k x C (slab) / dp ] = 1,860 x [ 1 - 0.39 x 205.6 / 1,700 ] = 1771.9 Mpa

a = β (slab) x C (slab) = 0.85 x 205.6 = 174.8 mm

-6
S = Ap x fps x ( dp - a / 2 ) / 10 = 4,261x 1,771.9 x ( 1,700 - 174.8 / 2 ) / 10-6 = 12,174 kN-m

[ Ap x fu - 0.85 x ts x β (average) x { f'c (slab) x beff - f'c (girder) x bw } ]

C (girder) =
[ 0.85 x f'c (girder) x β (average) x bw + k x Ap x fu / dp ]

[ 4,261x 1,860 - 0.85 x 200 x 0.848348 x { 24.2 x 2,100 - 38 x 203 } ]

= = 231.2 mm
[ 0.85 x 38 x 0.848348 x 203 + 0.39 x 4,261 x 1,860 / 1,700 ]

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

216
PCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 6 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG SIMPLE

NOTES
fps = fu x [ 1 - k x C (girder) / dp ] = 1,860 x [ 1 - 0.39 x 231.2 / 1,700 ] = 1760.9 Mpa

a = β (average) x C (girder) = 0.848348 x 231.2 = 196.1 mm

S = [ Ap x fps x ( dp - a / 2 )
-6
+ 0.85 x β (average) x ( f'c (slab) x beff - f'c (girder) x bw ) x ts x ( a / 2 - ts / 2 ) } / 10
= 4,261x 1,760.9 x ( 1,700 - 196.1 / 2 )
-6
+ 0.85 x 0.848348 x ( 24.2 x 2,100 - 38 x 203 ) x 200 x ( 196.1 / 2 - 200 / 2 ) } / 10
= 12,007 kN-m <== Governing Moment Capacity ( < 12,174 kN-m )

C.1.2 SHEAR CAPACITY AT SUPPORT

The AASHTO Design Specification requires that the design shear be taken at a distance "d" from
the support. However, shear at support may be used conservatively.
In the absence of data, the standard reinforcement for a 35.0m span under DPWH
standards had been used.
The shear capacity of the concrete section

Vc = 0.05 Sqrt(f'c) b d = 0.05 [ Sqrt ( 38.00 ) ] ( 203 ) ( 1.800 - 0.050 ) (1.00)

= 109.5 KN ==>> Full Capacity

The shear capacity of the shear reinforcement

Stirrups :
Vs = 2 Av fy deff / S = 2 x ( 2 x 113.1 ) ( 415 ) ( 1.800 - 0.050 ) / (200) D12mm
= 1642.7 KN A = 113.1 mm2

The total shear capacity becomes

Vu = (Vc + Vs) = 0.85 (109.5 + 1642.7 )

= 1489.4 KN

C.2 LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

C.2.1 Load Rating Based on Serviceability Limit State by ASM

Serviceability conditions are given in the AASHTO Design Specifications See Sect. 3.5
(Section 9.15) and the AASHTO MCEB Manual (Sec. 6.6.3.3) of this Manual

i. Using compressive stress under all load combination:

0.6 f'c - ( Fd + Fp + Fs ) This Manual

Location RF INV-COMALL = RF INV-COMALL
Fl Eq. 3.5-2

0.6 (38) - ( 15.44 + 1.42 + ( -5.66 ) + 0.00 )

At Midspan = = 6.44
1.80

ii. Using compressive stress of Live Load, half the prestressing and permanent dead load: This Manual
Eq. 3.5-3
0.4 f'c - 0.5 ( Fd + Fp + Fs )
Location RF INV-COMLIVE = RF INV-COMLIVE
Fl

0.4 (38) - 0.5 ( 15.44 + 1.42 + ( -5.66 ) + 0.00 )

At Midspan = = 5.33
1.80

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

217
PCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 7 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG SIMPLE

NOTES

iii. Using allowable tension in concrete: This Manual

Eq. 3.5-1
1/2
0.5 f'c - ( Fd + Fp + Fs )
Location RF INV-COMLIVE = RF INV-COMLIVE
Fl

1/2
- 0.5 (38) - ( - 15.61 - 3.73 + 22.14 + 0.00 )
At Midspan = = 1.25
-4.71

C.2.2 Load Rating Based on Strength Limit State by LFM

The general expression for the Rating Factor is:

φ Rn - γD D where γD : 1.30
RF =
γL βL L ( 1 + I ) γL : 1.30
βL : 1.67 for inventory
βL : 1.00 for Operating

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS (LFM)

Location Description Inventory Rating (Tons) Operating Rating (Tons)

12007-1.3(4145+1349) 12007-1.3(4145+1349)
Midspan Moment = 1.32 = 2.20
1.3(1.67)(1704) 1.3(1.00)(1704)
1489-1.3(474+154) 1489-1.3(474+154)
At Support Shear = 1.50 = 2.51
1.3(1.67)(207) 1.3(1.00)(207)

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS (LFM)

(Rating Live Load = MS18, W = 33 Metric Tons)
Location Description Inventory Rating (Tons) Operating Rating (Tons)

Midspan Moment 1.32 x 33 = 43.4 2.20 x 33 = 72.5

At Support Shear 1.50 x 33 = 49.6 2.51 x 33 = 82.7

In this example, the Rating Factors (RF) for both the serviceability limit state and
the strength limit state are greater than one (RF >> 1) so that there is no need to
perform load posting calculations. Therefore, the bridge can safely carry the intended traffic loads.

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

218
PCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 8 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG SIMPLE

NOTES
D. LOAD POSTING UNDER SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD (ASM)
AND UNDER STRENGTH LIMIT STATE BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)

The procedure for load posting is similar to the above using load posting vehicles for live load.

D.1 DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

The live load moments and shears can be taken from Appendix III of the Manual corresponding This manual
to Types 1-1, 1-2 and 12-2 Posting Vehicles. Fig. 3.4-2

For a 35.00 m span bridge, the Posting Live Load demands are:

Vehicle LL Effects/Wheel Line LL Dist LL Demand

Impact
Type Moment Shear Factor Moment (KN-m) Shear (KN)

Type 1-1 695.45 81.46 1.148 1.209 965.19 113.06

Type 1-2 1036.00 123.91 1.148 1.209 1437.83 171.97

Type 12-2 1261.27 156.27 1.148 1.209 1750.48 216.88

D.2 POSTING RATING BASED ON SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE by ASM

Similar calculations are done using Eqs. 3.5-2, 3.5-3 and 3.5-1 for rating factor and load rating

i. Using compressive stress under all load combination:

0.6 f'c - ( Fd + Fp + Fs ) This Manual

Location RF INV-COMALL = RF INV-COMALL
Fl Eq. 3.5-2

Type 0.6 (38) - ( 15.44 + 1.42 + ( -5.66 ) + 0.00 )

= = 11.37
1-1 1.02
At Midspan

Type 0.6 (38) - ( 15.44 + 1.42 + ( -5.66 ) + 0.00 )

= = 7.64
1-2 1.52

Type 0.6 (38) - ( 15.44 + 1.42 + ( -5.66 ) + 0.00 )

= = 6.27
12-2 1.85

ii. Using compressive stress of Live Load, half the prestressing and permanent dead load: This Manual
Eq. 3.5-3
0.4 f'c - 0.5 ( Fd + Fp + Fs )
Location RF INV-COMLIVE = RF INV-COMLIVE
Fl

Type 0.4 (38) - 0.5 ( 15.44 + 1.42 + ( -5.66 ) + 0.00 )

= = 9.42
1-1 1.02
At Midspan

Type 0.4 (38) - 0.5 ( 15.44 + 1.42 + ( -5.66 ) + 0.00 )

= = 6.32
1-2 1.52

Type 0.4 (38) - 0.5 ( 15.44 + 1.42 + ( -5.66 ) + 0.00 )

= = 5.19
12-2 1.85

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

219
PCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 9 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG SIMPLE

NOTES

iii. Using allowable tension in concrete: This Manual

Eq. 3.5-1
1/2
0.5 f'c - ( Fd + Fp + Fs )
Location RF INV-COMLIVE = RF INV-COMLIVE
Fl

1/2
Type - 0.5 (38) - ( - 15.61 - 3.73 + 22.14 + 0.00 )
= = 2.21
1-1 -2.67
At Midspan

1/2
Type - 0.5 (38) - ( - 15.61 - 3.73 + 22.14 + 0.00 )
= = 1.48
1-2 -3.97

1/2
Type - 0.5 (38) - ( - 15.61 - 3.73 + 22.14 + 0.00 )
= = 1.22
12-2 -4.83

D.3 Load Rating Based on Strength Limit State by LFM

Similar calculations are done same as section C.2.2

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS (LFM)

Location Description Inventory Rating (Tons) Operating Rating (Tons)

Type 12007-1.3(4145+1349) 12007-1.3(4145+1349)

= 2.32 = 3.88
1-1 1.3(1.67)(965.2) 1.3(1.00)(965.2)
At Midspan
Moment

Type 12007-1.3(4145+1349) 12007-1.3(4145+1349)

= 1.56 = 2.60
1-2 1.3(1.67)(1437.8) 1.3(1.00)(1437.8)

Type 12007-1.3(4145+1349) 12007-1.3(4145+1349)

= 1.28 = 2.14
12-2 1.3(1.67)(1750.5) 1.3(1.00)(1750.5)

Type 1489-1.3(474+154) 1489-1.3(474+154)

= 2.74 = 4.58
1-1 1.3(1.67)(113.1) 1.3(1.00)(113.1)
At Support

1489-1.3(474+154) 1489-1.3(474+154)
Shear

Type
= 1.80 = 3.01
1-2 1.3(1.67)(172.0) 1.3(1.00)(172.0)

Type 1489-1.3(474+154) 1489-1.3(474+154)

= 1.43 = 2.39
12-2 1.3(1.67)(216.9) 1.3(1.00)(216.9)

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

220
PCDG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 10 OF 10

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG SIMPLE

NOTES
LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS (LFM)
(Rating Live Load = MS18, W = 33 Metric Tons)
Location Description Inventory Rating (Tons) Operating Rating (Tons)

Type1-1 2.32 x 17 = 39.5 3.88 x 17 = 65.9

At Midspan
Moment

Type 1-2 1.56 x 27 = 42.1 2.60 x 27 = 70.3

Type 12-2 1.28 x 38 = 48.7 2.14 x 38 = 81.2

Type1-1 2.74 x 17 = 46.6 4.58 x 17 = 77.9

At Support
Shear

Type 1-2 1.80 x 27 = 48.7 3.01 x 27 = 81.3

Type 12-2 1.43 x 38 = 54.4 2.39 x 38 = 90.7

D. SUMMARY OF LOAD POSTING

The summary of calculation results for both the load factor and the allowable stress methods
are presented below.

SUMMARY OF RESULTS FOR LOAD POSTING

Vehicle At Midspan At Support POSTING

Vehicle Type Weight Rating Load Rating Load (Metric
(Metric Tons)
Factor Rating Factor Rating Tons)

MS18 33.0 1.25 41.3 1.50 49.6 33

Type 1-1 17.0 2.21 37.6 2.74 46.6 17

Type 1-2 27.0 1.48 40.1 1.80 48.7 27

Type 12-2 38.0 1.22 46.3 1.43 54.4 38

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

221
PCDG CONTINUOUS Computer Based Calculation

INTERIOR PCDG CONTINUOUS

A. GENERAL BACK TO MENU

A1. BRIDGE DESCRIPTION

Bridge Location REGION II
Bridge Name
Bridge Simple or Continuous C Precast, Prestressed PC I Girder Bridge
Type Number of Span 3
Bridge Width (curb to curb) (m) 7.32
Number of Lanes 2
Bridge Length (m) 35.000 35.000 35.000 =105.000m
Year Built 2000
Nos. of Girder 4 Superstructure made continuous for live loading
Structure Girder Spacing (m) 2.100 on centers
Substructure Concrete bents and abutments
Wearing thickness (mm) 50
Course material Asphalt
f'c (Girder) 38 MPa
f'c (Slab) 24.2 MPa
Ultimate Strength of Tendons fu 1860 MPa
Notes on Plans
Working Force 6750 kN (Effective after losses)
100 mm (from soffit at Midspan)
Centroid of PC Tendons
885 mm (from soffit at Anchorage)
Weight of barrier rail Wbr = 13.0 KN/m
fy (Reinforcing Bars) 415 Mpa
Assumption
Concrete Unit Weight Wu = 24.0 KN/m3
Asphalt Unit Weight Wa = 22.0 KN/m3
Others Rating Live Load is AASHTO MS18 (HS20-44)

NEXT

Year of fc or fs
Material f'c or fy
Construction Inventory Operating Posting
Prior to 1959 17.2 6.9 10.3 6.9
after 1959 20.7 8.3 13.1 8.3
Concrete
1977 to 1981 27.6 11.0 16.5 11.0 *pc
after 1981 31.0 12.4 18.6 12.4 *pc
Prior to 1954 227.5 124.1 172.4 124.1
after 1954 275.8 137.9 193.1 137.9
Rebar
Grade 50 344.7 137.9 224.1 137.9 *pc
Grade 60 413.7 165.5 248.2 165.5 *pc

INTERIOR PCDG CONTINUOUS

222 Sheet 1: GENERAL
A2. BRIDGE LAYOUT AND SECTION

Pier B

Section C

BRIDGE ELEVATION

SUPERSTRUCTURE CROSS SECTION

SECTION AT MIDSPAN SECTION AT PIER SUPPORT

GIRDER SECTION
Girder Height 1.600
Dimension b h
Slab 2.100 0.2 *1.00 (Modulas Ratio)
1.067 0.127
0.330 0.076
Uflg
0.102 0.076
0.102 0.102
Web 0.203 1.270
0.254 0.254
Lflg
0.711 0.203

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG CONTINUOUS

223 Sheet 1: LAYOUT
B. DEMAND FORCES
B1. DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

B1.1 INPUT
Area of Girder (m2) 0.653
Span Length (m) 35.000
Composite Girder Height (m) 1.80
FOR Girder Height (m) 1.60
DEAD Slab thickness (m) 0.200
LOAD Slab Spacing (m) 2.100
Weight of Diaphram (kN/m) 1.5
Weight of Barrier Rail (kN/m) 13
Number of Girder (nos.) 4

B1.2 DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

Dead Load Moment at Midspan MDL(kN-m) 4173.5
Dead Load Shear at Support VDL (kN) 477.0

B2. FORCE DEMAND CALCULATIONS

B2.1 INPUT
Number of Lanes 2
Fraction DF 1.148

B2.2 FORCE DEMAND CALCULATIONS

Conducting a Structural Analysis, the load demands for the PCDG should be obtained
separately and input the necessary load demands in the Table below.
At Pier
Description C (0.5L)
Support
Dead load (kN-m) 4173.5 0.0
Moments Superimposed Dead load (kN-m) 594.7 -792.9
MS18 moment with Impact (kN-m) 2441.4 -2770.7
Dead load (kN) 0.0 -477.0
Superimposed Dead load (kN) 0.0 -135.9
MS18 max. positive shear force (kN) 202.9 67.0
Shears
MS18 max. negative shear force (kN) -202.9 -465.3
MS18 max. positive moment for shear (kN-m) 2319.3 457.9
MS18 max. negative moment for shear (kN-m) -2319.3 -449.8

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG CONTINUOUS

224 Sheet 1: DFDLLL
 B3. SECTION PROPERTIES CALCULATION
Load Condition A (m2) Iz (m4) Yb (m) Yt (m) Yt slab (m)
For Dead Loads 0.653 0.217 0.812 0.788 NA
For Live Loads 1.073 0.420 1.159 0.441 0.641

B4. STRESS CALCULATIONS

(1) Stress at Midspan
Stresses in the PC Girder (Mpa)
Loading Top Concrete Bottom Concrete Centroid of
Fiber Fiber Composite
Dead Load (Self + Slab) 15.17 -15.63 6.69
Prestress (Pef=6750kN) -7.13 28.32 2.63
Superimposed Dead Load 0.62 -1.64 0.00
Live Load 2.56 -6.74 0.00
Live Load Moment for Shear 2.43 -6.40 0.00

(2) Stress at Pier Support

Stresses in the PC Girder (Mpa)
Top Bottom
Loading Centroid of Top of
Concrete Concrete
Composite Slab
Fiber Fiber
Dead Load (Self + Slab) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Prestress (Pef=6750kN) 12.13 8.48 11.13 0.00
Superimposed Dead Load -0.83 2.19 0.00 -1.21
Live Load -2.91 7.65 0.00 -4.23
Live Load Moment for Shear -0.47 1.24 0.00 -0.69

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG CONTINUOUS

225 Sheet 1: DSC
C. LOAD RATING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD
C1. CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

C1.1 MOMENT CAPACITY at MIDSPAN

Assumed total prestressing loss including creep σLOSS (Mpa) 204.6
Ultimate Strength of Tendons fu (Mpa) 1860
Web Width bw (mm) 203
Prestressing Steel Area As* (mm2) 5670
Section Loss (%) 0
Total Assumed Area of Steel As(mm2) 5670
Effective width of deck , beff (mm) 2100
Centroid of Prestressing Steel from top of deck , d (mm) 1700
Yield Strength of Tendons fy (Mpa) 1570
k=2(1.04-fy/fu) 0.39 cinput
Neutral axis location (mm) 560.6 560.6
Moment Capacity at Midspan R (kN-m) 14284

C1.2 MOMENT CAPACITY at PIER SUPPORT

Ultimate Strength of Rebar fy (Mpa) 415
Number of Rebars (nos.) 15
Diameter of Main Rebar (mm) 36
Area of one main rebar Φs (mm2) 1017
Concrete Cover (mm) 38
Resistance Reduction Factor 0.90
Rebars Area As (mm2) 15255
Section Loss (%) 10
Total Assumed Area of Steel As(mm2) 13730
Centroid of Rebar from top of compression fiber, d (mm) 1744
Web Width bw (mm) 711.0
Rebar Ratio ρ = As / ( beff x d ) ρ 0.01107
Neutral axis location (mm) 608.1
Moment Capacity at Face of Support R (kN-m) 8045

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG CONTINUOUS

226 Sheet 1: CCMS1
C1. CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

C1.3 SHEAR CAPACITY at MIDSPAN

Diameter of Stirrups (mm) 12
2
Area of Stirrups (mm ) 113
Spacing of Stirrups (mm) 250
Nominal Shear Capacity Factor　Φ 0.85
Web Width bw (mm) 203
Depth of Shear Cracks (mm) 40
The Reduction Factor due to Shear Cracks 0.80
Cracking Moment (kN-m) 3775.4
Factored Total Moment Mmax (kN-m) 11231.6
Factored Shear Force Vi (kN) 440.3
Nominal Shear Strength Vci (kN) 254.4
Nominal Shear Strength Vcw (kN) 1474.5
Nominal Shear Strength provided by concrete Vc (kN) 204.2
Nominal Shear Strength provided by Rebar Vs (kN) 637.8
Shear Capacity Vu = Φ( Vc + Vs ) (kN) 715.7

C1.4 SHEAR CAPACITY at PIER B

Diameter of Stirrups (mm) 12
2
Area of Stirrups (mm ) 113
Spacing of Stirrups (mm) 150
Nominal Shear Capacity Factor　Φ 0.85
Web Width bw (mm) 203
Depth of Shear Cracks (mm) 30
The Reduction Factor due to Shear Cracks 0.85
Cracking Moment (kN-m) -819.2
Factored Total Moment Mmax (kN-m) -2006.8
Factored Shear Force Vi (kN) -1806.4
Nominal Shear Strength Vci (kN) 1350.4
Nominal Shear Strength Vcw (kN) 1836.5
Nominal Shear Strength provided by concrete Vc (kN) 1150.9
Nominal Shear Strength provided by Rebar Vs (kN) 1090.5
Shear Capacity Vu 1905.1

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG CONTINUOUS

227 Sheet 1: CCMS2
C2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

C2.1 LOAD RATING BASED ON SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE

(1) USING COMPRESSIVE STRESS
Section C Pier Support B
For Strength Factor 0.6
For Strength Factor 0.4
For Dead Load Factor 0.5
Concrete Compressive Stress 38
Dead Load Stress 15.80 2.19
Prestress after all losses -7.13 8.48
Secondary Prestress 0.00 0.00
Live Load stresses including Impact 2.56 7.65
Using Compressive Stress Under All Load Combination 5.52 1.59
Using Compressive Stress of Live Load 4.24 1.29
(2) USING ALLOWABLE TENSION STRESS
Dead Load Stress -17.27 -0.83
Prestress after all losses 28.32 12.13
Secondary Prestress 0.00 0.00
Live Load stresses including Impact -6.74 -2.91
Using the Allowable Tension in Concrete 2.10 4.95

C2.2 LOAD RATING BASED ON STRENGTH LIMIT STATE

Dead Load Factor 1.3
Inventory 2.17
Live Load factors
Operating 1.3
Section C (at Midspan) Section B (Support)
Moment Shear Moment Shear
Moment and Shear Capacity 14284 716 -8045 -1905
Moment and Shear due to Dead Load 4174 0.00 0.00 -477
Moment and Shear due to Superimposed Dead Load 595 0.00 -793 -136
Moment and Shear due to Live Load 2441 203 -2771 -465

C2.3 LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

Moment Shear
Description
Inventory Operating Inventory Operating
Section C (Midspan) 1.53 2.55 1.63 2.71
Rating Factor
Pier B (Support) 1.51 1.95 1.10 1.83
Rating Live Load (MS18) (Metic Tons Weight of vehicle 33.0
Section C (Midspan) 50.4 84.1 53.6 89.5
Load Rating Calculations
Pier B (Support) 49.8 64.3 36.2 60.5

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG CONTINUOUS

228 Sheet 1: LRC
 C2.3 SUMMARY OF RATING FACTOR AND LOAD RATING
Section C Pier Support B
Weight of Vehicle (Metric Tons) 33
RF LR RF LR
All Load 5.52 182.1 1.59 52.3
Serviceability Compression
Rating Live Load 4.24 140.0 1.29 42.5
Limit State
Factor Allowable Tension 2.10 69.2 4.95 163.2
and Inventory 1.53 50.4 1.51 49.8
Moment
Load Operating 2.55 84.1 1.95 64.3
Strength Limit State
Rating Inventory 1.63 53.6 1.10 36.2
Shear
Operating 2.71 89.5 1.83 60.5
Minimum Rating Factor and Load Rating 1.53 50.4 1.10 36.2

Depend on the minimum value of Rating Factor > 1 or <1 ,

instruction in the below cell is automatically shown
Return to GENERAL

Click following the above instruction

Return to GENERAL

Load Posting

INTERIOR PCDG CONTINUOUS

229 Sheet 1: LRSUM
D. LOAD POSTING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD
D1. DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

D1. DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

Conducting a Structural Analysis, the load demands for the PCDG should be
obtained separately and input the necessary load demands in the Table below.
Description Section C Pier Support B
Type 1-1 822.1 -448.7
Moment Type 1-2 1219.9 -702.9
Type 12-2 1447.3 -934.3
Posting Vehicle Moment and Shear
Type 1-1 60.3 -123.2
Shear Type 1-2 85.5 -191.8
Type 12-2 84.1 -248.8

D2. POSTING RATING CALCULATIONS

D2.1 POSTING RATING BASED ON SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE

(1) USING COMPRESSIVE STRESS
Description Section C Pier Support B
For Strength Factor 0.6
For Strength Factor 0.4
For Dead Load Factor 0.5
Concrete Compressive Stress 38
Dead Load Stress 15.80 2.19
Prestress after all losses -7.13 8.48
Secondary Prestress 0.00 0.00
Type 1-1 0.86 1.24
Live Load stresses including Impact Type 1-2 1.28 1.94
Type 12-2 1.52 2.58
Type 1-1 16.38 9.79
Using Compressive Stress
Type 1-2 11.04 6.25
Under All Load Combination
Type 12-2 9.31 4.70
Type 1-1 12.60 7.96
Using Compressive Stress of Live Load Type 1-2 8.49 5.08
Type 12-2 7.16 3.82
(2) USING ALLOWABLE TENSION STRESS
Dead Load Stress -17.27 -0.83
Prestress after all losses 28.32 12.13
Secondary Prestress 0.00 0.00
Type 1-1 -2.27 -0.47
Live Load stresses including Impact Type 1-2 -3.37 -0.74
Type 12-2 -4.00 -0.98
Type 1-1 6.23 30.54
Using the Allowable Tension in Concrete Type 1-2 4.20 19.50
Type 12-2 3.54 14.67

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG CONTINUOUS

230 Sheet 1: POSTLR1
D2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

D2.2 POSTING RATING BASED ON STRENGTH LIMIT STATE

Dead Load Factor 1.3
Inventory 2.17
Live Load factors
Operating 1.3
Section C (at Midspan) Section B (Support)
Moment Shear Moment Shear
Moment and Shear Capacity 14284 716 -8045 -1905
Moment and Shear due to Dead Load 4174 0.00 0.00 -477
Moment and Shear due to Superimposed Dead Load 595 0.00 -792.9 -136
Type 1-1 822 60 -449 -123
Moment and Shear due to Live Load Type 1-2 1220 86 -703 -192
Type 12-2 1447 84 -934 -249

D2.3 POSTING RATING CALCULATIONS

Moment Shear
Description
Inventory Operating Inventory Operating
Type 1-1 4.53 7.57 5.47 9.13
Section C
Type 1-2 3.05 5.10 3.86 6.44
(Midspan)
Type 12-2 2.57 4.30 3.92 6.55
Rating Factor
Type 1-1 7.20 12.02 4.15 6.92
Pier B
Type 1-2 4.60 7.68 2.66 4.45
(Support)
Type 12-2 3.46 5.77 2.05 3.43
Type 1-1 17.0
Postting Live Load
Weight of vehicle Type 1-2 27.0
(Metic Tons)
Type 12-2 38.0
Type 1-1 77.0 128.6 93.0 155.2
Section C
Type 1-2 82.5 137.7 104.2 173.9
(Midspan)
Type 12-2 97.8 163.3 149.0 248.8
Load Rating Calculations
Type 1-1 122.5 204.4 70.5 117.6
Pier B
Type 1-2 124.2 207.3 71.9 120.0
(Support)
Type 12-2 131.5 219.4 78.0 130.2

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG CONTINUOUS

231 Sheet 1: POSTLR2
 D2.3 SUMMARY OF POSTING RATING FACTOR AND LOAD RATING
Section C Pier Support B
RF LR RF LR
(1) POSTING VEHICLE TYPE 1-1 Weight of Vehicle 17 (Metoric Tons)
All Load 16.38 278.5 9.79 166.4
Serviceability Compression
Rating Live Load 12.60 214.1 7.96 135.3
Limit State
Factor Allowable Tension 6.23 105.9 30.54 519.3
and Inventory 4.53 77.0 7.20 122.5
Moment
Load Operating 7.57 128.6 12.02 204.4
Strength Limit State
Rating Inventory 5.47 93.0 4.15 70.5
Shear
Operating 9.13 155.2 6.92 117.6
Minimum Rating Factor and Load Rating 4.53 77.0 4.15 70.5
(2) POSTING VEHICLE TYPE 1-2 Weight of Vehicle 27 (Metoric Tons)
All Load 11.04 298.1 6.25 168.7
Serviceability Compression
Rating Live Load 8.49 229.2 5.08 137.2
Limit State
Factor Allowable Tension 4.20 113.3 19.50 526.5
and Inventory 3.05 82.5 4.60 124.2
Moment
Load Operating 5.10 137.7 7.68 207.3
Strength Limit State
Rating Inventory 3.86 104.2 2.66 71.9
Shear
Operating 6.44 173.9 4.45 120.0
Minimum Rating Factor and Load Rating 3.05 82.5 2.66 71.9
(3) POSTING VEHICLE TYPE 12-2 Weight of Vehicle 38 (Metoric Tons)
All Load 9.31 353.7 4.70 178.6
Serviceability Compression
Rating Live Load 7.16 271.9 3.82 145.3
Limit State
Factor Allowable Tension 3.54 134.4 14.67 557.4
and Inventory 2.57 97.8 3.46 131.5
Moment
Load Operating 4.30 163.3 5.77 219.4
Strength Limit State
Rating Inventory 3.92 149.0 2.05 78.0
Shear
Operating 6.55 248.8 3.43 130.2
Minimum Rating Factor and Load Rating 2.57 97.8 2.05 78.0

NEXT

INTERIOR PCDG CONTINUOUS

232 Sheet 1: POSTSUM
E. SUMMARY OF RESULTS FOR LOAD POSTING

SUMMARY OF RESULTS FOR LOAD POSTING

Vehicle SECTION C PIER SUPPORT B
Load
Vehicle Weight
Rating Load Rating Load Posting
Type (Metric
Factor Rating Factor Rating (Tons)
Tons)
MS18 33.0 1.53 50.4 1.10 36.2 33T
Type 1-1 17.0 4.53 77.0 4.15 70.5 17T
Type 1-2 27.0 3.05 82.5 2.66 71.9 27T
Type 12-2 38.0 2.57 97.8 2.05 78.0 38T

LOAD

17T

27T
38T

END AND GO TO DECK SLAB

INTERIOR PCDG CONTINUOUS

233 Sheet 1: SUMMARY
PCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 1 OF 15

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG CONTINUOUS

A. GENERAL
A.1 BRIDGE DESCRIPTION

Bridge Location : Region II

Bridge Type : 3-spans Continuous Precast, Prestressed I Girder Bridge
Br. Width / No. of Lanes : 7.32m curb to curb / Two-lanes
Bridge Length : 35.00m + 35.00m + 35.00m = 105.00m
Year Built : 2000
Structure
Girders : Precast, Prestressed I Girder Bridge (4-Girders), Monolithic with deck slab
: Girder spacing at 2.10m on center
Substructure : RC bents and RC Abutments
Wearing Course : 50mm thick Asphalt Overlay
Material Properties : f'c = 38 Mpa (Girder) , 24.2 Mpa (Slab)
: fu = 1860 Mpa , Workinf Force: 6750.0 kN (effective after losses)
: Centroid of PS Tendons: 100 mm from soffit @ midspan, 885mm at Anchorage
Assumption : Weight of barrier rail = 13.0 KN/m
: fy (reinforcing bars) = 415 Mpa
3
: Concrete unit weight = 24.0 KN/m
3
: Asphalt unit weight = 22.0 KN/m
Others : Rating Live Load is AASHTO MS18 (HS20-44)
Reqirement :
Determine the load rating of the interior girder of the span (35.0m) for MS18 (HS20)
vehicles considering damages on members

A.2 BRIDGE LAYOUT

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

234
PCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 2 OF 15

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES

B. DEMAND FORCES
B.1 DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

The dead loads considered in the calculations include (1) Girder self-weight, (2) Fillet/haunch,
(3) Tributary area of slab, (4) Barrier rails (Assumed to be equally distributed among girders).
(5) Wearing course.

3
Self-weight of girder = (0.6532m2) (24 KN/m ) = 15.680 KN/m
Slab Weight (Tributary) = (0.20m) (2.10m) (24 KN/m3) = 10.080 KN/m
Weight of Diaphram = = 1.50 KN/m
Barrier rail = 2 (13.0/4) = 6.50 KN/m
3
Wearing course = (0.05m) (2.10m) (22 KN/m ) = 2.31 KN/m
Total Uniform Load of Interior Girder, w = 36.07 KN/m
Total Uniform Dead Load of Girder, wDL = 27.260 KN/m
Total Uniform Superimposed Dead Load of Girder, wSDL = 8.81 KN/m

2
Dead Load Moment at Midspan, MDL = 27.26 x 35.00 /8 = 4173.5 KN-m Md = wL2/8

Dead Load Shear at support, VDL = 27.26 x 35.00 /2 = 477.0 KN Vd = wL/2

WDL = 27.26 kN/m WSDL = 8.81 kN/m

35.00 m

B.2 LIVE LOAD CALCULATIONS

The carriageway width is 7.32m curb to curb. AASHTO specifies a clear lane width of 5.4m, thus Manual 1st Ed.
the deck shall carry two-lanes. Sect 3.4.2

The distribution of wheel loads for two traffic lanes for T-beams shall be taken as S/1.829 DPWH
Table 3-4
Number of live load wheel line = 2.10 / 1.829 = 1.148 AASHTO
Table 3.23.1
(S/6 in ft.)
Impact factor, I = 15.24 / (35.00 + 38.00) = 0.209 DPWH
Sect. 3.2.5.1
Conducting a Structural Analysis, the load demands for the PCDG Continuous should be obtained
separately and input the necessary load demands in the Table below.

At Midspan At Pier Support

Description
0.5L 1.0L
Dead load moments, KN-m 4173.5 0.0
Moments Superimposed Dead load moments, KN-m 594.7 -792.9
MS18 moments with impact, KN-m 2441.4 -2770.7
Dead load shears, KN 0.0 -477.0
Superimposed Dead load moments, KN-m 0.0 -135.9
MS18 max. positive Shear force, KN 202.9 67.0
Shears
MS18 max. negative Shear force, KN -202.9 -465.3
MS18 max. positive moment, KN-m 2319.3 457.9
MS18 max. negative moment, KN-m -2319.3 -449.8

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

235
PCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 3 OF 15

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES

B.3 SECTION PROPERTIES CALCULATION

The section properties of the prestressed concrete I-girder including that for
the composite girder are calculated and given in thetable below:

Moment of
Area Ybot Girder Ytop Girder Ytop Slab
Description 2 Inertia
(m ) 4 (m) (m) (m)
(m )
For Dead Load 0.653 0.217 0.812 0.788 NA
For (SDL) and (LL+I) 1.073 0.420 1.159 0.441 0.641

B.4 LOAD STRESS CALCULATIONS

The stresses at different fiber locations are calculated using

P Mc
σ = +
A y/I

Estimated Stress Demands at Midspan

Stresses in the PCI Girder (Mpa)
LOADING Top Concrete Bottom Concrete Centroid of
Fiber Fiber Composite
Dead Load (Self + Slab) 15.17 -15.63 6.69
Prestress (Pef = 6750 kN) -7.13 28.32 2.63
Superimposed Dead Load 0.62 -1.64 0.00
Live Load 2.56 -6.74 0.00
Live Load Moment for Shear 2.43 -6.40 0.00

Estimated Stress Demands at Pier Support

Stresses in the PCI Girder (Mpa)
LOADING Top Concrete Bottom Concrete Centroid of Centroid of
Fiber Fiber Composite Composite
Dead Load (Self + Slab) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Prestress (Pef = 6750 kN) 12.13 8.48 11.13 0.00
Superimposed Dead Load -0.83 2.19 0.00 -1.21
Live Load -2.91 7.65 0.00 -4.23
Live Load Moment for Shear -0.47 1.24 0.00 -0.69

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

236
PCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 4 OF 15

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES
Stresses due to Dead Load
Top Concrete Fiber = 4,173.5 x 0.788 / 0.217 / 1000 = 15.17 Mpa
Bottom Concrete Fiber = 4,173.5 x (-0.812) / 0.217 / 1000 = -15.63Mpa
Centroid of Composite = 15.17 - (15.17 - ( - 15.63 ) x ( 0.441 / 1.600 ) = 6.69 Mpa

Stresses due to Prestress

Top Concrete Fiber = ( 6750 / 0.653 - 6750 x ( 0.812 - 0.100 ) x 0.788 / 0.217 ) / 1000
= -7.13 Mpa
Bottom Concrete Fiber = ( 6750 / 0.653 + 6750 x ( 0.812 - 0.100 ) x 0.812 / 0.217 ) / 1000
= 28.32 Mpa
Centroid of Composite = -7.13 - (-7.13-28.32) x (0.441/1.600) = 2.63 Mpa

Stresses due to Superimposed Dead Load

Top Concrete Fiber = 594.7 x 0.441 / 0.420 / 1000 = 0.62 Mpa
Bottom Concrete Fiber = 594.7 x ( -1.159 ) / 0.420 / 1000 = -1.64 Mpa
Centroid of Composite = 1.42 - (1.42 - ( - 3.73) x ( 0.443 / 1.600 ) = 0.00 Mpa

Stresses due to Live Load

Top Concrete Fiber = 2441.4 x 0.441 / 0.420 / 1000 = 2.56 Mpa
Bottom Concrete Fiber = 2441.4 x ( -1.159 ) / 0.420 / 1000 = -6.74 Mpa
Centroid of Composite = 1.80 - (1.80 - ( - 4.71) x ( 0.443 / 1.600 ) = 0.00 Mpa

Stresses due to Live Load for shear force and stresses at Pier Support are obtained by same way
of stress calculations. The stresses at Midspan and Pier Support are shown in the following figures.

200 Slab 15.17 -7.13 0.62 2.56

796
1800 N.A. of Girder
1600

804

PCI Girder

-15.63 28.32 -1.64 -6.74

Dead Load Prestress SDL Live Load

STRESSES AT MIDSPAN OF GIRDER

0.00 0.00
-1.21 -4.23
200 Slab 12.13
0.00 -0.83 -2.91

796
1800 N.A. of Girder
1600

804

PCI Girder
0.00 8.48 2.19 7.65

Dead Load Prestress SDL Live Load

STRESSES PIER SUPPORT OF GIRDER

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

237
PCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 5 OF 15

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES
C. LOAD RATING UNDER SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD (ASM)
AND UNDER STRENGTH LIMIT STATE BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)

C.1 CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

C.1.1 MOMENT CAPACITY AT MIDSPAN

The actual area of prestressing steel can be obtained from as-built plans.
However in the absence of as-built darwings, the following approach can be used.
Assume total loss including creep loss to be
σLOSS = 204.6 Mpa with fu(Tendons) = 1860.0 Mpa fy = 1570.0 Mpa

Therefore, Working Force 6750

= = x (1000)
Prestressing steel area Effective Stress ( 0.75 x 1860 - 204.6 )
2
= 5670 mm

beff = 2100 mm , ts = 200 mm , bw = 203 mm

dp = 1800 - 100 = 1700 mm , f'c (girder) = 38 Mpa , f'c (slab) = 24.2 Mpa

k = 2 x ( 1.04 - fy / fu ) = 2 x ( 1.04 - 1570.0 / 1860.0 ) = 0.39

β (girder) = 0.85 - 0.05 / 7 x ( f'c - 28 ) = 0.85 - 0.05 / 7 x ( 38 - 28 ) = 0.7786

[ in case of, 56 > f'c > 28 ==> β = 0.85 - 0.05 / 7 x ( f'c - 28 )]

β (slab) = 0.85 [ in case of, f'c < 28 ==> β = 0.85 ]

2
Ac (girder) = bw x ( N.A. - ts ) = 203 x ( 560.6 - 200 ) = 73,201.8 mm (N.A.: Neutral axis location)

2
Ac (slab) = beff x ts = 2100 x 200 = 420,000 mm

[ f'c (slab) x Ac (slab) x β (slab) + f'c (girder) x Ac (girder) x β (girder) ]

β (average) =
[ f'c (slab) x Ac (slab) + f'c (girder) x Ac (girder) ]

( 24.2 x 420,000 x 0.85 + 38 x 73201.8 x 0.7786 )

= = 0.834652
( 24.2 x 420,000 + 38 x 73201.8 )

Ap x fu
C (slab) =
[ 0.85 x f'c (slab) x β (slab) x beff + k x Ap x fu / dp ]

5,670 x 1,860
= = 269.4 mm
[ 0.85 x 24.2 x 0.85 x 2,100 + 0.39 x 5,670 x 1,860 / 1,700 ]

fps = fu x [ 1 - k x C (slab) / dp ] = 1,860 x [ 1 - 0.39 x 269.4 / 1,700 ] = 1744.5 Mpa

a = β (slab) x C (slab) = 0.85 x 269.4 = 229.0 mm

-6
S = Ap x fps x ( dp - a / 2 ) / 10 = 5,670 x 1,744.5 x ( 1,700 - 229.0 / 2 ) / 10-6 = 15,684 kN-m

[ Ap x fu - 0.85 x ts x β (average) x { f'c (slab) x beff - f'c (girder) x bw } ]

C (girder) =
[ 0.85 x f'c (girder) x β (average) x bw + k x Ap x fu / dp ]

[ 5,670 x 1,860 - 0.85 x 200 x 0.834652 x { 24.2 x 2,100 - 38 x 203 } ]

= = 560.6 mm
[ 0.85 x 38 x 0.834652 x 203 + 0.39 x 5,670 x 1,860 / 1,700 ]

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

238
PCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 6 OF 15

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES
fps = fu x [ 1 - k x C (girder) / dp ] = 1,860 x [ 1 - 0.39 x 560.6 / 1,700 ] = 1619.7 Mpa

a = β (average) x C (girder) = 0.834652 x 560.6 = 467.9 mm

S = [ Ap x fps x ( dp - a / 2 )
-6
+ 0.85 x β (average) x ( f'c (slab) x beff - f'c (girder) x bw ) x ts x ( a / 2 - ts / 2 ) } / 10
= 5,670x 1,619.7 x ( 1,700 - 467.9 / 2 )
-6
+ 0.85 x 0.834652 x ( 24.2 x 2,100 - 38 x 203 ) x 200 x ( 467.9 / 2 - 200 / 2 ) } / 10
= 14,284 kN-m <== Governing Moment Capacity ( < 15,684 kN-m )

C.1.2 MOMENT CAPACITY AT PIER SUPPORT

nos.
There are 15 - Φ36mm rebars used at Pier Support, thus, the total area of rebars is:

π 2
AΦ = x 36 x 36 x 15 = 1,017 mm x 15 = 15,255 mm2
4

2
Section Loss = 10 % Total assumed area of Steel = 15,255 x 0.9 = 13,730 mm

where, Ultimate strength of rebar fy = 415 Mpa, Concrete cover = 38 mm

Centroid of rebar from top of deck = 1800 - 38 - 36 /2 = 1744 mm

Web width beff = 711.0 mm

ρ = As / bd = 13,730 / ( 1744 x 711) = 0.01107

As x fy
C (slab) =
[ 0.85 x f'c (girder) x β (girder) x beff ]
* lower flange
13,730 x 415
= = 318.7 mm
[ 0.85 x 38 x 0.7786 x 711.0 ]

-6
S = As fy (d - a/2) / 10 = 13,730 x 415 x ( 1,744 - 248.1 / 2 ) / 10-6 = 9,230 kN-m

[ As x fy - 0.85 x bw x β (girder) x f'c (girder) x ( beff - bw ) ]

C (girder) =
[ 0.85 x f'c (girder) x β (girder) x beff ]

[ 13,730 x 415 - 0.85 x 203 x 0.7786 x 38 x { 711.0 - 203 } ]

= = 608.1 mm
[ 0.85 x 38 x 0.7786 x 203 ]

a = β (girder) x C (girder) = 0.7786 x 608.1 = 473.5 mm

S = [ As x fy x ( d - a / 2 )
-6
+ 0.85 x f'c (girder) x ( beff - bw ) x β (girder) x ts x ( a / 2 - ts / 2 ) } / 10
= 13,730x 415 x ( 1,744 - 473.5 / 2 )
-6
+ 0.85 x 38 x ( 711.0 - 203 ) x 0.7786 x 203 x ( 473.5 / 2 - 203 / 2 ) } / 10
= 8,939 kN-m <== Governing Moment Capacity ( < 15,684 kN-m )

Moment Capacity at Pier Support

R = Φ x S = 0.9 x 8,939 = 8,045 kN-m

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

239
PCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 7 OF 15

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES
C.1.3 SHEAR CAPACITY AT MIDSPAN

The shear capacity of a section is addressed by the DPWH and AASHTO

Design Guidelines and Specifications. Shear capacity depends on the
cracking moment of the section. When the live load causes tension
at the bottom fiber, cracking moment is to be calculated based on
the bottom fiber stress. On the other hand, when the live load causes
tension at the top fiber of the beam, cracking moment is to be
calculated based on the top fiber stress.

At the midspan location, the moment reported with the maximum

live load shear is positive. Positive moments will induce tension at
the bottom fiber and thus cracking moment is to be based on the
stress at the bottom fiber.

The cracking moment

1/2
= ( Iz / Ybot ) x ( 0.5 f'c + fpe - fd )
= ( 0.217 / 0.812 ) x { 0.5 x sqrt ( 38 ) + 28.32 + ( -15.63 - 1.64 ) } x 1000
= 3775.4 kN-m

The factored total moment Mmax

Mmax = 1.3 MD + 1.3 x 1.67 x MLL+I
= 1.3 x (4173.5 + 594.7 ) + 1.3 x 1.67 x 2319.3
= 11231.6 kN-m

The factored shear

Vi = 1.3 VD + 1.3 x 1.67 x VLL+I

= 1.3 x (0.0 + 0.0 ) + 1.3 x 1.67 x 202.9
= 440.3 kN

Vci = 0.05 Sqrt(f'c) bw d + Vd + Vi Mcr / Mmax

= 0.05 Sqrt (38.00) ( 203 ) ( 1.700 ) + 0.0 + (440.3) (3,775.4 / 11,231.6)
= 254.4 KN

1/2
Vcw = ( 0.3 x f'c + 0.3 x fpc ) x bw x d + Vp
= [ { 0.3 x sqrt (24.2) + 0.3 x (6.69 + 2.63 + 0.0 ) } x 203 x 1700 ] / 1000
= 1,474.5 kN

The shear capacity of the concrete section

Vc = 254.4 kN ==>> Full Capacity

Vc' (reduced) = 0.8 x 254.4 = 204.2 KN ==>> Use 80% concrete capacity
due to shear cracks (40mm depth)
The shear capacity of the shear reinforcement
Stirrups :
Vs = 2 Av fy deff / S = 2 x ( 113.1 ) ( 415 ) ( 1.700 ) / (250) D12mm
= 637.8 KN A = 113.1 mm2

The total shear capacity becomes

Vu = (Vc + Vs) = 0.85 x ( 204.2 + 637.8 )

= 715.7 KN

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

240
PCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 8 OF 15

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES
C.1.3 SHEAR CAPACITY AT PIER SUPPORT

At the pier support location, the moment reported with the maximum
live load shear is negative. Negative moments will induce tension at
the top fiber and thus cracking moment is to be based on the
stress at the top fiber.

The cracking moment

1/2
= - ( Iz / Ybot ) x ( 0.5 f'c + fpe - fd )
= - ( 0.420 / 0.641 ) x { 0.5 x sqrt ( 24.2 ) + 0.0 + ( 0.0 - 1.21 ) } x 1000
= - 819.2 kN-m

The factored total moment Mmax

Mmax = 1.3 MD + 1.3 x 1.67 x MLL+I
= 1.3 x (0.0 - 792.9 ) + 1.3 x 1.67 x ( - 449.8 )
= - 2,006.8 kN-m

The factored shear

Vi = 1.3 VD + 1.3 x 1.67 x VLL+I

= 1.3 x ( - 477.0 - 135.9 ) + 1.3 x 1.67 x ( - 465.3 )
= - 1,806.4 kN

Vci = 0.05 Sqrt(f'c) bw d + Vd + Vi Mcr / Mmax

= 0.05 x sqrt (38) x 203 x 1.744 + ( - 477.0 - 135.9 ) + ( - 1806.4 ) x ( - 819.2 / - 2006.8 )
= 1,350.4 KN

1/2
Vcw = ( 0.3 x f'c + 0.3 x fpc ) x bw x d + Vp
= [ { 0.3 x sqrt (38) + 0.3 x (0.0 + 11.13 + 0.0 ) } x 203 x 1744 ] / 1000
= 1,836.5 kN

The shear capacity of the concrete section

Vc = 1,350.4 kN ==>> Full Capacity

Vc' (reduced) = 0.85 x 1350.4 = 1150.9 KN ==>> Use 85% concrete capacity
due to shear cracks (30mm depth)
The shear capacity of the shear reinforcement
Stirrups :
Vs = 2 Av fy deff / S = 2 x ( 113.1 ) ( 415 ) ( 1.744 ) / (150) D12mm
= 1,090.5 KN A = 113.1 mm2

The total shear capacity becomes

Vu = (Vc + Vs) = 0.85 x ( 1150.9 + 1090.5 )

= 1,905.1 KN

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

241
PCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 9 OF 15

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES
C.2 LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

C.2.1 Load Rating Based on Serviceability Limit State by ASM

Serviceability conditions are given in the AASHTO Design Specifications See Sect. 3.5
(Section 9.15) and the AASHTO MCEB Manual (Sec. 6.6.3.3) of this Manual

i. Using compressive stress under all load combination:

0.6 f'c - ( Fd + Fp + Fs ) This Manual

Location RF INV-COMALL = RF INV-COMALL
Fl Eq. 3.5-2

0.6 (38) - ( 15.80 + ( -7.13 ) + 0.00 )

At Midspan = = 5.52
2.56
0.6 (38) - ( 2.19 + 8.48 + 0.00 )
At Pier Support = = 1.59
7.65

ii. Using compressive stress of Live Load, half the prestressing and permanent dead load: This Manual
Eq. 3.5-3
0.4 f'c - 0.5 ( Fd + Fp + Fs )
Location RF INV-COMLIVE = RF INV-COMLIVE
Fl

0.4 (38) - 0.5 ( 15.80 + ( -7.13 ) + 0.00 )

At Midspan = = 4.24
2.56
0.4 (38) - 0.5 ( 2.19 + 8.48 + 0.00 )
At Pier Support = = 1.29
7.65

iii. Using allowable tension in concrete: This Manual

Eq. 3.5-1
1/2
0.5 f'c - ( Fd + Fp + Fs )
Location RF INV-COMLIVE = RF INV-COMLIVE
Fl

1/2
- 0.5 (38) - ( - 17.27 + 28.32 + 0.00 )
At Midspan = = 2.10
-6.74
1/2
- 0.5 (38) - ( - 0.83 + 12.13 + 0.00 )
At Pier Support = = 4.95
-2.91

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

242
PCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 10 OF 15

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES
C.2.2 Load Rating Based on Strength Limit State by LFM

The general expression for the Rating Factor is:

φ Rn - γD D where γD : 1.30
RF =
γL βL L ( 1 + I ) γL : 1.30
βL : 1.67 for inventory
βL : 1.00 for Operating

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS (LFM)

Location Description Inventory Rating (Tons) Operating Rating (Tons)

14284-1.3(4174+595) 14284-1.3(4174+595)
Moment = 1.53 = 2.55
1.3(1.67)(2441) 1.3(1.00)(2441)
Midspan
716-1.3(0+0) 716-1.3(0+0)
Shear = 1.63 = 2.71
1.3(1.67)(203) 1.3(1.00)(203)
-8045-1.3(0-793) -8045-1.3(0-793)
Moment = 1.17 = 1.95
1.3(1.67)(-2771) 1.3(1.00)(-2771)
At Support
-1905-1.3(-477-136) -1905-1.3(-477-136)
Shear = 1.10 = 1.83
1.3(1.67)(-465) 1.3(1.00)(-465)

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS (LFM)

(Rating Live Load = MS18, W = 33 Metric Tons)
Location Description Inventory Rating (Tons) Operating Rating (Tons)

Moment 1.53 x 33 = 50.4 2.55 x 33 = 84.1

Midspan
Shear 1.63 x 33 = 53.6 2.71 x 33 = 89.5

Moment 1.17 x 33 = 38.5 1.95 x 33 = 64.3

At Support
Shear 1.10 x 33 = 36.2 1.83 x 33 = 60.5

In this example, the Rating Factors (RF) for both the serviceability limit state and
the strength limit state are greater than one (RF >> 1) so that there is no need to
perform load posting calculations. Therefore, the bridge can safely carry the intended traffic loads.

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

243
PCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 11 OF 15

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES
D. LOAD POSTING UNDER SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD (ASM)
AND UNDER STRENGTH LIMIT STATE BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)

The procedure for load posting is similar to the above using load posting vehicles for live load.

D.1 DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

The live load moments and shears can be separately taken from conducting a structural analysis
corresponding to Types 1-1, 1-2 and 12-2 Posting Vehicles.

For 3-span continuous ([email protected]) bridge, the Posting Live Load demands are:

Vehicle Type LL Demand At Midspan At Pier Support

Type 1-1 822.1 -448.7
Moment Type 1-2 1219.9 -702.9
Type 12-2 1447.3 -934.3
Type 1-1 60.3 -123.2
Shear Type 1-2 85.5 -191.8
Type 12-2 84.1 -248.8

D.2 POSTING RATING BASED ON SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE by ASM

Similar calculations are done using Eqs. 3.5-2, 3.5-3 and 3.5-1 for rating factor and load rating

i. Using compressive stress under all load combination:

0.6 f'c - ( Fd + Fp + Fs ) This Manual

Location RF INV-COMALL = RF INV-COMALL
Fl Eq. 3.5-2

Type 0.6 (38) - ( 15.80 + ( -7.13 ) + 0.00 )

= = 16.38
1-1 0.86
At Midspan

Type 0.6 (38) - ( 15.80 + ( -7.13 ) + 0.00 )

= = 11.04
1-2 1.28

Type 0.6 (38) - ( 15.80 + ( -7.13 ) + 0.00 )

= = 9.31
12-2 1.52
Type 0.6 (38) - ( 2.19 + 8.48 + 0.00 )
= = 9.79
1-1 1.24
At Pier Support

Type 0.6 (38) - ( 2.19 + 8.48 + 0.00 )

= = 6.25
1-2 1.94

Type 0.6 (38) - ( 2.19 + 8.48 + 0.00 )

= = 4.70
12-2 2.58

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

244
PCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 12 OF 15

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES

ii. Using compressive stress of Live Load, half the prestressing and permanent dead load: This Manual
Eq. 3.5-3
0.4 f'c - 0.5 ( Fd + Fp + Fs )
Location RF INV-COMLIVE = RF INV-COMLIVE
Fl

Type 0.4 (38) - 0.5 ( 15.80 + ( -7.13 ) + 0.00 )

= = 12.60
1-1 0.86
At Midspan

Type 0.4 (38) - 0.5 ( 15.80 + ( -7.13 ) + 0.00 )

= = 8.49
1-2 1.28

Type 0.4 (38) - 0.5 ( 15.80 + ( -7.13 ) + 0.00 )

= = 7.16
12-2 1.52
Type 0.4 (38) - 0.5 ( 2.19 + 8.48 + 0.00 )
= = 7.96
1-1 1.24
At PierSupport

Type 0.4 (38) - 0.5 ( 2.19 + 8.48 + 0.00 )

= = 5.08
1-2 1.94

Type 0.4 (38) - 0.5 ( 2.19 + 8.48 + 0.00 )

= = 3.82
12-2 2.58

iii. Using allowable tension in concrete: This Manual

Eq. 3.5-1
1/2
0.5 f'c - ( Fd + Fp + Fs )
Location RF INV-COMLIVE = RF INV-COMLIVE
Fl

1/2
Type - 0.5 (38) - ( - 17.27 + 28.32 + 0.00 )
= = 6.23
1-1 -2.27
At Midspan

1/2
Type - 0.5 (38) - ( - 17.27 + 28.32 + 0.00 )
= = 4.20
1-2 -3.37

1/2
Type - 0.5 (38) - ( - 17.27 + 28.32 + 0.00 )
= = 3.54
12-2 -4.00
1/2
Type - 0.5 (38) - ( - 0.83 + 12.13 + 0.00 )
= = 30.54
1-1 -0.47
At Pier Support

1/2
Type - 0.5 (38) - ( - 0.83 + 12.13 + 0.00 )
= = 19.50
1-2 -0.74

1/2
Type - 0.5 (38) - ( - 0.83 + 12.13 + 0.00 )
= = 14.67
12-2 -0.98

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

245
PCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 13 OF 15

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES
D.3 Load Rating Based on Strength Limit State by LFM

Similar calculations are done same as section C.2.2

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS (LFM)

Location Description Inventory Rating (Tons) Operating Rating (Tons)

Type 14284-1.3(4174+595) 14284-1.3(4174+595)

= 4.53 = 7.57
1-1 1.3(1.67)(822) 1.3(1.00)(822)
At Midspan
Moment

Type 14284-1.3(4174+595) 14284-1.3(4174+595)

= 3.05 = 5.10
1-2 1.3(1.67)(1220) 1.3(1.00)(1220)

Type 14284-1.3(4174+595) 14284-1.3(4174+595)

= 2.57 = 4.30
12-2 1.3(1.67)(1447) 1.3(1.00)(1447)

Type 716-1.3(0+0) 716-1.3(0+0)

= 5.47 = 9.13
1-1 1.3(1.67)(60) 1.3(1.00)(60)
At Midspan

716-1.3(0+0) 716-1.3(0+0)
Shear

Type
= 3.86 = 6.44
1-2 1.3(1.67)(86) 1.3(1.00)(86)

Type 716-1.3(0+0) 716-1.3(0+0)

= 3.92 = 6.55
12-2 1.3(1.67)(84) 1.3(1.00)(84)

Type -8045-1.3(0-793) -8045-1.3(0-793)

= 7.20 = 12.02
1-1 1.3(1.67)(-449) 1.3(1.00)(-449)
At Pier Support
Moment

Type -8045-1.3(0-793) -8045-1.3(0-793)

= 4.60 = 7.68
1-2 1.3(1.67)(-703) 1.3(1.00)(-449)

Type -8045-1.3(0-793) -8045-1.3(0-793)

= 3.46 = 5.77
12-2 1.3(1.67)(-934) 1.3(1.00)(-449)

Type -1905-1.3(-477-136) -1905-1.3(-477-136)

= 4.15 = 6.92
1-1 1.3(1.67)(-123) 1.3(1.00)(-123)
At Pier Support

-1905-1.3(-477-136) -1905-1.3(-477-136)
Shear

Type
= 2.66 = 4.45
1-2 1.3(1.67)(-192) 1.3(1.00)(-192)

Type -1905-1.3(-477-136) -1905-1.3(-477-136)

= 2.05 = 3.43
12-2 1.3(1.67)(-249) 1.3(1.00)(-249)

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

246
PCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 14 OF 15

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES
LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS (LFM)
(Rating Live Load = MS18, W = 33 Metric Tons)
Location Description Inventory Rating (Tons) Operating Rating (Tons)

Type1-1 4.53 x 17 = 77.0 7.57 x 17 = 128.6

At Midspan
Moment

Type 1-2 3.05 x 27 = 82.5 5.10 x 27 = 137.7

Type 12-2 2.57 x 38 = 97.8 4.30 x 38 = 163.3

Type1-1 5.47 x 17 = 93.0 9.13 x 17 = 155.2

At Midspan
Shear

Type 1-2 3.86 x 27 = 104.2 6.44 x 27 = 173.9

Type 12-2 3.92 x 38 = 149.0 6.55 x 38 = 248.8

Type1-1 7.20 x 17 = 122.5 12.02 x 17 = 204.4

At Support
Moment

Type 1-2 4.60 x 27 = 124.2 7.68 x 27 = 207.3

Type 12-2 3.46 x 38 = 131.5 5.77 x 38 = 219.4

Type1-1 4.15 x 17 = 70.5 6.92 x 17 = 117.6

At Support
Shear

Type 1-2 2.66 x 27 = 71.9 4.45 x 27 = 120.0

Type 12-2 2.05 x 38 = 78.0 3.43 x 38 = 130.2

D. SUMMARY OF LOAD POSTING

The summary of calculation results for both the load factor and the allowable stress methods
are presented below.

SUMMARY OF RESULTS FOR LOAD POSTING

Vehicle
At Midspan At Support POSTING
Vehicle Type Weight Rating Load Rating Load (Metric
(Metric Tons)
Factor Rating Factor Rating Tons)

MS18 33.0 1.53 50.4 1.10 36.2 33

Type 1-1 17.0 4.53 77.0 4.15 70.5 17
Type 1-2 27.0 3.05 82.5 2.66 71.9 27
Type 12-2 38.0 2.57 97.8 2.05 78.0 38

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

247
PCDG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 15 OF 15

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : **** PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : PCDG CONTINUOUS

NOTES

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

248
 EXAMPLE 4
STEEL
I-GIRDER BRIDGE

Example 4-1: Simple

Example 4-2: Continuous

AII - 33

249
SIG SIMPLE Computer Based Calculation

INTERIOR SIG SIMPLE

A. GENERAL BACK TO MENU

A1. BRIDGE DESCRIPTION

Bridge Location REGION VII
Bridge Name MANANGA II Bridge
Bridge Simple or Continuous S Steel I-Girder Bridge
Type Number of Span 4
Bridge Width (curb to curb) (m) 7.32
Number of Lanes 2
Bridge Length (m) 35.000 35.000 35.000 35.000 =140.000m
Year Built 1970
Nos. of Girder 3 Multiple Girder composite for live load
Structure Girder Spacing (m) 3.200 on centers
Substructure RC Cantilever Abutments
Wearing thickness (mm) 50
Course material Asphalt
fc= 8.3 Mpa fs= 265.0 Mpa
Material Properties
f'c= 20.7 Mpa fy= 482.0 Mpa
Weight of barrier rail Wbr = 4.600 KN/m
Concrete Unit Weight Wu = 24.0 KN/m3
Assumption
Steel Girder Unit Weight Ws = 77.0 KN/m3
Asphalt Unit Weight Wa = 22.0 KN/m3
Others Rating Live Load is AASHTO MS18 (HS20-44)

NEXT

Year of fc or fs
Material f'c or fy
Construction Inventory Operating Posting
Prior to 1905 179.3 96.5 134.4 96.5
Structural 1905 to 1936 206.8 110.3 155.1 110.3
Steel
1936 to 1963 227.5 124.1 168.9 124.1
Bending
after 1963 248.2 137.9 186.2 137.9

Structural Prior to 1905 179.3 58.6 79.3 58.6

Steel 1905 to 1936 206.8 65.5 93.1 65.5
Web 1936 to 1963 227.5 75.8 103.4 75.8
Shear after 1963 248.2 82.7 110.3 82.7
Prior to 1954 227.5 124.1 172.4 124.1
after 1954 275.8 137.9 193.1 137.9
Rebar
Grade 50 344.7 189.8 224.1 137.9 *pc
Grade 60 413.7 227.5 248.2 165.5 *pc
Prior to 1959 17.2 6.9 10.3 6.9
after 1959 20.7 8.3 13.1 8.3
Concrete
1977 to 1981 27.6 11.0 16.5 11.0 *pc
after 1981 31.0 12.4 18.6 12.4 *pc

INTERIOR SIG SIMPLE

250 Sheet 1: GENERAL
A2. BRIDGE LAYOUT AND DIMENSION
35.00 m

0.18m thick Concrete Deck Slab

'A' 'B'
with 0.05m thick Asphalt Overlay

'C'
3.05m 7.10m 13.90m 7.10m 3.05m
ELEVATION
1.11 7.32m 1.11

1.00
0.25
0.18

1.80

1.385 0.37 2.83 0.37 2.83 0.37 1.385

1.57 3.20 3.20 1.57
TYPICAL SECTION

Asphalt Overlay 0.05 Asphalt Overlay 0.05 Asphalt Overlay 0.05

Deck Slab Deck Slab Deck Slab
0.24 0.18 0.28 0.18 0.30 0.18
0.010 0.019 0.022

0.009 0.009 1.80 0.009

1.80 1.80

0.010 0.022 0.025

0.28 0.28 0.37
SECTION 'A' SECTION 'B' SECTION 'C'

GIRDER SECTION
SECTION SECTION A (At Support) SECTION B (Dummy) SECTION C (At Midspan)
Location
0.010 1.000 17.500
(m)
Dimension b (m) h (m) b (m) h (m) b (m) h (m)
thickness = 0.180 m
Slab
0.320 0.180 0.320 0.180 0.320 0.180 *10 (Modular Ratio)
0.240 0.010 0.280 0.019 0.300 0.022
Uflg
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
0.009 1.800 0.009 1.800 0.009 1.800
Web
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
0.280 0.010 0.280 0.022 0.370 0.025
Lflg
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Length 6.100 14.200 13.900

NEXT

INTERIOR SIG SIMPLE

251 Sheet 2: LAYOUT
B. DEMAND FORCES
B.1 INPUT AND SECTION PROPERTIES

B0. INPUT
Slab thickness ts (m) 0.180
Slab width ws (m) 3.200
Span Length L(m) 35.000

B1. PROPERTIES OF STEEL GIRDER SECTIONS

(1) UNDER DEAD LOAD (NON-COMPOSIE GIRDER)
SECTION Total Area Web Area Iz (m4) Yb (m) Yt (m) Sxb (m3) Sxt (m3)
A (At Support) 0.02140 0.01620 0.00863 0.89308 0.92692 0.00966 0.00931
B (Dummy) 0.02768 0.01620 0.01387 0.89407 0.94693 0.01551 0.01464
C (At Midspan) 0.03205 0.01620 0.01737 0.84924 0.99776 0.02045 0.01741
(2) UNDER SUPERIMPOSED DEAD LOAD AND LIVE LOAD (COMPOSIE GIRDER)
A (At Support) 0.07900 0.01620 0.02492 1.63453 0.18547 0.01524 0.13435
B (Dummy) 0.08528 0.01620 0.03412 1.59443 0.24657 0.02140 0.13840
C (At Midspan) 0.08965 0.01620 0.04189 1.54813 0.29887 0.02706 0.14016

Standard Section Area of "SECTION A"

Original Section Area (m2) 0.0214

B.2 DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

B2. DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

Section A (At Support) 0.287
Section B (Dummy) 0.865
Self-weight of Girder
Section C (At Midspan) 0.980
Stiffener and Bracing 0.267
Slab Weight Continuous 13.824
Uniform Load per meter of Girder (KN/m)
Barrier Rail 3.067
Asphalt Overlay 3.520
Total Load 22.809
Total DeadLoad 16.223
Total Superimposed Dead Load 6.587
Moment (KN-m/m) MDL 2484.1
Dead Load
Shear (KN) VDL 283.9
Moment (KN-m/m) MDL 1008.6
Superimposed Dead Load
Shear (KN) VDL 115.3

NEXT

INTERIOR SIG SIMPLE

252 Sheet 3: DFDLLL
B3. LIVE LOAD CALCULATIONS

B3. LIVE-LOAD CALCULATIONS

LIVE-LOAD Type MS18(HS20)
Number of live load wheel line 1.750
INPUT FOR LIVE LOAD
Impact factor 0.209
span 35.00
without Impact ML 819.75
Max.MS18 moment for 35.00m span /wheel line
with Impact MLL 1733.65
Max.MS18 shear at a distance "d" without Impact VL 143.49
from the support/wheel line with Impact VLL 303.46

B4. LOAD DEMANDS ON DIFFERENT SECTIONS OF STEEL GIRDER

B4. LOAD DEMAND MIDSPAN AND SUPPORT OF STEEL GIRDER

At Support Section B (Dummy) At Midspan
Loading
0.01m 1.00m 17.50m
Dead load moments, KN-m 2.8 275.8 2484.1
Dead load shears, KN 283.7 267.7 0.0
SDL moments, KN-m 1.2 112.0 1008.58
SDL shears, KN 115.2 108.7 0.0
LL moment + Impact, KN-m 3.1 305.0 1733.6
LL shear + Impact, KN 314.7 305.0 118.7

B5. LOAD STRESS CALCULATIONS

ESTIMATED STRESS DEMANDS AT GIRDER SECTIONS

Loading Location At Support Section B (Dummy) At Midspan
Top 0.30 18.83 142.69
DL moment
Bottom -0.29 -17.78 -121.45
Top 0.01 0.81 7.20
SDL moment
Bottom -0.08 -5.23 -37.27
Top 0.02 2.20 12.37
LL+I moment, σLL+It
Bottom -0.21 -14.25 -64.07
DL shear, vDL 17.51 16.52 0.00
SDL shear, vSDL 7.11 6.71 0.00
LL+I shear, vLL+I 19.42 18.83 7.33

NEXT

INTERIOR SIG SIMPLE

253 Sheet 4: DSDLLL
C. LOAD RATING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD
C1. ALLOWABLE STRESS CALCULATIONS
C.1.1 ALLOWABLE STRESSES FOR CONCRETE AND STEEL
Allowable Stress fc 8.3
Concrete
Material Properties Strength f'c 20.7
(Mpa) Allowable Stress fs 265.0
Rebar
Strength fy 482.0
C.1.2 COMPRESSION AND TENSILE STRESSES
Inventory 265.0
Allowable compressive stress
Operating 361.5
Allowable tensile stress Inventory 265.0
C.1.3 ALLOWABLE SHEAR STRESS
Inventory 160.7
Allowable Shear Stress
Operating 216.9

C2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

C2.1 RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS USING ASM
Section Description Inventory Operating
Stress at Top Fiber 11301.38 15421.66
At
Stress at Bottom Fiber 1282.08 1749.61
Support
Shear 7.01 9.90
Stress at Top Fiber 111.34 155.14
B
Stress at Bottom Fiber 16.98 23.75
(Dummy)
Shear 7.30 10.29
Stress at Top Fiber 9.31 17.11
At
Stress at Bottom Fiber 1.66 3.17
Midspan
Shear 21.94 29.61

C2.2 LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

Rating Live Load (Metric Tons) 33.0
Section Description
Inventory Operating
At Moment 1282.08 42308.7 1749.61 57737.0
Support Shear 7.01 231.2 9.90 326.7
B Moment 16.98 560.4 23.75 783.9
(Dummy) Shear 7.30 241.0 10.29 339.5
At Moment 1.66 54.7 3.17 104.4
Midspan Shear 21.94 723.9 29.61 977.1

Depend on the minimum value of Rating Factor > 1 or <1 ,

instruction in the below cell is automatically shown
Return to GENERAL

Click following the above instruction

Return to GENERAL

Load Posting

INTERIOR SIG SIMPLE

254 Sheet 5: LRASM
D. LOAD POSTING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS (ASM)

D1. DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

D1.1 DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

(1) POSTING VEHICLE Type 1-1
LIVE-LOAD Type Type1-1
Number of live load wheel line 1.750
Impact factor 0.209
span 35.00
without Impact ML 695.45
Type 1-1 moment for 35.00m span /wheel line
with Impact MLL 1470.77
Type 1-1 shear at a distance "d" without Impact VL 80.64
from the support/wheel line with Impact VLL 170.54
(2) POSTING VEHICLE Type 1-2
LIVE-LOAD Type Type1-2
without Impact ML 1036.00
Type 1-2 moment for 35.00m span /wheel line
with Impact MLL 2190.98
Type 1-2 shear at a distance "d" without Impact VL 120.43
from the support/wheel line with Impact VLL 254.69
(3) POSTING VEHICLE Type 12-2
LIVE-LOAD Type Type12-2
without Impact ML 1261.27
Type 12-2 moment for 35.00m span /wheel line
with Impact MLL 2667.39
Type 12-2 shear at a distance "d" without Impact VL 144.01
from the support/wheel line with Impact VLL 304.56

D1.2 POSTING VEHICLE DEMAND FORCES AT MIDSPAN, SUPPORT

At B At
Posting Vehicle Demand Forces Support (Dummy) Midspan
0.01m 1.00m 17.50m
Moment 1.72 167.24 1470.77
Type 1-1
Shear 172.24 167.24 83.99
Moment 2.62 254.05 2190.98
Type 1-2
Shear 261.98 254.05 121.95
Moment 3.30 319.22 2667.39
Type 12-2
Shear 330.38 319.22 133.28

D1.3 POSTING VEHICLE DEMAND STRESSES AT MIDSPAN, SUPPORT

At B At
Posting Vehicle Demand Forces
Support (Dummy) Midspan
Top Fiber 0.01 1.21 10.49
Type 1-1 Bottom Fiber -0.11 -7.81 -54.35
Shear 10.63 10.32 5.18
Top Fiber 0.02 1.84 15.63
Type 1-2 Bottom Fiber -0.17 -11.87 -80.97
Shear 16.17 15.68 7.53
Top Fiber 0.02 2.31 19.03
Type 12-2 Bottom Fiber -0.22 -14.92 -98.58
Shear 20.39 19.70 8.23

NEXT

INTERIOR SIG SIMPLE

255 Sheet 6: POSTASM
E. POSTING LOAD RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS

E1. LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (1)

At Supprot B (Dummy) At Midspan
Posting Vehicle
Inventory Operating Inventory Operating Inventory Operating
Top Fiber 19138.80 26666.17 203.04 282.89 10.97 20.17
Type 1-1 Bott Fiber 2141.82 2995.94 30.97 43.32 1.96 3.73
Shear 12.80 18.08 13.32 18.76 31.00 41.84
Top Fiber 12582.61 17531.41 133.66 21.80 7.36 13.54
Type 1-2 Bott Fiber 1408.12 1969.65 20.39 28.51 1.31 2.50
Shear 8.41 11.89 8.77 12.35 21.35 28.81
Top Fiber 9977.65 13901.90 106.37 148.21 6.05 11.12
Type 12-2 Bott Fiber 1116.60 1561.88 16.22 22.69 1.08 2.06
Shear 6.67 9.43 6.98 9.83 19.53 26.36

E2. LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (2)

Vehicle Inventory Operating
Posting
Vehicle Weight
Moment Shear Moment Shear (Metric
Type (Metric
Tons)
Tons) RF LR RF LR RF LR RF LR
(1) AT SUPPORT
MS18 33.0 1,282.08 42308.7 7.01 231.2 1,749.61 57737.0 9.90 326.7 33
Type 1-1 17.0 2,141.82 36410.9 12.80 217.6 2,995.94 50931.0 18.08 307.4 17
Type 1-2 27.0 1,408.12 38019.1 8.41 227.2 1,969.65 53180.5 11.89 321.0 27
Type 12-2 38.0 1,116.60 42430.6 6.67 253.6 1,561.88 59351.3 9.43 358.3 38
(2) SECTION B (Dummy)
MS18 33.0 16.98 560.4 7.30 241.0 23.75 783.9 10.29 339.5 33
Type 1-1 17.0 30.97 526.4 13.32 226.4 43.32 736.4 18.76 318.9 17
Type 1-2 27.0 20.39 550.4 8.77 236.7 21.80 588.6 12.35 333.4 27
Type 12-2 38.0 16.22 616.5 6.98 265.1 22.69 862.3 9.83 373.5 38
(3) AT MIDSPAN
MS18 33.0 1.66 54.7 21.94 723.9 3.17 104.4 29.61 977.1 33
Type 1-1 17.0 1.96 33.2 31.00 526.9 3.73 63.4 41.84 711.2 17
Type 1-2 27.0 1.31 35.4 21.35 576.4 2.50 67.6 28.81 778.0 27
Type 12-2 38.0 1.08 41.0 19.53 742.2 2.06 78.2 26.36 1001.8 38
Load Posting
MS18 33T
Type 1-1 17T
LOAD Type 1-2 27T
38T
Type 12-2

17T
27T
38T END AND GO TO DECK SLAB

INTERIOR SIG SIMPLE

256 Sheet 7: POSTSUM
SIG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 1 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : SIG SIMPLE

A. GENERAL
A.1 BRIDGE DESCRIPTION

Bridge Location : REGION VII

Bridge Type : 1-Span Steel I-Girder
Br. Width / No. of Lanes : 7.32m curb to curb / Two-lanes
Bridge Length : 35.000 m (Back of backwall)
Year Built : 1970
Structure :
Girders : Multiple Girders (3-Girders) composite for live load
: Girder spacing at 3.20m on center
Substructure : RC Cantilever Abutments
Wearing Course : 50mm thick Asphalt Overlay
Material Properties : fc = 8.3 Mpa , fs = 265.0 Mpa
: f'c = 20.7 Mpa , fy = 482.0 Mpa
Assumption : Weight of barrier rail = 4.6 KN/m (Assumed including sidewalk,etc)
3
: Concrete unit weight = 24.0 KN/m
3
: Steel Girder unit weight = 77.0 KN/m
3
: Asphalt unit weight = 22.0 KN/m
Others : Rating Live Load is AASHTO MS18 (HS20-44)
Reqirement :
Determine the critical rating factor of the interior girder using ASM Method

A.2 BRIDGE LAYOUT AND SECTION

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

257
SIG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 2 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : SIG SIMPLE

B. DEMAND FORCES NOTES

B.1 SECTION PROPERTIES

The section properties of the steel I-girder on each section are calculated and given in the
table below:

A. UNDER DEAD LOAD (Non-composite Girder)

Total AREA Web AREA Iz Yb Yt SBOT STOP

SECTION
(m2) (m2) (m4) (m) (m) (m ) 3
(m3)
A 0.02140 0.01620 0.00863 0.89308 0.92692 0.00966 0.00931
B 0.02768 0.01620 0.01387 0.89407 0.94693 0.01551 0.01464
C 0.03205 0.01620 0.01737 0.84924 0.99776 0.02045 0.01741

B. UNDER SUPERIMPOSED DEAD LOAD AND LIVE LOAD (Composite Girder)

Total AREA Web AREA Iz Yb Yt SBOT STOP

SECTION
(m2) (m2) (m4) (m) (m) (m3) (m3)
A 0.07900 0.01620 0.02492 1.63453 0.18547 0.01524 0.13435
B 0.08528 0.01620 0.03412 1.59443 0.24657 0.02140 0.13840
C 0.08965 0.01620 0.04189 1.54813 0.29887 0.02706 0.14016

B.2 DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

The dead loads considered in the calculations include (1) Girder self-weight,
(2) Tributary area of slab, (3) Barrier rails (Assumed to be equally distributed among girders).
(4) Wearing course.

Self-weight of girder = (0.02140 Sq.m.) x (6.10m) x 77 / 35.000 m = 0.287 KN/m

= (0.02768 Sq.m.) x (14.20m) x 77 / 35.000 m = 0.865 KN/m
= (0.03205 Sq.m.) x (13.90m) x 77 / 35.000 m = 0.980 KN/m
= (0.287 + 0.865 + 0.980) x 15% = 0.267 KN/m
3
Slab Weight (Tributary) = (0.18m) (3.20m) (24 KN/m ) = 13.824 KN/m
Barrier rail = 2( 4.6 /3) = 3.067 KN/m
Wearing course = (0.05m) (3.20m) (22 KN/m3) = 3.520 KN/m
Total Uniform Load of Girder, w = 22.809 KN/m
Total Uniform Dead Load of Girder, wDL = 16.223 KN/m
Total Uniform Superimposed Dead Load of Girder, wSDL = 6.587 KN/m

2
Dead Load Moment at Midspan, MDL = 16.223 x 35.00 /8 = 2484.1 KN-m

2
Superimposed Dead Load Moment = 6.587 x 35.00 /8 = 1008.6 KN-m
at Midspan, MSDL

Dead Load Shear at support, VDL = 16.223 x 35.00 / 2 = 283.9 KN

Superimposed Dead Load Shear at support, VSDL = 6.587 x 35.00 / 2 = 115.3 KN

WDL = 16.223 kN/m WSDL = 6.587 kN/m

35.000 m

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

258
SIG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 3 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : SIG SIMPLE

NOTES

B.3 LIVE LOAD CALCULATIONS

The carriageway width is 7.35m curb to curb. Thus, the bridge can carry 2-lanes of traffic.

The distribution of wheel loads for two traffic lanes shall be taken as S/1.676

Number of live load wheel line = 3.20 / 1.829 = 1.750

Impact factor, I = 15.24 / (35.00 + 38.00) = 0.209

The live load moments and shear values are taken from the tables in Appendix III on this manual
and are used to determine the live load demand forces.

Max. MS18 moment for 35.00 m = 819.80 KN-m

span without impact/whel line

Thus, MS18 moment with MLL = 1.750 1.209 (819.80) = 1733.75 KN-m
Impact at midspan

Max. MS18 shear at the support/wheel line = 143.50 KN

Thus, MS18 shear VLL = 1.750 1.209 (143.50) = 303.48 KN

B.4 LOAD DEMANDS ON DIFFERENT SECTIONS OF STEEL GIRDER

ESTIMATED LOAD DEMANDS AT GIRDER SECTIONS (MS18)

At Support Sect. B (Dummy) At Midspan
LOADING
0.01 m 1.00 m 17.50 m
Dead load moment, kN-m 2.8 275.8 2484.1
Dead load shear, kN 283.7 267.7 0.0
SDL moment, kN-m 1.2 112.0 1008.6
SDL shear, kN 115.2 108.7 0.0
LL Moment + Impact, kN-m 3.1 305.0 1733.6
LL Shear + Impact, kN 314.7 305.0 118.7

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

259
SIG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 4 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : SIG SIMPLE

NOTES
B.5 LOAD STRESS CALCULATIONS

The resulting stresses due to bending and shear are calculated using the given load
demands and the appropriate section properties at given section locations under
consideration. The stress results are shown in the table below.

Estimated Stress Demands at Girder Sections In Mpa

At Support Sect. B (Dummy) At Midspan
LOADING
0.01 m 1.00 m 17.50 m
Dead Load Moment, Top 0.30 18.84 142.69
Dead Load Moment, Bottom -0.29 -17.78 -121.47
SDL Moment, Top 0.01 0.81 7.20
SDL Moment, Bottom -0.08 -5.23 -37.27
Live Load Moment, Top 0.02 2.20 12.37
Live Load Moment, Bottom -0.20 -14.25 -64.07
Dead Load Shear 17.51 16.52 0.00
SDL Shear 7.11 6.71 0.00
Live Load Shear 19.43 18.83 7.33
-ve : tension
+ve : compression

C. LOAD RATING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD (ASM)

C.1 ALLOWABLE STRESS CALCULATIONS

C.1.1 Allowable Stresses for Concrete and Steel

The actual material properties for concrete and steel can be obtained from as-built plans.

Concrete : f'c = fc / 0.40 = 8.3 / 0.4 = 20.7 Mpa

(fc = 8.27 Mpa) (After 1959, f'c= 20.7 Mpa)

Steel : fs = 265.0 Mpa => fy = 482.0 Mpa

C.1.2 Compression and Tensile Stresses

Note that the section is fully braced at this location.

i. Allowable compressive stress at inventory 0.55 fy = 265.0 Mpa

ii. Allowable comp./tensile stress at operating 0.75 fy = 361.5 Mpa

iii. Allowable tensile stress at inventory 0.55 fy = 265.0 Mpa

C.1.3 Allowable Shear Stress

i. Allowable shear stress at inventory fy/3 = 160.7 Mpa

ii. Allowable shear stress at operating (0.45 fy) = 216.9 Mpa

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

260
SIG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 5 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : SIG SIMPLE

NOTES
C.2 LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

The rating factor (RF) in the Allowable Stress Method (ASD) is given by:

RF = R - A1 D Where : A1 = 1.0
A2 L (1 + I) A2 = 1.0

and substituting the values will give us the results as presented in the table
below:

RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS USING ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD

Section Description INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING
Stress at top 265.0 - 0.31 361.5 - 0.31
= 13234.50 = 18059.50
Fiber 0.02 0.02

At Stress at Bot -265.0 - -0.37 -361.5 - -0.37

= 1260.14 = 1719.67
Support Fiber -0.21 -0.21

Shear 160.7 - 24.62 216.9 - 24.62

= 7.01 = 9.90
19.42 19.42
Stress at top 265.0 - 19.64 361.5 - 19.64
= 111.53 = 155.39
Fiber 2.20 2.20

Sect. B Stress at Bot -265.0 - -23.01 -361.5 - -23.01

= 16.98 = 23.75
Dummy Fiber -14.25 -14.25

Shear 160.7 - 23.23 216.9 - 23.23

= 7.30 = 10.29
18.83 18.83
Stress at top 265.0 - 149.89 361.5 - 149.89
= 9.31 = 17.11
Fiber 12.37 12.37

At Stress at Bot -265.0 - -158.72 -361.5 - -158.72

= 1.66 = 3.16
Midspan Fiber -64.07 -64.07

Shear 160.7 - 0.00 216.9 - 0.00

= 21.92 = 29.59
7.33 7.33

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

(Rating Live Load = MS18 W=33 Metric Tons
Section Description INVENTORY RATING (Tons) OPERATING RATING (Tons)

At Moment 1260.14 x 33 = 41584.7 1719.67 x 33 = 56749.0

Support Shear 7.01 x 33 = 231.2 9.90 x 33 = 326.7
Sect. B Moment 16.98 x 33 = 560.4 23.75 x 33 = 783.9
Dummy Shear 7.30 x 33 = 240.9 10.29 x 33 = 339.4
At Moment 1.66 x 33 = 54.7 3.16 x 33 = 104.4
Midspan Shear 21.92 x 33 = 723.5 29.59 x 33 = 976.5

Rating Factors at sections At Support, Sect. B, and At Midspan have values over than 1,
thus Posting Loads is not necessary.

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

261
SIG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 6 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : SIG SIMPLE

NOTES

D. LOAD POSTING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD (ASM)

The procedure for load posting is similar to the above using load posting vehicles for
live load. Posting live loads Type 1-1, Type 1-2 and Type 12-2 will be used as live load
vehicles.

D.1 DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

The demand forces are calculated based on the Appendix III of the Manual using
the Type 1-1, 1-2 and 12-2 posting vehicles.

POSTING VEHICLE DEMAND FORCES AT SECTIONS AT SUPPORT, SECT. B AND AT MIDSPAN

TYPE 1-1 TYPE 1-2 TYPE 12-2

Demand
At SECT. B At At SECT. B At At SECT. B At
Forces
Support Dummy Midspan Support Dummy Midspan Support Dummy Midspan

Moment
1.72 167.24 1470.77 2.62 254.05 2190.98 3.30 319.22 2667.39
(kN-m)
Shear
172.24 167.24 83.99 261.98 254.05 121.95 330.38 319.22 133.28
(kN)
DF = 1.750 I = 1.209

The stress demands corresponding to the above forces are calculated and tabulated
below:
(In Mpa)
TYPE 1-1 TYPE 1-2 TYPE 12-2
Demand
At SECT. B At At SECT. B At At SECT. B At
Forces
Support Dummy Midspan Support Dummy Midspan Support Dummy Midspan
Top
0.01 1.21 10.49 0.02 1.84 15.63 0.02 2.31 19.03
Fiber
Bottom
-0.11 -7.81 -54.35 -0.17 -11.87 -80.97 -0.22 -14.92 -98.57
Fiber

Shear 10.63 10.32 5.18 16.17 15.68 7.53 20.39 19.70 8.23

-ve : tension +ve : compression

Using the capacities and dead load demand stresses calculated, the load posting
values are obtained by substituting the posting live load stress demands in the rating
equation.

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

262
SIG SIMPLE Manual Calculation 7 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : SIG SIMPLE

NOTES

E. LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS

LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS
AT SUPPORT
Vehicle INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING Posting
Vehicle Weight Moment Shear Moment Shear (Metric
Type (Metric Tons)
RF LR RF LR RF LR RF LR
Tons)

MS18 33.0 1282 42306 7.01 231.2 1750 57750 9.90 326.7 33

Type 1-1 17.0 2142 36414 12.80 217.6 2996 50932 18.08 307.36 17

Type 1-2 27.0 1408 38016 8.41 227.1 1970 53190 11.89 321.03 27

Type 12-2 38.0 1117 42446 6.67 253.5 1562 59356 9.43 358.34 38

LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS

SECTION "B" (DUMMY)
Vehicle INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING Posting
Vehicle Weight Moment Shear Moment Shear (Metric
Type (Metric Tons)
RF LR RF LR RF LR RF LR
Tons)

MS18 33.0 16.98 560.4 7.30 240.9 23.75 783.87 10.29 339.41 33

Type 1-1 17.0 30.97 526.5 13.32 226.4 43.32 736.44 18.76 318.92 17

Type 1-2 27.0 20.39 550.5 8.77 236.8 21.80 588.6 12.35 333.45 27

Type 12-2 38.0 16.22 616.4 6.98 265.2 22.69 862.22 9.83 373.54 38

LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS

SECTION "C"
Vehicle INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING Posting
Vehicle Weight Moment Shear Moment Shear (Metric
Type (Metric Tons)
RF LR RF LR RF LR RF LR
Tons)

MS18 33.0 1.66 54.7 21.94 724.0 3.17 104.6 29.61 977.13 33

Type 1-1 17.0 1.96 33.3 31.00 527.0 3.73 63.4 41.84 711.28 17

Type 1-2 27.0 1.31 35.4 21.35 576.5 2.50 67.5 28.81 777.87 27

Type 12-2 38.0 1.08 41.0 19.53 742.1 2.06 78.3 26.36 1001.7 38

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

263
SIG CONTINUOUS Computer Based Calculation

INTERIOR SIG CONTINUOUS

A. GENERAL BACK TO MENU

A1. BRIDGE DESCRIPTION

Bridge Location REGION
Bridge Name
Bridge Simple or Continuous C Steel I-Girder Bridge
Type Number of Span 2
Bridge Width (curb to curb) (m) 24.00
Number of Lanes 6
Bridge Length (m) 27.000 27.000 =54.000m
Year Built 1967
Nos. of Girder 13 Multiple Girder composite for live load
Structure Girder Spacing (m) 2.020 on centers
Substructure Wall Type RC Pier and RC Cantilever Abutments
Wearing thickness (mm) 50
Course material Asphalt
fc= 8.3 Mpa fs= 137.9 Mpa
Material Properties
f'c= 20.7 Mpa fy= 248.2 Mpa
Weight of barrier rail Wbr = 3.600 KN/m
Concrete Unit Weight Wu = 24.0 KN/m3
Assumption
Steel Girder Unit Weight Ws = 77.0 KN/m3
Asphalt Unit Weight Wa = 22.0 KN/m3
Others Rating Live Load is AASHTO MS18 (HS20-44)

NEXT

Year of fc or fs
Material f'c or fy
Construction Inventory Operating Posting
Prior to 1905 179.3 96.5 134.4 96.5
Structural 1905 to 1936 206.8 110.3 155.1 110.3
Steel
1936 to 1963 227.5 124.1 168.9 124.1
Bending
after 1963 248.2 137.9 186.2 137.9

Structural Prior to 1905 179.3 58.6 79.3 58.6

Steel 1905 to 1936 206.8 65.5 93.1 65.5
Web 1936 to 1963 227.5 75.8 103.4 75.8
Shear after 1963 248.2 82.7 110.3 82.7
Prior to 1954 227.5 124.1 172.4 124.1
after 1954 275.8 137.9 193.1 137.9
Rebar
Grade 50 344.7 189.8 224.1 137.9 *pc
Grade 60 413.7 227.5 248.2 165.5 *pc
Prior to 1959 17.2 6.9 10.3 6.9
after 1959 20.7 8.3 13.1 8.3
Concrete
1977 to 1981 27.6 11.0 16.5 11.0 *pc
after 1981 31.0 12.4 18.6 12.4 *pc

INTERIOR SIG CONTINUOUS

264 Sheet 1: GENERAL
A2. BRIDGE LAYOUT AND SECTION

24.0m

GIRDER SECTION
SECTION SECTION A (At Pier) SECTION B (Dummy) SECTION C (At Midspan)
Location
0.010 1.000 13.500
(m)
Dimension b (m) h (m) b (m) h (m) b (m) h (m)
thickness = 0.170 m
Slab
0.202 0.170 0.202 0.170 0.202 0.170 *10 (Modular Ratio)
0.300 0.062 0.300 0.029 0.300 0.022
Uflg
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
0.010 0.810 0.010 0.810 0.010 0.810
Web
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
0.300 0.062 0.300 0.032 0.300 0.051
Lflg
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Length 2.700 2.700 16.200

NEXT

INTERIOR SIG CONTINUOUS

265 Sheet 2: LAYOUT
B. DEMAND FORCES
B.1 INPUT AND SECTION PROPERTIES
B0. INPUT
Slab thickness ts (m) 0.170
Slab width ws (m) 2.020
Span Length L(m) 27.000

B1. PROPERTIES OF STEEL GIRDER SECTIONS

(1) UNDER DEAD LOAD (NON-COMPOSIE GIRDER)
SECTION Total Area Web Area Iz (m4) Yb (m) Yt (m) Sxb (m3) Sxt (m3)
A (At Pier) 0.04490 0.00770 0.00750 0.46700 0.46700 0.01607 0.01607
B (Dummy) 0.02600 0.00770 0.00365 0.42192 0.44908 0.00865 0.00813
C (At Midspan) 0.02960 0.00770 0.00390 0.32621 0.55679 0.01197 0.00701
(2) UNDER SUPERIMPOSED DEAD LOAD AND LIVE LOAD (COMPOSIE GIRDER)
A (At Pier) 0.07924 0.00770 0.01352 0.70623 0.22777 0.01914 0.05934
B (Dummy) 0.06034 0.00770 0.00795 0.72590 0.14510 0.01095 0.05480
C (At Midspan) 0.06394 0.00770 0.01053 0.67092 0.21208 0.01570 0.04967

Standard Section Area of "SECTION A"

Original Section Area (m2) 0.0449

B.2 LOAD DEMAND CALCULATIONS

B2.1 DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

Section A (At Pier) 0.691
Section B (Dummy) 0.400
Self-weight of Girder
Section C (At Midspan 1.367
Stiffener and Bracing 0.307
Slab Weight Continuous 8.242
Uniform Load per meter of Girder (KN/m)
Barrier Rail 0.554
Asphalt Overlay 2.222
Total Load 13.784
Total DeadLoad 11.008
Total Superimposed Dead Load 2.776

B2.2 LOAD DEMAND MIDSPAN AND SUPPORT OF STEEL GIRDER

Conducting a Structural Analysis, the load demands for the SPG should be obtained
separately and input the necessary load demands in the Table below.
At Midspan At Pier Support
Description
10.8 m 27.0 m
Dead load moments, KN-m 546.52 -1016.85
Dead load shears, KN -4.24 -184.41
Additional Dead load moments, KN-m 27.65 -51.45
Additional Dead load shears, KN -0.21 -9.93
MS18 max. positive moment, KN-m 1060.52 0.00
MS18 max. negative moment, KN-m -273.15 -957.00
MS18 max. positive shear force, KN 83.28 0.00
MS18 max. negative shear force, KN -84.40 -198.35

NEXT

INTERIOR SIG CONTINUOUS

266 Sheet 3: DFDLLL
B3. LOAD STRESS CALCULATIONS

B1. PROPERTIES OF STEEL GIRDER SECTIONS

(1) At Midspan
Total Area Web Area Iz (m4) Yb (m) Yt (m) Sxb (m3) Sxt (m3)
For Dead Load 0.02960 0.00770 0.00390 0.32621 0.55679 0.01197 0.00701
For Add.DL
0.06394 0.00770 0.01053 0.67092 0.21208 0.01570 0.04967
and Live Load
(2) At Pier Support
For Dead Load 0.04490 0.00770 0.00750 0.46700 0.46700 0.01607 0.01607
For Add.DL
0.07924 0.00770 0.01352 0.70623 0.22777 0.01914 0.05934
and Live Load

ESTIMATED STRESS DEMANDS AT GIRDER SECTIONS

Loading Location At Midspan At Pier Support
Top 77.95 -63.28
DL moment
Bottom -45.67 63.28
Top 0.56 -0.87
SDL moment
Bottom -1.76 2.69
Top 21.35 -16.13
LL+I moment, σLL+It
Bottom -67.55 50.01
DL shear, vDL 0.55 23.96
SDL shear, vSDL 0.03 1.29
LL+I shear, vLL+I 10.82 25.78

NEXT

INTERIOR SIG CONTINUOUS

267 Sheet 4: DSDLLL
C. LOAD RATING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD
C1. ALLOWABLE STRESS CALCULATIONS
C.1.1 ALLOWABLE STRESSES FOR CONCRETE AND STEEL
Allowable Stress fc 8.3
Concrete
Material Properties Strength f'c = fc/0.4 20.7
(Mpa) Allowable Stress fs 137.9
Rebar
Strength fy = fs/0.55 248.2
C.1.2 COMPRESSION AND TENSILE STRESSES
Inventory 137.9
Allowable compressive stress
Operating 186.2
Allowable tensile stress Inventory 137.9
C.1.3 ALLOWABLE SHEAR STRESS
Inventory fy/3 82.7
Allowable Shear Stress
Operating 0.45fy 110.3

C2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

C2.1 RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS USING ASM
Section Description Inventory Operating
Stress at Top Fiber 2.78 5.04
At
Stress at Bottom Fiber 1.34 2.05
Midspan
Shear 7.59 10.14
At Stress at Top Fiber 4.57 7.57
Pier Stress at Bottom Fiber 1.44 2.40
Support Shear 2.23 3.30

C2.2 LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

Rating Live Load (Metric Tons) 33.0
Section Description
Inventory Operating
At Moment 1.34 44.2 2.05 67.8
Midspan Shear 7.59 250.4 10.14 334.6
At Moment 1.44 47.5 2.40 79.3
Pier
Support Shear 2.23 73.5 3.30 108.9

Depend on the minimum value of Rating Factor > 1 or <1 ,

instruction in the below cell is automatically shown
Return to GENERAL

Click following the above instruction

Return to GENERAL

Load Posting

INTERIOR SIG CONTINUOUS

268 Sheet 5: LRASM
D. LOAD POSTING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)

D1. DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

D1.2 POSTING VEHICLE DEMAND FORCES

Conducting a Structural Analysis, the load demands for the SPG should be obtained
separately and input the necessary load demands in the Table below.
Posting Vehicle Demand Forces At Midspan At Pier Support
Moment 657.5 -593.3
Type 1-1
Shear 45.8 -109.1
Moment 869.3 -784.7
Type 1-2
Shear 65.0 -154.7
Moment 859.0 -775.2
Type 12-2
Shear 64.1 -152.7

D1.3 POSTING VEHICLE DEMAND STRESSES

Posting Vehicle Demand Forces At Midspan At Pier Support
Top Fiber 13.24 -10.00
Type 1-1 Bottom Fiber -41.88 31.00
Shear 5.95 14.18
Top Fiber 17.50 -13.22
Type 1-2 Bottom Fiber -55.37 41.00
Shear 8.45 20.10
Top Fiber 17.29 -13.06
Type 12-2 Bottom Fiber -54.71 40.51
Shear 8.33 19.84

NEXT

INTERIOR SIG CONTINUOUS

269 Sheet 6: POSTASM
E. LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS

E1. LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (1)

At Midspan At Pier Support
Posting Vehicle
Inventory Operating Inventory Operating
Top Fiber 4.49 8.13 7.38 12.21
Type 1-1 Bottom Fiber 2.16 3.31 2.32 3.88
Shear 13.80 18.43 4.05 6.00
Top Fiber 3.39 6.15 5.58 9.23
Type 1-2 Bottom Fiber 1.63 2.51 1.75 2.93
Shear 9.72 12.99 2.86 4.23
Top Fiber 3.43 6.23 5.65 9.34
Type 12-2 Bottom Fiber 1.65 2.54 1.78 2.97
Shear 9.86 13.17 2.89 4.29

E2. LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (2)

Vehicle Inventory Operating
Posting
Vehicle Weight
Moment Shear Moment Shear (Metric
Type (Metric
Tons)
Tons) RF LR RF LR RF LR RF LR
(1) SECTION A
MS18 33.0 1.34 44.2 7.59 250.4 2.05 67.8 10.14 334.6 33
Type 1-1 17.0 2.16 36.7 13.80 234.6 3.31 56.3 18.43 313.4 17
Type 1-2 27.0 1.63 44.1 9.72 262.5 2.51 67.7 12.99 350.7 27
Type 12-2 38.0 1.65 62.8 9.86 374.6 2.54 96.4 13.17 500.5 38
(2) SECTION B
MS18 33.0 1.44 47.5 2.23 73.5 2.40 79.3 3.30 108.9 33
Type 1-1 17.0 2.32 39.4 4.05 68.9 3.88 65.9 6.00 102.0 17
Type 1-2 27.0 1.75 47.4 2.86 77.1 2.93 79.2 4.23 114.2 27
Type 12-2 38.0 1.78 67.5 2.89 110.0 2.97 112.8 4.29 162.9 38
Load Posting
MS18 33T
Type 1-1 17T
Type 1-2 27T
LOAD Type 12-2 38T

17T
27T
38T

END AND GO TO DECK SLAB

INTERIOR SIG CONTINUOUS

270 Sheet 7: POSTSUM
SIG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 1 OF 8

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : SIG CONTINUOUS

A. GENERAL
A.1 BRIDGE DESCRIPTION

Bridge Location : Region VII

Bridge Type : 2-Span Steel I-Girder
Br. Width / No. of Lanes : 24.0m curb to curb / Six-lanes
Bridge Length : 27.0m + 27.0m = 54.0m
Year Built : 1967
Structure :
Girders : Multiple Girders (13-Girders) composite for live load
: Girder spacing at 2.020m on center
Substructure : Wall Type RC Pier and RC Cantilever Abutments
Wearing Course : 50mm thick Asphalt Overlay
Material Properties : fc = 8.3 Mpa , fs = 137.9 Mpa
: f'c = 20.7 Mpa , fy = 248.2 Mpa
Assumption : Weight of barrier rail = 3.600 KN/m (Assumed including sidewalk,etc)
3
: Concrete unit weight = 24.0 KN/m
3
: Steel Girder unit weight = 77.0 KN/m
3
: Asphalt unit weight = 22.0 KN/m
Others : Rating Live Load is AASHTO MS18 (HS20-44)
Reqirement :
Determine the critical rating factor of the interior girder using ASM Method

A.2 BRIDGE LAYOUT AND SECTION

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

271
SIG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 2 OF 8

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : SIG CONTINUOUS

B. DEMAND FORCES NOTES

B.1 SECTION PROPERTIES

The section properties of the steel I-girder on each section are calculated and given in the
table below:

A. UNDER DEAD LOAD (Non-composite Girder)

Total AREA Web AREA Iz Yb Yt SBOT STOP

SECTION
(m2) (m2) (m4) (m) (m) 3
(m ) (m3)
A 0.04490 0.00770 0.00750 0.46700 0.46700 0.01607 0.01607
B 0.02600 0.00770 0.00365 0.42192 0.44908 0.00865 0.00813
C 0.02960 0.00770 0.00390 0.32621 0.55679 0.01197 0.00701

B. UNDER SUPERIMPOSED DEAD LOAD AND LIVE LOAD (Composite Girder)

Total AREA Web AREA Iz Yb Yt SBOT STOP

SECTION
(m2) (m2) (m4) (m) (m) (m3) (m3)
A 0.07924 0.00770 0.01352 0.70623 0.22777 0.01914 0.05934
B 0.06034 0.00770 0.00795 0.72590 0.14510 0.01095 0.05480
C 0.06394 0.00770 0.01053 0.67092 0.21208 0.01570 0.04967

B.2.1 DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

The dead loads considered in the calculations include (1) Girder self-weight,
(2) Tributary area of slab, (3) Barrier rails (Assumed to be equally distributed among girders).
(4) Wearing course.

Self-weight of girder = (0.04490 Sq.m.) x 2 x 2.7 x 77 / 27.00 m = 0.691 KN/m

= (0.02600 Sq.m.) x 2 x 2.7 x 77 / 27.00 m = 0.400 KN/m
= (0.02960 Sq.m.) x (16.20m) x 77 / 27.00 m = 1.367 KN/m
= (0.691 + 0.400 + 1.367) x 12.5% = 0.307 KN/m
3
Slab Weight (Tributary) = (0.17m) (2.02m) (24 KN/m ) = 8.242 KN/m
Barrier rail = 2( 3.6 /13) = 0.554 KN/m
3
Wearing course = (0.05m) (2.02m) (22 KN/m ) = 2.222 KN/m
Total Uniform Load of Girder, w = 13.784 KN/m
Total Uniform Dead Load of Girder, wDL = 11.008 KN/m
Total Uniform Superimposed Dead Load of Girder, wSDL = 2.776 KN/m

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

272
SIG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 3 OF 8

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : SIG CONTINUOUS

NOTES

B.2.2 LOAD DEMAND CALCULATIONS AT MIDSPAN AND SUPPORT

The carriageway width is 7.35m curb to curb. Thus, the bridge can carry 2-lanes of traffic.

The distribution of wheel loads for two traffic lanes shall be taken as S/1.676

Number of live load wheel line = 2.02 / 1.829 = 1.104

Impact factor, I = 15.24 / (27.00 + 38.00) = 0.234

Conducting a Structural Analysis, the load demands for the SIG Continuous should be obtained
separately and input the necessary lo

At Midspan At Pier Support

Description
10.8 m 27.0 m
Dead load moments, KN-m 546.52 -1016.85
Dead load shears, KN -4.24 -184.41
Additional Dead load moments, KN-m 27.65 -51.45
Additional Dead load shears, KN -0.21 -9.93
MS18 max. positive moment, KN-m 1060.52 0.00
MS18 max. negative moment, KN-m -273.15 -957.00
MS18 max. positive Shear force, KN 83.28 0.00
MS18 max. negative Shear force, KN -84.40 -198.35

B.3 LOAD STRESS CALCULATIONS

B.3.1 Properties at Midspan and Pier Support

AT MIDSPAN

Total AREA Web AREA Iz Yb Yt SBOT STOP

(m2) (m2) (m4) (m) (m) (m3) (m3)
For Dead
0.02960 0.00770 0.00390 0.32621 0.55679 0.01197 0.00701
Load
For Add. DL
0.06394 0.00770 0.01053 0.67092 0.21208 0.01570 0.04967
/ Live Load

AT PIER SUPPORT

Total AREA Web AREA Iz Yb Yt SBOT STOP

(m2) (m2) (m4) (m) (m) (m3) (m3)
For Dead
0.04490 0.00770 0.00750 0.46700 0.46700 0.01607 0.01607
Load
For Add. DL
0.07924 0.00770 0.01352 0.70623 0.22777 0.01914 0.05934
/ Live Load

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

273
SIG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 4 OF 8

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : SIG CONTINUOUS

NOTES
B.4 LOAD STRESS CALCULATIONS

The resulting stresses due to bending and shear are calculated using the given load
demands and the appropriate section properties at given section locations under
consideration. The stress results are shown in the table below.

Estimated Stress Demands at Girder Sections In Mpa

At Midspan At Pier Support
LOADING
10.80 m 27.00 m
Dead Load Moment, Top 77.95 -63.28
Dead Load Moment, Bottom -45.67 63.28
SDL Moment, Top 0.56 -0.87
SDL Moment, Bottom -1.76 2.69
Live Load Moment, Top 21.35 -16.13
Live Load Moment, Bottom -67.55 50.01
Dead Load Shear 0.55 23.96
SDL Shear 0.03 1.29
Live Load Shear 10.82 25.78
-ve : tension
+ve : compression

C. LOAD RATING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD (ASM)

C.1 ALLOWABLE STRESS CALCULATIONS

C.1.1 Allowable Stresses for Concrete and Steel

Concrete : f'c = fc / 0.40 = 8.3 / 0.4 = 20.7 Mpa

(fc = 8.27 Mpa) (After 1959, f'c= 20.7 Mpa)

Steel : fs = 137.9 Mpa => fy = 248.2 Mpa

(after 1963)

C.1.2 Compression and Tensile Stresses

Note that the section is fully braced at this location.

i. Allowable compressive stress at inventory 0.55 fy = 137.9 Mpa

ii. Allowable comp./tensile stress at operating 0.75 fy = 186.2 Mpa

iii. Allowable tensile stress at inventory 0.55 fy = 137.9 Mpa

C.1.3 Allowable Shear Stress

i. Allowable shear stress at inventory fy/3 = 82.7 Mpa

ii. Allowable shear stress at operating (0.45 fy) = 110.3 Mpa

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

274
SIG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 5 OF 8

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : SIG CONTINUOUS

NOTES
C.2 LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

The rating factor (RF) in the Allowable Stress Method (ASD) is given by:

RF = R - A1 D Where : A1 = 1.0
A2 L (1 + I) A2 = 1.0

and substituting the values will give us the results as presented in the table
below:

RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS USING ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD

Section Description INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING
Stress at top 137.9 - (77.95+0.56) 186.2 - (77.95+0.56)
= 2.78 = 5.04
Fiber 21.35 21.35

At Stress at Bot -137.9 - (-45.67-1.76) -186.2 - (-45.67-1.76)

= 1.34 = 2.05
Midspan Fiber -67.55 -67.55

Shear 82.7 - (0.55+0.03) 110.3 - (0.55+0.03)

= 7.59 = 10.14
10.82 10.82
Stress at top -137.9 - (-63.28-0.87) -186.2 - (-63.28-0.87)
= 4.57 = 7.57
Fiber -16.13 -16.13

At Stress at Bot 137.9 - (63.28+2.69) 186.2 - (63.28+2.69)

= 1.44 = 2.40
Support Fiber 50.01 50.01

Shear 82.7 - (23.96+1.29) 110.3 - (23.96+1.29)

= 2.23 = 3.30
25.78 25.78

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

(Rating Live Load = MS18 W=33 Metric Tons
Section Description INVENTORY RATING (Tons) OPERATING RATING (Tons)
At Moment 1.34 x 33 = 44.2 2.05 x 33 = 67.8
Midspan Shear 7.59 x 33 = 250.4 10.14 x 33 = 334.6
At Moment 1.44 x 33 = 47.5 2.40 x 33 = 79.3
Support Shear 2.23 x 33 = 73.5 3.30 x 33 = 108.9

Rating Factors at sections At Support, Sect. B, and At Midspan have values over than 1,
thus Posting Loads is not necessary.

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

275
SIG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 6 OF 8

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : SIG CONTINUOUS

NOTES

D. LOAD POSTING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD (ASM)

The live load moments and shears can be separately taken from conducting a structural analysis
corresponding to Types 1-1, 1-2 and 12-2 Posting Vehicles.

For 2-span continuous ([email protected]) bridge, the Posting Live Load demands are:

D1. POSTING VEHICLE DEMAND FORCES

Vehicle Type LL Demand At Midspan At Pier Support

Moment 657.5 -593.3
Type 1-1
Shear 45.8 -109.1
Moment 869.3 -784.7
Type 1-2
Shear 65.0 -154.7
Moment 859.0 -775.2
Type 12-2
Shear 64.1 -152.7

D2. POSTING VEHICLE DEMAND STRESSES

Vehicle Type Demand forces At Midspan At Pier Support

Top Fiber 13.24 -10.00
Type 1-1 Bottom Fiber -41.88 31.00
Shear 5.95 14.18
Top Fiber 17.50 -13.22
Type 1-2 Bottom Fiber -55.37 41.00
Shear 8.45 20.10
Top Fiber 17.29 -13.06
Type 12-2 Bottom Fiber -54.71 40.51
Shear 8.33 19.84

Using the capacities and dead load demand stresses calculated, the load posting
values are obtained by substituting the posting live load stress demands in the rating
equation.

D3. LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS (1)

At Midspan At Support
Vehicle Type
Inventory Operating Inventory Operating

Top Fiber 4.49 8.13 7.38 12.21

Type 1-1 Bottom Fiber 2.16 3.31 2.32 3.88
Shear 13.80 18.43 4.05 6.00
Top Fiber 3.39 6.15 5.58 9.23
Type 1-2 Bottom Fiber 1.63 2.51 1.75 2.93
Shear 9.72 12.99 2.86 4.23
Top Fiber 3.43 6.23 5.65 9.34
Type 12-2 Bottom Fiber 1.65 2.54 1.78 2.97
Shear 9.86 13.17 2.89 4.29

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

276
SIG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 7 OF 8

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : SIG CONTINUOUS

NOTES

E. LOAD POSTING BY ALLOWABLE STRESS METHOD (ASM)

LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS
AT MIDSPAN
Vehicle INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING Posting
Vehicle Weight Moment Shear Moment Shear (Metric
Type (Metric Tons)
RF LR RF LR RF LR RF LR
Tons)

MS18 33.0 1.34 44.2 7.59 250.4 2.05 67.8 10.14 334.62 33

Type 1-1 17.0 2.16 36.7 13.80 234.6 3.31 56.3 18.43 313.41 17

Type 1-2 27.0 1.63 44.1 9.72 262.5 2.51 67.7 12.99 350.73 27

Type 12-2 38.0 1.65 62.8 9.86 374.6 2.54 96.4 13.17 500.46 38

LOAD POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS

AT PIER SUPPORT
Vehicle INVENTORY RATING OPERATING RATING Posting
Vehicle Weight Moment Shear Moment Shear (Metric
Type (Metric Tons)
RF LR RF LR RF LR RF LR
Tons)

MS18 33.0 1.44 47.5 2.23 73.5 2.40 79.3 3.30 108.9 33

Type 1-1 17.0 2.32 39.4 4.05 68.9 3.88 65.9 6.00 102.0 17

Type 1-2 27.0 1.75 47.4 2.86 77.1 2.93 79.2 4.23 114.21 27

Type 12-2 38.0 1.78 67.5 2.89 110.0 2.97 112.8 4.29 162.9 38

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

277
SIG CONTINUOUS Manual Calculation 8 OF 8

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : SIG CONTINUOUS

NOTES

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

278
 EXAMPLE 5
REINFORCED CONCRETE
DECK SLAB

279
RCDECK Computer Based Calculation

RC DECK SLAB

A. SLAB LAYOUT BACK TO MENU

A. SLAB LAYOUT AND REBAR SCHEDULE

NEXT

RCDECK
280 Sheet 1: LAYOUT
B. DEMAND FORCES

B0. INPUT
Weight of barrier rail Wbr = 4.2
Assumption Concrete Unit Weight Wu = 24.0
Asphalt Unit Weight Wa = 22.0
CONTINUOUS SALB
Slab thickness ts (m) 0.18
Asphalt overlay thickness tas (m) 0.05
Slab span (Ls) (m) 1.90
FOR CANTILEVER SALB
DEAD Slab thickness ts (m) 0.15
LOAD Slab thickness of hunch ts' (m) 0.05
Asphalt overlay thickness tas (m) 0.05
Slab span (Ls) (m) 1.0
Width of Asphalt (Las) (m) 0.6
Width of Curb (Lcu) (m) 0.4
LIVE LOAD
FOR Live Load (LL) (KN) 72.0
LIVE Impact (I) 0.3
LOAD Wheel load position from Curb(Lcu)(m) 0.3
Distributed over a length (E) (m) 1.383

B1. DEAD LOAD CALCULATIONS

Continuous Slab 1.96
Moment due to dead load (KN-m/m)
Cantilever Slab 5.56

B2. LIVE LOAD CALCULATIONS

Continuous Slab 19.30
Moment due to Live load (KN-m/m)
Cantilever Slab 20.30

NEXT

RCDECK
281 Sheet 2: DFDLLL
C. LOAD RATING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD (LFM)

C1. CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

C1.1. INPUT
Allowable Stress fc 8.30
Concrete
Material Properties Strength f'c 20.7
( Mpa ) Allowable Stress fs 137.9
Rebar
Strength fy 275.8
Diameter (mm) 16
Rebar area per meter strip
Spacing (mm) 125
As ( mm 2 )
Rebar area As ( mm2 ) 1608.50
Nominal Factor 0.9
Ultimate capacity due to Concrete Section Loss 1.0
Reduction
factor (Uf) due to Rebar Section Loss 1.0
factor
Applicable reduction factor 0.9
Continuous slab (tscon) 180
Slab thickness (mm)
Cantilever slab (tscan) 200
Cover (mm) (c) 25
Rebar diameter (mm) (Φ) 16
Concrete rectangular stress block (a) (mm) 25.21
Continuous slab (dcon) (mm) 147.0
Depth d (mm)
Cantilever slab (dcan) (mm) 167.0

C1.2. CAPACITY CALCULATIONS

Continuous slab (Mucon) (KN-m/ 53.70
The Moment Ultimate Capacity
Cantilever slab (Mucan) (KN-m/m 61.69

NEXT

RCDECK
282 Sheet 3: CCLFM
C2. LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS

C2.1. INPUT
Load factor for dead load 1.3
Load factor for live load in Inventory Rating 2.17
Load factor for live load in Operating Rating 1.3
Moment Ultimate Capacity at Continuous Slab 53.70
Dead Load Moment at Continuous Slab 1.96
Live Load Moment at Continuous Slab 19.30
Moment Ultimate Capacity at Cantilever Slab (KN-m/m) 61.69
Dead Load Moment at Cantilever Slab 5.56
Live Load Moment at Cantilever Slab 20.30
Rating Live Load 33.0

Load
C2.2. CALCULATIONS OF RATING FACTOR Rating
Rating
AND LOAD RATING Factor
(tons)
Inventory Rating 1.22 40.32
Rating Factor Continuous Slab
Operating Rating 2.04 67.30
and
Inventory Rating 1.24 40.79
Load Rating Cantilever Slab
Operating Rating 2.06 68.09

Depend on the minimum value of Rating Factor > 1 or <1 ,

instruction in the below cell is automatically shown
Return to LAYOUT

Click following the above instruction

Return to LAYOUT

Load Posting

RCDECK
283 Sheet 4: LRLFM
D. LOAD POSTING BY LOAD FACTOR METHOD

D1. DEMAND FORCES FOR LOAD POSTING VEHICLES

Posting Vehicles Demand
Description
Type Wheel Load Forces
Type 1-1 66.8 17.90
Continuous Slab Type 1-2 73.9 19.81
Type 12-2 65.9 17.66
Moment due to Live load (KN-m/m)
Type 1-1 66.8 18.84
Cantilever Slab Type 1-2 73.9 20.84
Type 12-2 65.9 18.58

D2. POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS

D2.1. POSTING RATING FACTOR CALCULATIONS

Load factor for dead load 1.3
Load factor for live load in Inventory Rating 2.17
Load factor for live load in Operating Rating 1.3
Moment Ultimate Capacity at Continuous Slab 53.70
Dead Load Moment at Continuous Slab 1.96
At
Type 1-1 17.90
Continuous Slab
Live Load Moment at Continuous Slab Type 1-2 19.81
Type 12-2 17.66
Moment Ultimate Capacity at Cantilever Slab (KN-m/m) 61.69
Dead Load Moment at Cantilever Slab 5.56
At
Type 1-1 18.84
Cantilever Slab
Live Load Moment at Cantilever Slab Type 1-2 20.84
Type 12-2 18.58
Rating Live Load 33.0

D2.2. RATING FACTOR AND Rating Load Rating

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS Factor (tons)
Inventory Rating 1.32 43.45
Type 1-1
Operating Rating 2.20 72.54
Continuous Inventory Rating 1.19 39.28
Type 1-2
Slab Operating Rating 1.99 65.57
Inventory Rating 1.33 44.05
Rating Factor Type 12-2
Operating Rating 2.23 73.53
and
Inventory Rating 1.25 41.30
Load Rating Type 1-1
Operating Rating 2.09 68.94
Cantilever Inventory Rating 1.13 37.33
Type 1-2
Slab Operating Rating 1.89 62.31
Inventory Rating 1.27 41.86
Type 12-2
Operating Rating 2.12 69.88

NEXT

RCDECK
284 Sheet 5: POSTLL
E. SUMMARY OF LOAD POSTING
Inventory Operating Posting
RF LR RF LR (Metric Tons)
(1) CONTINUOUS SLAB
MS18 33.0 1.22 40.3 2.04 67.3 33
Type 1-1 17.0 1.32 22.4 2.20 37.4 17
Type 1-2 27.0 1.19 32.1 1.99 53.6 27
Type 12-2 38.0 1.33 50.7 2.23 84.7 38
(2) CANTILEVER SLAB
MS18 33.0 1.24 40.8 2.06 68.1 33
Type 1-1 17.0 1.25 21.3 2.09 35.5 17
Type 1-2 27.0 1.13 30.5 1.89 51.0 27
Type 12-2 38.0 1.27 48.2 2.12 80.5 38
LOAD POSTING
MS18 33T
Type 1-1 17T
Type 1-2 27T
Type 12-2 38T

LOAD

17T
27T
38T

BACK TO LAYOUT

RCDECK
285 Sheet 6: POSTSUM
RCDECK Manual Calculation 1 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RC DECK SLAB

A. GENERAL
A.1 BRIDGE DESCRIPTION

Bridge Location : None (Standard Bridge)

Bridge Type : 3-span Continuous Reinforced Concrete T-Beams
Br. Width / No. of Lanes : 6.10m curb to curb / Two-lanes
Bridge Length : 10.0m + 15.5m +10.0m = 35.5m
Year Built : 1961
Structure
Girders : Multiple Girders per span (3-Girders), Monolithic with deck slab
: Girder spacing at 2.30m on center
Substructure : Wall Type RC Pier and RC Cantilever Abutments
Wearing Course : None
Material Properties : fc = 8.3 Mpa , fs = 137.9 Mpa
: f'c = 20.7 Mpa , fy = 275.8 Mpa
Assumption : Weight of barrier rail = 4.2 KN/m
: Concrete unit weight = 24.0 KN/m3
: Asphalt unit weight = 22.0 KN/m3
Others : Rating Live Load is AASHTO MS18 (HS20-44)
Reqirement : Perform load rating for the reinforced concrete deck slab shown below using
AASHTO MS18 as the rating live load.

A.2 BRIDGE LAYOUT

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

286
RCDECK Manual Calculation 2 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RC DECK SLAB

NOTES

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

287
RCDECK Manual Calculation 3 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RC DECK SLAB

NOTES

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

288
RCDECK Manual Calculation 4 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RC DECK SLAB

NOTES

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

289
RCDECK Manual Calculation 5 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RC DECK SLAB

NOTES

D. Demand Forces for Load Posting Live Vehicles

Posting Live Vehicle's Forces is calculated as same as the section B2. Live- Load
Calculations based on the Wheel Load of Posting live Load as follows.

Posting Rating Factor is also calculated as same as the section C as follows.

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

290
RCDECK Manual Calculation 6 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RC DECK SLAB

NOTES

Load Posting is summarized as follows.

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

291
RCDECK Manual Calculation 7 OF 7

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS BRIDGE ID : PAGE :

LOAD RATING CALCULATIONS BRIDGE NAME : RC DECK SLAB

NOTES

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

RATED BY : DATE : CHECKED BY : DATE :

292
 MANUAL
FOR LOAD RATING
OF BRIDGES
3rd Edition

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM LIVE LOAD BENDING MOMENT

PER WHEEL LINE (NO IMPACT)
9000

58kN 53.5kN 53.5kN 53.5kN 53.5kN 53.5kN 53.5kN

4.8m 4.11m 4.11m
8000
PERMIT DESIGN LOADING

40kN
7000 4.7kN/m

MS18 LANE LOADING

Bending Moment (kN-m)

6000 18kN 72kN 72kN
4.267m 4.267m

MS18 TRUCK LOADING

5000
53.5kN 53.5kN
1.20m

4000 ALTERNATE MILITARY LOADING

3000

2000

1000

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Span (m)

APPENDIX III
RATING CALCULATION AIDS

293
 APPENDIX III - A

LIVE LOAD LAYOUT IN TRAFFIC LANES

ONE-LANE TRUCK LOADING PATTERN (RATING LIVE LOAD)

ONE-LANE LANE LOADING PATTERN

POSTING VEHICLE

9m 9m

NOTE:

THIS LOAD PATTERN IS USED FOR SPANS OVER 60m IN LENGTH TO SIMULATE TRAIN OF VEHICLES
SPACED AT 9m CLEAR IN ONE LANE AND A SINGLE VEHICLE LOAD IN THE ADJACENT LANES

TWO-LANE TRUCK TRAIN LOADING PATTERN (POSTING LIVE LOAD)

294 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 APPENDIX III - B.1
DPWH DESIGN GUIDELINES DESIGN LIVE LOAD BENDING MOMENT
FOR SIMPLE SPANS
(PER WHEEL LINE, NO IMPACT)

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM LIVE LOAD BENDING MOMENT

PER WHEEL LINE (NO IMPACT)
9000

58kN 53.5kN 53.5kN 53.5kN 53.5kN 53.5kN 53.5kN

4.8m 4.11m 4.11m
8000
PERMIT DESIGN LOADING

40kN
7000 4.7kN/m

MS18 LANE LOADING

Bending Moment (kN-m)

6000 18kN 72kN 72kN

4.267m 4.267m

MS18 TRUCK LOADING

5000
53.5kN 53.5kN
1.20m

4000 ALTERNATE MILITARY LOADING

3000

2000

1000

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Span (m)

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 295

DPWH
 APPENDIX III - B.2
DPWH DESIGN GUIDELINES DESIGN LIVE LOAD SUPPORT SHEAR
FOR SIMPLE SPANS
(PER WHEEL LINE, NO IMPACT)

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM SUPPORT SHEAR

PER WHEEL LINE (NO IMPACT)

350
58kN 53.5kN 53.5kN 53.5kN 53.5kN 53.5kN 53.5kN
4.8m 4.11m 4.11m

PERMIT DESIGN LOADING

300

40kN

4.7kN/m

250 MS18 LANE LOADING

Support Shear (kN)

200
18kN 72kN 72kN
4.267m 4.267m

MS18 TRUCK LOADING

150
53.5kN 53.5kN
1.20m

ALTERNATE MILITARY LOADING

100

50
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Span (m)

296 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 APPENDIX III - C
MAGNITUDE AND LAYOUT OF WHEEL LOADS FOR LOAD RATING
AND LOAD POSTING
(PER WHEEL LINE)

162kN
18kN 72kN 72kN

1.422m
5.689m 2.845m

4.267m 4.267m

MS18 RATING LIVE LOAD

83.5kN
16.7kN 66.8kN

3.414m 0.853m

4.267m

TYPE 1-1 POSTING LIVE LOAD

132.5kN
42.4kN 45.05kN 45.05kN
1.049m
3.523m 2.268m

4.572m 1.219m

TYPE 1-2 POSTING LIVE LOAD

186.5kN
25.9kN 40.15kN 40.15kN 40.15kN 40.15kN
2.252m
6.824m 5.673m

3.353m 1.219m 6.706m 1.219m

TYPE 12-2 POSTING LIVE LOAD

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 297

DPWH
 APPENDIX III - D

MAXIMUM ABSOLUTE LIVE LOAD MOMENT FOR SIMPLE BEAM

Basic Principles:
1 - The absolute maximum bending moment due to a series of concentrated
wheel loads moving on a simple span beam always occur near the center
of the span directly under one of these loads (in this case, wheel P 3 at
point m).
2 - The loading pattern producing the absolute maximum moment in the
simple beam is when the center of the beam (point c) is between the
resultant load (ΣP) and one of the maximum adjacent concentrated
wheel load (in this case, wheel P 3 ), as shown below.

Resultant
Load (ΣP)

P1 P2 P3 Pn-1 Pn
d

c
A m B
d d
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM
l 2 2 l
MOMENT OCCURS
HERE (BELOW PMAX) 2 2

298 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
D.1 CASE OF TRUCK LOADING TYPE 1-1

83.5kN
16.7kN 66.8kN
POINT OF ABSOLUTE
3.414m MAXIMUM MOMENT
0.853m

4.267m

RB = 83.5(X-0.853)/L
X

L/2 L/2

Case 1 (when L < 8.10m) - Consider only ONE wheel, P = 66.8kN

M p = 66.8(X)(L-X)/L ............ [D.1-1]
dM p /dX = 66.8(L-2X)/L = 0, t X = L/2
M pmax = 66.8(L)/4 ........... [D.1-2]
Case 2 (when L ≥ 8.10m) - Full Truck

M p = 83.5(X-0.853)(L-X)/L ........... [D.1-3]

dM p /dX = 83.5(L-2X+0.853)/L = 0, t X = (L+0.853)/2
M pmax = (83.5/L)[(L-0.853)/2]2 ........... [D.1-4]

Example:
1. When L = 4m, M p max = 66.8(4)/4 = 66.8 kN-m
2. When L = 20m, M p max = (83.5/20)[(20-0.853)/2]2 = 382.65 kN-m

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 299

DPWH
D.2 CASE OF TRUCK LOADING TYPE 1-2

132.5kN
42.4kN 45.05kN 45.05kN
1.049m POINT OF ABSOLUTE
3.523m
MAXIMUM MOMENT
2.268m

4.572m 1.219m
RB = 132.5(X-1.049)/L
X

L/2 L/2

Case 1 (when L < 8.62m) - Consider only TWO wheels, P = 2 @ 45.05kN

M p = 90.1(X-1.219/2)(L-X)/L ........... [D.2-1]

dM p /dX = 90.1(L-2X+0.6095)/L = 0, t X = (L+0.6095)/2
M pmax = (90.1/L)[(L-0.6095)/2]2 ........... [D.2-2]

Case 2 (when L ≥ 8.62m) - Full Truck

M p = 132.5(X-1.049)(L-X)/L - (45.05)(1.219) ........... [D.2-3]

dM p /dX = 132.5(L-2X+1.049)/L = 0, t X = (L+1.049)/2
M pmax = (132.5/L)[(L-1.049)/2]2 - 54.92 ........... [D.2-4]

Example:
1. When L = 4m, M p max = (90.1/4)[(4-0.6095)/2]2 = 64.73
kN-m
2. When L = 20m, M p max = (132.5/20)[(20-1.049)/2]2 - 54.92 = 539.91 kN-m

300 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
D.3 CASE OF TRUCK LOADING TYPE MS18

POINT OF ABSOLUTE
MAXIMUM MOMENT
162kN
18kN 72kN 72kN

1.422m
5.689m 2.845m

4.267m 4.267m
RA = 162(X-1.422)/L
X

L/2 L/2

Case 1 (when L < 7.47m) - Consider only ONE wheel, P = 72kN

M p = 72(X)(L-X)/L ........... [D.3-1]

dM p /dX = 72(L-2X)/L = 0, t X = L/2
M pmax = 72(L)/4 ........... [D.3-2]

Case 2 (when 7.47 ≤ L < 10.67m) - Consider only TWO wheels, P = 2 @ 72kN

M p = 144(X-2.134)(L-X)/L ........... [D.3-3]

dM p /dX = 144(L-2X+2.134)/L = 0, t X = (L+2.134)/2
M pmax = (144/L)[(L-2.134)/2]2 ........... [D.3-4]

Case 3 (when L ≥ 10.67m) - Full Truck

M p = 162(X-1.422)(L-X)/L - (18)(4.267) ........... [D.3-5]

dM p /dX = 162(L-2X+1.422)/L = 0, t X = (L+1.422)/2
M pmax = (162/L)[(L-1.422)/2]2 - 76.81 ........... [D.3-6]

Example:
1. When L = 4m, M p max = 72(4)/4 = 72 kN-m
2. When L = 10m, M p max = (144/10)[(10-2.134)/2]2 = 222.75 kN-m
3. When L = 20m, M p max = (162/20)[(20-1.422)/2]2 - 76.81 = 622.10 kN-m

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 301

DPWH
D.4 CASE OF TRUCK LOADING TYPE 12-2

POINT OF ABSOLUTE
MAXIMUM MOMENT
186.5kN
25.9kN 40.15kN 40.15kN 40.15kN 40.15kN
2.252m
6.824m 5.673m

3.353m 1.219m 6.706m 1.219m

L/2 L/2

Case 1 (when L < 6.53m) - Consider only TWO wheel, P = 2 @ 40.15 kN

M p = 80.3(X-0.6095)(L-X)/L ........... [D.4-1]

dM p /dX = 80.3(L-2X+0.6095)/L = 0, t X = (L+0.6095)/2
M pmax = (80.3/L)[(L-0.6095)/2]2 ........... [D.4-2]

Case 2 (when 6.53≤ L<14.72m) - Consider THREE wheels, P = 2 @ 40.15kN + 25.9kN

M p = 106.2(X-0.357)(L-X)/L - (40.15)(1.219) ........... [D.4-3]

dM p /dX = 106.2(L-2X+0.357)/L = 0, t X = (L+0.357)/2
M pmax = (106.2/L)[(L-0.357)/2]2 - 48.94 ........... [D.4-4]

Case 3 (when L ≥ 14.72m) - Full Truck

M p = 186.5(X-2.252)(L-X)/L - (40.15)(1.219) - (25.9)(4.572) ........... [D.4-5]

dM p /dX = 186.5(L-2X+2.252)/L = 0, t X = (L+2.252)/2
M pmax = (186.5/L)[(L-2.252)/2]2 - 167.36 ........... [D.4-6]

Example:
1. When L = 4m, M p max = (80.3/4)[(4-0.6095)/2]2 = 57.69 kN-m
2. When L = 10m, M p max = (106.2/10)[(10-0.357)/2]2 - 48.94 = 197.94 kN-m
3. When L = 20m, M p max = (186.5/20)[(20-2.252)/2]2 - 167.36 = 566.96 kN-m

302 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 APPENDIX III - D.5
LIVE LOAD MOMENTS ON LONGITUDINAL STRINGERS OR GIRDERS
FOR SIMPLE SPANS PER WHEEL LINE, WITHOUT IMPACT
LIVE LOAD MOMENT IN KILONEWTON-METER PER WHEEL LINE
SPAN (m) IMPACT (%)
MS18 (HS20) TYPE 1-1 TYPE 1-2 TYPE 12-2
2.0 30 36.0 33.4 22.6 20.1
3.0 30 54.0 50.1 43.0 38.3
3.5 30 63.0 58.5 53.8 48.0
4.0 30 72.0 66.8 64.8 57.7
4.5 30 81.0 75.2 75.8 67.6
5.0 30 90.0 83.5 86.9 77.4
5.5 30 99.0 91.9 98.0 87.3
6.0 30 108.0 100.2 109.1 97.3
6.5 30 117.0 108.6 120.3 107.2
7.0 30 126.0 116.9 131.5 118.5
7.5 30 138.3 125.3 142.6 131.7
8.0 30 154.9 133.6 153.8 145.0
8.5 30 171.7 143.7 165.0 158.2
9.0 30 188.6 154.0 177.8 171.5
9.5 30 205.7 164.3 194.2 184.7
10.0 30 222.8 174.7 210.5 198.0
11.0 30 261.0 195.4 243.3 224.5
12.0 30 300.9 216.2 276.2 251.0
13.0 30 340.9 237.0 309.1 277.6
14.0 29 380.9 257.8 342.0 304.1
15.0 29 421.0 278.6 374.9 337.8
16.0 28 461.2 299.4 407.9 383.5
17.0 28 501.4 320.2 440.9 429.2
18.0 27 541.6 341.0 473.9 475.1
19.0 27 581.9 361.9 506.9 521.0
20.0 26 622.2 382.7 540.0 567.0
21.0 26 662.5 403.5 573.0 613.1
22.0 25 702.8 424.4 606.0 659.2
23.0 25 743.1 445.2 639.1 705.3
24.0 25 783.5 466.1 672.2 751.5
25.0 24 823.8 486.9 705.2 797.8
26.0 24 864.2 507.8 738.3 844.0
27.0 23 904.6 528.6 771.4 890.3
28.0 23 945.0 549.5 804.4 936.6
29.0 23 985.4 570.3 837.5 983.0
30.0 22 1025.8 591.2 870.6 1029.3
32.0 22 1106.6 632.9 936.8 1122.1
34.0 21 1187.5 674.6 1003.0 1214.9
36.0 21 1268.3 716.4 1069.1 1307.8
38.0 20 1349.2 758.1 1135.3 1400.7
40.0 20 1430.1 799.8 1201.5 1493.6
45.0 18 1639.7* 904.1 1367.1 1726.1
50.0 17 1968.8* 1008.5 1532.6 1958.7
55.0 16 2327.2* 1112.8 1698.2 2191.4
60.0 16 2715.0* 1217.2 1863.7 2424.1
65.0 15 3132.2* 1321.5 2029.3 2657.0
70.0 14 3578.8* 1425.9 2194.9 2889.8
75.0 13 4054.7* 1530.3 2360.5 3122.7
80.0 13 4560.0* 1634.6 2526.1 3355.6
90.0 12 5658.8* 1843.4 2857.3 3821.6
100.0 11 6875.0* 2052.1 3188.5 4287.6
NOTES:
1. * MS18 Lane Loading governs at these spans.
2. Shaded values indicate load effects greater than the MS18 rating live load. However, Section
3.2.4 of the DPWH Design Guidelines requires design using load effects by Alternate Military
Loading and Permit Design Load, which is greater than the shaded values.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 303

DPWH
 MAXIMUM LIVE LOAD MOMENT FOR SIMPLE SPANS
(RATING AND POSTING VEHICLES)
PER WHEEL LINE WITHOUT IMPACT

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM LIVE LOAD BENDING MOMENT

PER WHEEL LINE WITHOUT IMPACT
7000
40kN
4.7kN/m

6000

5000
Bending Moment (kN-m)

4000

3000

2000

1000

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Span (m)

304 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 APPENDIX III - E

MAXIMUM ABSOLUTE LIVE LOAD SHEAR FOR SIMPLE BEAM

Basic Principles:
1 - The absolute maximum shear to the left of the support due to a series of
concentrated wheel loads moving on a simple span beam always occur
at the left of the support directly under last heavier wheel (in this case,
wheel P n at point B).
2 - The loading pattern producing the absolute maximum shear in the simple
beam is when the last heavier wheel is at an infinitesimal distance from the
support (in this case, wheel P n ), as shown below.

Resultant ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM

Load (ΣP) SHEAR OCCURS
HERE (BELOW Pn)

P1 P2 P3 Pn-1 Pn

A B

l l
2 2

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 305

DPWH
E.1 CASE OF TRUCK LOADING TYPE 1-1

83.5kN

16.7kN 66.8kN POINT OF ABSOLUTE

X
MAXIMUM SHEAR
3.414m 0.853m

4.267m

RB = 83.5(X-0.853)/L

L/2 L/2

Case 1 (when L ≤ 4.267) - Consider only ONE wheel, P = 66.8kN

V p = 66.8(X)/L ............
[E.1-1]

AIII - 12 X→L
V pmax = 66.8 kN ........... [E.1-2]

Case 2 (when L > 4.267m) - Full Truck

V p = 83.5(X-0.853)/L ........... [E.1-3]

X→L
V pmax = 83.5(1-0.853/L) (in kN) ........... [E.1-4]

Example:
1. When L = 4m, V p max = 66.8 kN
2. When L = 20m, V p max = 83.5(1-0.853/20) = 79.94 kN

306 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
E.2 CASE OF TRUCK LOADING TYPE 1-2

POINT OF ABSOLUTE
132.5kN MAXIMUM SHEAR

42.4kN 45.05kN 45.05kN

X

3.523m 2.268m

4.572m 1.219m
RB = 132.5(X-2.268)/L

L/2 L/2

Case 1 (when L ≤ 5.791m) - Consider only TWO wheels, P = 2 @ 45.05kN

V p = 90.1(X-1.219/2)/L ........... [E.2-1]

X→L
V pmax = 90.1(1-0.6095/L) (in kN) ........... [E.2-2]

Case 2 (when L > 5.791m) - Full Truck

V p = 132.5(X-2.268)/L ...........
[E.2-3]

X→L
V pmax = 132.5(1-2.268/L) (in kN) ........... [E.2-4]

Example:
1. When L = 4m, V p max = 90.1(1-0.6095/4) = 76.37 kN-m
2. When L = 20m, V p max = 132.5(1-2.268/20) = 117.47 kN-m

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 307

DPWH
E.3 CASE OF TRUCK LOADING TYPE MS18

POINT OF ABSOLUTE
MAXIMUM SHEAR
162kN
18kN 72kN 72kN
X
1.422m
5.689m 2.845m

4.267m 4.267m

RB = 162(X-2.845)/L

L/2 L/2

Case 1 (when L ≤ 4.267m) - Consider only ONE wheel, P = 72kN

V p = 72(X)/L ........... [E.3-1]

X→L
V pmax = 72 kN ........... [E.3-2]

Case 2 (when 4.267 < L ≤ 8.534m) - Consider only TWO wheels, P = 2 @ 72kN

V p = 144(X-4.267/2)/L ........... [E.3-3]

X→L
V pmax = 144(1-2.134/L) (in kN) ........... [E.3-4]

Case 3 (when L > 8.534m) - Full Truck

V p = 162(X-2.845)/L ........... [E.3-5]

X→L
V pmax = 162(1-2.845/L) (in kN) ........... [E.3-6]

Example:
1. When L = 4m, V p max = 72 kN
2. When L = 8m, V p max = 144(1-2.134/8) = 105.59 kN
3. When L = 20m, V p max = 162(1-2.845/20) = 138.96 kN

308 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
E.4 CASE OF TRUCK LOADING TYPE 12-2

POINT OF ABSOLUTE
MAXIMUM SHEAR
186.5kN
25.9kN 40.15kN 40.15kN 40.15kN 40.15kN
X
6.824m 5.673m

3.353m 1.219m 6.706m 1.219m

RB = 186.5(X-5.673)/L

L/2 L/2

Case 1 (when L ≤ 4.572m) - Consider only TWO wheel, P = 2 @ 40.15 kN

V p = 80.3(X-1.219/2)/L ........... [E.4-1]

X→L
V pmax = 80.3(1-0.6095/L) (in kN) ........... [E.4-2]

Case 2 (when 4.572 < L ≤ 12.497m) - Consider THREE wheels, P = 2 @ 40.15kN +

25.9kN

V p = 106.2(X-1.576)/L ........... [E.4-3]

X→L
V pmax = 106.2(1-1.576/L) (in kN) ........... [E.4-4]

Case 3 (when L > 12.497m) - Full Truck

V p = 186.5(X-5.673)/L ...........
[E.4-5]

X→L
V pmax = 186.5(1-5.673/L) (in kN) ........... [E.4-6]

Example:
1. When L = 4m, V p max = 80.3 (1-0.6095/4) = 68.06 kN
2. When L = 10m, V p max = 106.2(1-1.576/10) = 89.46 kN
3. When L = 20m, V p max = 186.5(1-5.673/20) = 133.60 kN

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 309

DPWH
 APPENDIX III - E.5
LIVE LOAD SHEARS ON LONGITUDINAL STRINGERS OR GIRDERS
FOR SIMPLE SPANS PER WHEEL LINE, WITHOUT IMPACT
LIVE LOAD SUPPORT SHEAR IN KN PER WHEEL LINE
SPAN (m) IMPACT (%)
MS18 (HS20) TYPE 1-1 TYPE 1-2 TYPE 12-2
2.0 30 72.0 66.8 62.7 55.9
3.0 30 72.0 66.8 71.8 64.0
3.5 30 72.0 66.8 74.5 66.4
4.0 30 72.0 66.8 76.4 68.1
4.5 30 75.8 67.7 77.9 69.5
5.0 30 82.6 69.3 79.2 72.8
5.5 30 88.2 70.6 80.2 75.8
6.0 30 92.8 71.7 82.5 78.4
6.5 30 96.8 72.6 86.3 80.5
7.0 30 100.2 73.4 89.6 82.3
7.5 30 103.1 74.1 92.5 83.9
8.0 30 105.6 74.6 95.0 85.3
8.5 30 107.8 75.2 97.2 86.6
9.0 30 110.8 75.6 99.2 87.7
9.5 30 113.5 76.1 100.9 88.6
10.0 30 116.0 76.4 102.5 89.5
11.0 30 120.2 77.1 105.2 93.9
12.0 30 123.6 77.6 107.5 99.5
13.0 30 126.6 78.1 109.4 105.2
14.0 29 129.1 78.5 111.1 111.0
15.0 29 131.3 78.8 112.5 116.0
16.0 28 133.2 79.1 113.8 120.4
17.0 28 134.9 79.4 114.9 124.3
18.0 27 136.4 79.6 115.9 127.8
19.0 27 137.8 79.8 116.7 130.9
20.0 26 139.0 80.0 117.5 133.6
21.0 26 140.1 80.2 118.2 136.2
22.0 25 141.1 80.3 118.9 138.5
23.0 25 142.0 80.5 119.5 140.6
24.0 25 142.8 80.6 120.0 142.5
25.0 24 143.6 80.7 120.5 144.2
26.0 24 144.3 80.8 121.0 145.9
27.0 23 145.0 80.9 121.4 147.4
28.0 23 145.6 81.0 121.8 148.8
29.0 23 146.2 81.1 122.2 150.1
30.0 22 146.7 81.2 122.5 151.3
32.0 22 147.6 81.3 123.2 153.5
34.0 21 148.5 81.5 123.7 155.4
36.0 21 149.2 81.6 124.2 157.2
38.0 20 149.9 81.7 124.6 158.7
40.0 20 152.0* 81.8 125.0 160.1
45.0 18 163.8* 82.0 125.9 163.0
50.0 17 175.5* 82.1 126.5 165.4
55.0 16 187.3* 82.3 127.1 167.3
60.0 16 199.0* 82.4 127.5 168.9
65.0 15 210.8* 82.5 127.9 170.3
70.0 14 222.5* 82.5 128.3 171.4
75.0 13 234.3* 82.6 128.5 172.4
80.0 13 246.0* 82.7 128.8 173.3
90.0 12 269.5* 82.8 129.2 174.8
100.0 11 293.0* 82.8 129.5 176.0

NOTES:
3. * MS18 Lane Loading governs at these spans.
4. Shaded values indicate load effects greater than the MS18 rating live load. However, Section
3.2.4 of the DPWH Design Guidelines requires design using load effects by Alternate Military
Loading and Permit Design Load, which is greater than the shaded values.

310 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 MAXIMUM LIVE LOAD SUPPORT SHEARS FOR SIMPLE SPANS
(RATING AND POSTING VEHICLES)
PER WHEEL LINE WITHOUT IMPACT

ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM LIVE LOAD SUPPORT SHEAR

PER WHEEL LINE WITHOUT IMPACT
300
116kN
4.7kN/m

250
Support Shear (kN-m)

200

150

100

50
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Span (m)

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 311

DPWH
 APPENDIX III - F.1

MAXIMUM MOMENT & SHEAR AT ANY POINT ON SPAN FOR

TYPE 1-1 POSTING VEHICLE (SIMPLE SPAN ONLY)

83.5kN
16.7kN 66.8kN
TYPE 1-1 TRUCK
3.414m 0.853m
1 2

4.267m
P
X L-X
L

BENDING MOMENT AT POINT “P” (M P ) in kN-m PER WHEEL LINE (NO IMPACT)

Case 1 MP = 66.8 (X)(L - X) when L < 4.267m

L

Case 2 MP = 83.5 (L - X)(X - 0.853) when X ≥ 4.267m

L

SHEAR AT RIGHT OF POINT “P” (V P ) in kN PER WHEEL LINE (NO IMPACT)

66.8 (X)
Case 1 VP = when L < 4.267m
L

83.5 (X - 0.853) X ≥ 4.267m

Case 2 VP = when
L

312 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 APPENDIX III - F.2

MAXIMUM MOMENT & SHEAR AT ANY POINT ON SPAN FOR

TYPE 1-2 POSTING VEHICLE (SIMPLE SPAN ONLY)

132.5kN
42.4kN 45.05kN 45.05kN
1.049m
TYPE 1-2 TRUCK 3.523m 2.268m

1 2 1.219m 3
4.572m

P
X L-X
L

BENDING MOMENT AT POINT “P” (M P ) in kN-m PER WHEEL LINE (NO IMPACT)

AXLE
Minimum NO. @ TRUCK
LOAD FORMULA FOR MAXIMUM MOMENT AT
L-X/L PANEL TRAVEL
CASE POINT “P” (M P ) L-X X POINT DIRECTION
(m) (m) “P”

132.5 (X - 2.268)(L - X)
1 0 - 0.340 MP = 0 5.791 3 R-L
L

0.340
132.5 (X - 1.049)(L - X)
2 - MP = - 54.92 1.219 4.572 2 R-L
0.500 L

SHEAR AT RIGHT OF POINT “P” (V P ) in kN PER WHEEL LINE (NO IMPACT)

AXLE
Minimum NO. @ TRUCK
LOAD FORMULA FOR MAXIMUM SHEAR AT
L-X/L PANEL TRAVEL
CASE POINT “P” (V P ) L-X X POINT DIRECTION
(m) (m) “P”

132.5 (X - 2.268)
1 0 - 0.500 VP = 0 5.791 3 R-L
L

NOTE : Shear formula is applicable when dimension “X” exceeds the total length of truck. When “X” is less than
the minimum, determine shears by statics.

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 313

DPWH
 APPENDIX III - F.3

MAXIMUM MOMENT & SHEAR AT ANY POINT ON SPAN FOR

MS18 RATING VEHICLE (SIMPLE SPAN ONLY)

TYPE MS18 162kN

TRUCK 18kN 72kN 72kN

1.422m
5.689m 2.845m
1 2 3
4.267m 4.267m

P
X L-X
L

NOTE : *The following formulas are applicable when the entire truck
is within the span.
**Lane Load governs when L > 44.05m
***Truck loading does not govern shear beyond this length
specified. Use lane loading.

BENDING MOMENT AT POINT “P” (M P ) in kN-m PER WHEEL LINE (NO IMPACT)

Minimum Max
LOAD FORMULA FOR MAXIMUM MOMENT AT
L-X/L L*
CASE POINT “P” (M P ) L-X (m) X (m) (m)

162 (X - 2.845)(L - X)
1 0 - 0.333 MP = 0 8.534 -
L

0.333
162 (X - 1.422)(L - X)
2 - MP = - 76.81 4.267 4.267 44.05
0.500 L

SHEAR AT RIGHT OF POINT “P” (V P ) in kN PER WHEEL LINE (NO IMPACT)

Use for Minimum

LOAD FORMULA FOR MAXIMUM SHEAR AT POINT
L-X/L Girder
CASE “P” (V P ) L-X (m) X (m)
Lengths

Under 162 (X - 1.422)

1 VP = - 18 4.267 4.267
12.80m L
0 - 0.500

2 12.8m - VP = 0 8.534
162 (X - 2.845)

314 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 36.6m*** L

APPENDIX III - F.4

MAXIMUM MOMENT & SHEAR AT ANY POINT ON SPAN FOR

TYPE 12-2 POSTING VEHICLE (SIMPLE SPAN ONLY)

TYPE 12-2 TRUCK

186.5kN
25.9kN 40.15kN 40.15kN 40.15kN 40.15kN

2.252m
6.824m 5.673m
1 2 3 4 5

3.353m 1.219m 6.706m 1.219m

P
X L-X
L

NOTE : The following formulas are applicable when the entire truck is
within the span.

BENDING MOMENT AT POINT “P” (M P ) in kN-m PER WHEEL LINE (NO IMPACT)

AXLE
Minimum NO. @ TRUCK
LOAD FORMULA FOR MAXIMUM MOMENT AT
L-X/L PANEL TRAVEL
CASE POINT “P” (M P ) L-X POINT DIRECTION
X (m) “P”
(m)

186.5 (X - 5.673)(L - X)
1 0 - 0.211 MP = 0 12.497 5 R-L
L

0.211
186.5 (X - 3.471)(L - X)
2 - MP = - 86.84 3.353 9.144 2 L-R
0.354 L

0.354
186.5 (X - 2.252)(L - X)
3 - MP = - 167.36 4.572 7.925 3 L-R
L
0.500

SHEAR AT RIGHT OF POINT “P” (V P ) in kN PER WHEEL LINE (NO IMPACT)

AXLE
Minimum NO. @ TRUCK
LOAD FORMULA FOR MAXIMUM SHEAR AT
L-X/L PANEL TRAVEL
CASE POINT “P” (V P ) L-X (m) X (m) POINT DIRECTION
“P”

1 0 - 0.500 VP = 0 12.497 5 R-L

186.5 (X - 5.673)

Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed. 315

DPWH
 L

APPENDIX III - G

MAXIMUM SHEAR AT ANY PANEL POINT

C LT
X
L

L : Length of Truss
LT : Axle Spacing/Distance
P : Length of Panel
X : Distance from Panel Point to End of Truss

SHEAR AT PANEL POINT (V C ) IN kN PER WHEEL LINE (NO IMPACT)

USE FOR
MIN AXLE
TRUSS TRUCK
LOAD NO. @
LT (m) “X” FORMULA WITH NO. TRAVEL
TYPE OF
PANEL
DIRECTION
(m) POINT
PANELS

TYPE 132.5 (X - 2.268)

5.791 5.791 VP = ALL 3 L-R
1-2 L

186.5 (X - 5.673) 5 OR
12.497 VP = 5 L-R
L MORE

TYPE 186.5 (X - 3.471) 86.84

12.497 9.144 VP = - 3, 4 2 R-L
12-2 L P

186.5 (X - 2.252) 167.35

7.925 VP = - 2 3 R-L
L P

NOTES:

• Applicable only when entire truck is within the span

• See Appendix IV - F for shears resulting from Type 1-1 and MS18
• Truck Travel Direction : L - R - Truck moving from Left to Right
R - L - Truck moving from Right to Left

316 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
 MANUAL
FOR LOAD RATING
OF BRIDGES

3rd Edition

WLEOI G
AHDT
LIMIT
T
T
T

APPENDIX IV
LOAD POSTING SIGN
317
 Note: Install Load Posting
Sign 20 meters from back
of bridge backwall

318 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.

DPWH
Manual for Load Rating of Bridges 3rd Ed 319
DPWH
320 Manual for Load Rating of Bridges, 3rd Ed.
DPWH
 MANUAL
FOR LOAD RATING
OF BRIDGES
3rd Edition

LOAD RATING
COMPUTER-BASED PROGRAM

USER ' S MANUAL

APPENDIX V
321
 User's Manual for Load Rating Computer-Based Program

Table of Contents

1 General ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….…………………..
1
2 Function of this Program ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
1
3 Installation of Software ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
1
4 Installing and Uninstalling Procedure of CBPLR …………………………………………………………………………………
1
4.1 Installing …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 1
4.1.1 Copy to Your Computer Directory C: drive …………………………………………………………………………………………
2
4.1.2 Starting ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
2
4.2 Uninstalling ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
2
5 Procedure of "MENU" in this Program ………………………………………………………………………………………………
3
5.1 Title …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
3
5.2 Flowchart of Load rating Procedure …………………………………………………………………………………………………
3
5.3 Bridge Condition Inspection Results …………………………………………………………………………………………………
4
5.4 Menu of Load Rating …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
4
6 Procedure of "Load Rating Program of each Bridge Type" in this Program ………………………………………
5
6.1 General ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
5
6.1.1 Load Rating Principles ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
5
6.1.2 Damage Evaluation …………….……………………………………………………………………………………………………………
6
6.1.3 Program Contents …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
7
6.1.4 Differences Between Interior Girder and Exterior Girder …………………………………………………………………
8
6.1.5 Differences between Simple Girder and Continuous Girder ………………………………………………………………
8
6.1.6 Meaning of Colored Cells …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
9
6.1.7 Drawings Attached with Each Bridge Type ……………………...………………………………………………………………
9
6.2 RCFS (Reinforced Concrete Flat Slab Bridges) ……………………………………………………………………………………
10
6.2.1 Simple RCFS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
10
6.2.2 Continuous RCFS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
21
6.3 RCDG (Reinforced Concrete Deck Girder Bridges) ……………………………………………………………………………
32
6.3.1 Simple RCDG ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
32
6.3.2 Continuous RCDG ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
43
6.4 PCDG (Prestressed Concrete Deck Girder Bridges) ……………………………………………………………………………
54
6.4.1 Simple PCDG ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
54
6.4.2 Continuous PCDG …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
66
6.5 Steel I-Girder Bridges …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
78
6.5.1 Simple SIG …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
78
6.5.2 Continuous SIG …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
85
6.6 RCDECK (Reinforced Concrete Deck Slab) …………………………………………………………………………………………
92
 User's Manual of Computer-Based Program on Load Rating
1. General
This User's Manual is divided into 6 sections showing the detail procedure for Load Rating.
DPWH through the assistance of JICA developed Manual for Load Rating of Bridges (MLRB) 2nd
Edition on March, 2009. In addition, a Computer-based Program on Load Rating of Bridges (CBPLR)
has been developed to complement MLRB. This 3rd Edition 2014, retains the original CBPLR
established in 2009.

This Program has the following advantages:

(1) It is easy to calculate the Load Rating for Major Bridge Types.
(2) This Program provides 4 Bridge Types including RC Deck Slab, not only Simple and Continuous
Bridges but also Interior and Exterior Girder. (refer to Section 5)
(3) DPWH Engineers can save time to determine the appropriate Load Rating
(4) DPWH Engineers can avoid inappropriate Load Rating Calculations

However, the pilot Bridges for Load Rating example have some unknown factors, therefore the User
should carefully give the Input Data with appropriate engineering judgements in this Program
as follows.
(1) To determine and measure appropriate Bridge Layout and Dimensions
(2) To determine and assume appropriate Rebar/PC Tendon Schedule inside concrete components
of Bridges
(3) To determine and assume appropriate Material Properties.
(4) To determine the appropriate evaluation for Bridge Current Condition (Damage).

2. Function of this Program

This Program provides Load Rating Calculations of Bridges.

3. Installation of Software
This Program requires the following softwares which should be installed in your computer.
Microsoft Excel 2003 or 2007 or 2010
Microsoft Windows XP or Vista or Windows 7

4. Installing and Uninstalling Procedures of CBPLR

4.1 Installing
(1) Start your computer
(2) Insert the CBPLR set up CD. Then you can see the program files and folder as shown below.
(3) "Copy" the Program "CBPLR".
(4) "Paste" it to your computer root directory C:

Program CD Insert Program CD to your PC

CBPLR

LOAD RATING

1
4.1.1 Copy to your computer directory C: drive

4.1.2 Starting

Double click folder "Load Rating Program" and "MENU" then Excel file "MENU"

4.2 Uninstalling

Delete "CBPLR" from Directory C:

2
5. Procedure of "MENU" in this Program

5.1 TITLE
After opening the Excel file "Menu", then click button on this screen.
ENTER

5.2 Flowchart of Load rating Procedure

Flow Chart of Load Rating Procedure is shown below. This Program covers part.

After reconfirming the Flowchart, click "NEXT" button.

3
5.3 Bridge Condition Inspection Results
The overall condition state G, F, P and B of the bridge should be determined by the Accredited Bridge
Engineer. User should select the actual overall condition state based on the Condition Inspection Survey
or Engineering Inspection Survey in Bridge Management System.
In case of selecting P and B, click button "Yes" then directly proceed to the next screen "MENU"

5.4 Menu of Load Rating

This screen links with all Excel programs for each Bridge types. The User can use the directory and
proceed in selecting the bridge type by clicking cell of the objective bridge types. They are;
RCFS (Reinforced Concrete Flat Slab Bridge) : Simple RC Flat Slab
Continuous RC Flat Slab
RCDG (Reinforced Concrete Deck Girder Bridge) : Simple Interior and Exterior Girder
Continuous Interior and Exterior Girder
PCDG (Prestressed Concrete Deck Girder Bridge) : Simple Interior and Exterior Girder
Continuous Interior and Exterior Girder
SIG (Steel I Girder Bridge) : Simple Interior and Exterior Girder
Continuous Interior and Exterior Girder
RCDECK (Reinforced Concrete Deck Slab)

Cells of each Bridge Types

4
6. Procedure of "Load Rating Program of each bridge type" in this Program

6.1 General

6.1.1 Load Rating Principles

When operating the Load Rating Program, Load Rating Principles should be kept
through many activities as follows

RESISTANCE ≥ DEMAND

Structural Analysis
Allowable Stress
Material for Continuous Bridges
Properties Appropriate
Strength Determination
Layout and Dimension
and Assumption
Dimension
PC Tendons and Rebar Schedule under
Engineering Unit Weight
Damage Evaluation
Inspection
Refer to Standard Bridge Drawings Refer to Standard Bridge Drawings

Bridge Condition (Damage) Site Inspection

under
Detail Measurement of
Rebar Schedule Condition and
Layout and Dimension
Engineering
Testings Inspection

As built Drawings
Year Built Filing up data As built Drawings
Repair Record under
Update Inspection Records Inventory and Update Inspection Records
Preparation of Plan Drawings Routine Preparation of Plan Drawings
Approach for Inspection Approach for
Regulatory of Overloadings Regulatory of Overloadings

5
6.1.2 Damage Evaluation
6.1.2 Damage Evaluation

Damage ev aluation is considered in this Program as follows:

Condition State
2-Poor or 3-Bad
2-Poor or more at near Support or near Midspan
Location (Section)
where loaded maximum demand forces
For Concrete Girder
greater than 0.3mm and its spacing
Cracking
smaller than 500mm
Sev erity
Rebar exposure greater than 50 cm2 exposed and corroded
of
defect For Concrete Deck Slab
At Midspan greater than 0.3mm, 2 directions,
Cracking
At Support and its spacing smaller than 500mm
2
Rebar exposure greater than 50 cm exposed and corroded
For Steel Girder

greater than 10% section loss

Corrosion
stratified rust with pitting of metal surface

Damage ev aluation method is as follows:

Cracking Not consider concrete section loss of tension fiber

due to Moment Consider only by rebar exposure of tension fiber
Consider by reduction factor (Φ) according to shear crack depth (Cw)
as mentioned below
Cw = > 0.5 b applying Φ= 1.0
then Shear resistance due to Concrete Vc = 0
Cw < 0.5 b then Φ= Cw / b
then Shear resistance due to Concrete Vc * = ( 1- Φ) x Vc

　For example, b = 400mm and shear crack depth 150mm

*
Vc = ( 1-150 / 400 ) x Vc = 0.625 Vc
Concrete
Girder and Cracking Shear crack depth
Deck Slab due to Shear

Shear crack

Section loss of main Rebar (%) based on exposed Area

Rebar Exposure
Section loss of stirrups (%) based on exposed Area
Steel Actual section loss should be applied to steel girder dimension,
Corrosion
Girder and then calculate section properties considering section loss

6
6.1.3 Program Contents
1 TITLE Cov er Page
2 FLOW Flow Chart of Load Rating Procedure
MENU
3 BCIR Bridge Condition Inspection Results
4 MENU Menu of Bridge Load Rating
RCFS: REINFORCED CONCRETE FLAT SLAB BRIDGE
1 GENERAL A1. General Bridge Description
2 LAYOUT A2. Bridge Layout and Dimension
3 DFDLLL B. Demand Forces Calculation for DL and LL
SIMPLE 4 CCLFM C1. Capacity Calculations for Moment and Shear
5 LRLFM C2. Load Rating Calculations by LFM
RCFS and 6 POSTLL D1.Demand Forces for Load Posting Vehicles
7 POSTLFM D2. Posting Rating Calculations by LFM
CONTINUOUS 8 CCASM E1. Moment and Shear Capacity Calculations
9 LRASM E2. Load Rating Calculations by ASM
10 POSTASM F. Load Posting by ASM
11 POSTSUM G. Summary of Load Posting
RCDG: REINFORCED CONCRETE DECK SLAB GIRDER BRIDGE
1 GENERAL A1. General Bridge Description
2 LAYOUT A2. Bridge Layout and Dimension
3 DFDLLL B. Demand Forces Calculation for DL and LL
SIMPLE INTERIOR 4 CCLFM C1. Capacity Calculations for Moment and Shear
GIRDER 5 LRLFM C2. Load Rating Calculations by LFM
RCDG and and 6 POSTLL D1.Demand Forces for Load Posting Vehicles
EXTERIOR 7 POSTLFM D2. Posting Rating Calculations by LFM
CONTINUOUS GIRDER 8 CCASM E1. Moment and Shear Capacity Calculations
9 LRASM E2. Load Rating Calculations by ASM
POSTASM
10 F. Load Posting by ASM
11 POSTSUM G. Summary of Load Posting
PCDG: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE I GIRDER BRIDGE
1 GENERAL A1. General Bridge Description
2 LAYOUT A2. Bridge Layout and Dimension
3 DFDLLL B. Demand Forces Calculation for DL and LL
4 DSC B3. Demand Stresses Calculations
SIMPLE INTERIOR
5 CCMS C. Capacity Calculations for Moment and Shear
GIRDER
6 LRC C1. Load Rating Calculations
PCDG and and
7 LRSUM C2.3 Summary of Rating Factor and Load Rating
EXTERIOR
8 POSTLL D1. Demand Forces for Load Posting Vehicles
CONTINUOUS GIRDER
9 POSTLR1 D2. Posting Rating Calculations
10 POSTLR2 D3.1 Posting Load Rating Calculations
11 POSTSUM D3.3 Summary of Posting Rating Factor and Load Rating
12 SUMMARY E. Summary of Load Posting
SIG: STEEL I-GIRDER BRIDGE
1 GENERAL A1. General Bridge Description
SIMPLE INTERIOR 2 LAYOUT A2. Bridge Layout and Dimension
GIRDER 3 DFDLLL B1. Demand Forces Calculations for DL and LL
SIG and and 4 DSDLLL B5. Demand Stresses Calculations for DL and LL
EXTERIOR 5 LRASM C. Load Rating Calculations by ASM
CONTINUOUS GIRDER 6 POSTASM D. Load Posting by ASM
7 POSTSUM E. Posting Load Rating Calculations
1 LAYOUT A. Bridge Layout and Dimension
2 DFDLLL B. Demand Forces Calculations
3 CCLFM C1. Capacity Calculations
RCDECK
4 LRLFM C2. Load Rating Calculations by LFM
5 POSTLL D. Load Posting by LFM
6 POSTSUM E.. Summary of Load Posting

7
6.1.4 Differences Between Interior Girder and Exterior Girder

Demand Slab Dimension only intermediate continuous slab

Interior
Forces Live load distribution factor = S / 1.829
Girder
Resistance According to Slab Dimension
Demand Slab Dimension composed continuous and cantilever slab
Exterior
Forces Live load distribution factor = ( S - 1.829 ) / S
Girder
Resistance According to Slab Dimension

6.1.5 Differences Between Simple Girder and Continuous Girder

(1) RCFS (Reinforced Concrete Flat Slab Brdige)

Demand
Simple All Demand Forces can be calculated in this Program
Forces
Girder
Resistance Section for Load Rating is only at Midspan calculating for Moment
Demand Superimposed Dead Load and Live Load supported on Continuous Girder
Forces should be given by separate analysis with appropriate structural model
Continuous
Sections for Load Rating are at Midspan and Pier Support calculating only
Girder
Resistance for Moment
Longitudinal Rebar Schedule at Pier Support should be additionally given

(2) RCDG (Reinforced Concrete Deck Slab Girder Bridge) and

PCDG (Prestressed Concrete I Girder Bridge)

Demand
All Demand Forces can be calculated in this Program
Simple Forces
Girder Sections for Load Rating are at Midspan and Support calculating for
Resistance
Moment and Shear
Demand Superimposed Dead Load and Live Load supported on Continuous Girder
Forces should be given by separate analysis with appropriate structural model
Continuous
Section for Load Rating is at Midspan and Pier Support calculating for
Girder
Resistance Moment and Shear
Longitudinal Rebar Schedule at Pier Support should be additionally given

(3) SIG (Steel I Girder Bridge)

Demand All Demand Forces can be calculated in this Program

Simple Forces Three (3) sections are prepared for calculation of forces
Girder Sections for Load Rating are also prepared three (3) sections at Midspan,
Resistance
Support and severe damaged section calculating for Moment and Shear
Demand Superimposed Dead Load and Live Load supported on Continuous Girder
Forces should be given by separate analysis with appropriate structural model
Continuous
Sections for Load Rating are two (2) sections at Midspan and Pier Support
Girder
Resistance calculating for Moment and Shear
Longitudinal Rebar Schedule at Pier Support should be additionally given

8
6.1.6 Meaning of Colored Cells

Light Blue Cells Original Input

Yellow Cells Calculated Figures by Original Input/Calculated Figure
Orange Cells Load Factor and Load Rating calculated by original input/calculated figures
Glay Cells Linked Cells
White Cells Specified Figures/Letters
Note : User can modify Light Blue Cells only.
Other cells have calculation formulas which are protected and can be not changed or altered.

6.1.7 Drawings Attached for Each Bridge Types

The drawings attached for each bridge types in this Program are just references based on initial data
of Load Rating.
Properly, the drawings of an objective bridge should be individually prepared to obtain accurate input
data such as bridge layout, dimensions, Rebar schedule, PC tendons schedule and others.

9
6.2 RCFS (Reinforced Concrete Flat Slab Bridge)

6.2.1 Simple RCFS

Sheet 1 ( GENERAL ) : Input data of Bridge Description

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

*pc: for Prestressed Concrete

Note
Input Data Light blue cells should be filled up.

It should be taken from GENERAL NOTE in the as built drawings or in the

Standard Bridge Design. In case of non-availability of data, It should be
Material Properties
taken based on the Bridge Year Built.
( refer to Table shown in the above Table)

RCFS
SIMPLE
10
 Sheet 2 ( LAYOUT ) : Input Data of Bridge Layout and Dimension

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Light blue cells should be filled up, these are;
- Girder Dimension : Overall Width
Input Data
- Slab Dimension : Width and Thickness
- Span Length
Drawings (Elevation and Cross Section) for the objective bridge should be
Drawings
prepared as shown in this screen.

RCFS
SIMPLE
11
 Sheet 3 (DFDLLL ) : Demand Forces Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 128 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Slab Width Slab Width for Load Rating Calculations is applied 1m width.
They are calculated besed on the Load Rating Manual Appendix III
Live Load Forces
( refer to Table shown in the next pages of this Sheet 3 )
Uniform Load WDL =AxW
Dead
MDL = 1/8 x WDL x L2
Load
VDL = 1/2 x WDL x L
Applied Equation
ML Refer to Load Rating Manual Appendix III
in Output
Live MLL = ML x D.F x Impact
Load VL Refer to Load Rating Manual Appendix III
VLL = ML x D.F x Impact

RCFS
SIMPLE
12
 Sheet 4 (CCLFM): Capacity Calculations for Moment at Midspan and Shear at Support

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 129 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Light blue cells should be filled up, these are;
Input Data Rebar Main Reinforcements Schedule
Damage Evaluation Secton Losses due to Rebar exposure caused by Moment
Drawings (Rebar Schedule) for the objective bridge should be prepared
Drawings as shown in this screen.
Applied Equation Ultimate Moment MU = Uf x As' x fy x ( d - a )
in Output Capacity MU where, a = ( As' x fy) / ( 0.85 x f'c x beff )

RCFS
SIMPLE
13
 Sheet 5 ( LRLFM ) : Load Rating Calculations

According to the Instruction shown in

this screen, User have to click
a gray coloured cell "Return to
GENERAL" or "LOAD POSTING", then
proceed directly to the next screen.

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 130 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

Applied Equation Rating Factor RF RF = ( Φ x Rn - γD x DL ) / ( γLL x ( LL + I ) )

in Output Load Rating LR LR = RF x ( Vehicle Weight )

RCFS
SIMPLE
14
 Sheet 6 ( POSTLL ) : Demand Forces Calculations for Load Posting Vehicles
( Type 1-1, Type 1-2 and Type 12-2 )

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 130 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

Posting Live Load They are calculated besed on the Load Rating Manual Appendix III.
Forces ( refer to Table shown in the next pages of this Sheet 6 )
ML Refer to Load Rating Manual Appendix III
Posting MLL = ML x D.F x Impact
Applied Equation
Live
in Output VL Refer to Load Rating Manual Appendix III
Load
VLL = ML x D.F x Impact

RCFS
SIMPLE
15
 Sheet 7 ( POSTLFM ) : Posting Rating Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 131 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

Applied Equation Rating Factor RF RF = ( Φ x Rn - γD x DL ) / ( γLL x ( LL + I ) )

in Output Load Rating LR LR = RF x ( Vehicle Weight )

RCFS
SIMPLE
16
 Sheet 8 ( CCASM ) : Moment and Shear Capacity Calculations by ASM

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 131, 132 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Mc = (Compression zone resultant force "C") x fc x jd
Applied Equation
Moment Capacity Ms = As x fs x jd
in Output
Mu is governing smaller figure either Mc or Ms

RCFS
SIMPLE
17
 Sheet 9 ( LRASM ) : Load Rating Calculations by ASM

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 132 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

Applied Equation Rating Factor RF = ( R - A1 x D ) / ( A2 x L ( 1 + I ) )

in Output Load Rating LR = RF x 33.0 ( Vehicle Wejght )

RCFS
SIMPLE
18
 Sheet 10 ( POSTASM ) : Load Posting Calculations by ASM

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 133 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

Applied Equation Rating Factor RF = ( R - A1 x D ) / ( A2 x L ( 1 + I ) )

in Output Load Rating LR = RF x ( Each Posting Vehicle Wejght )

RCFS
SIMPLE
19
 Sheet 11 ( POSTSUM ) : Summary of Load Posting

LOAD

After confirmation of this sheet, click

"BACK TO GENERAL" button then
proceed directly to the next screen.

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 133 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

RCFS
SIMPLE
20
6.2.2 Continuous RCFS

Sheet 1 ( GENERAL ) : Input Data of Bridge Description

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

*pc: for Prestressed Concrete

Note
Input Data Light blue cells should be filled up.

Differences compared
Simple or Continuous, Number of Span and Bridge Length.
with Simple RCFS
It should be taken from GENERAL NOTE in the as built drawings or in the
Material Properties Standard Bridge Design. In case of non-availability of data, It should be taken
based on the Bridge Year Built. ( refer to Table shown in the above Table)

RCFS
CONTINUOUS
21
 Sheet 2 ( LAYOUT ) : Input Data of Bridge Layout and Dimension

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Light blue cells should be filled up, these are;
- Girder Dimension : Overall Width
Input Data
- Slab Dimension : Width and Thickness
- Span Length
Differences compared
Drawing of Bridge Elevation.
with Simple RCFS
Drawings (Elevation and Cross Section) for the objective bridge should be
Drawings
prepared as shown in this screen.

RCFS
CONTINUOUS
22
 Sheet 3 (DFDLLL ) : Demand Forces Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 146 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Load Demands on continuous bridge should be given.
Differences compared
Load demands should be separately analized with appropriate structural Model.
with Simple RCFS
Slab Width Slab Width for Load Rating Calculations is applied 1m width.
Uniform Load WDL =AxW
Applied Equation Dead
MDL = 1/8 x WDL x L2
in Output Load
VDL = 1/2 x WDL x L

RCFS
CONTINUOUS
23
 Sheet 4 (CCLFM): Capacity Calculations for Moment at Midspan and Shear at Support

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 146, 147 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Light blue cells should be filled up, these are;
Input Data Rebar Main Reinforcements Schedule
Damage Evaluation Secton Losses due to Rebar exposure caused by Moment
Differences compared
Rebar schedule at Pier should be added.
with Simple RCFS
Drawings (Rebar Schedule) for the objective bridge should be prepared
Drawings
as shown in this screen.
Applied Equation Ultimate Moment MU = Uf x As' x fy x ( d - a )
in Output Capacity MU where, a = ( As' x fy) / ( 0.85 x f'c x beff )

RCFS
CONTINUOUS
24
 Sheet 5 ( LRLFM ) : Load Rating Calculations

According to the Instruction shown in this

screen, User have to click
a gray coloured cell "Return to
GENERAL" or "LOAD POSTING", then
proceed directly to the next screen.

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 148 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier.
with Simple RCFS
Applied Equation Rating Factor RF RF = ( Φ x Rn - γD x DL ) / ( γLL x ( LL + I ) )
in Output Load Rating LR LR = RF x ( Vehicle Weight )

RCFS
CONTINUOUS
25
 Sheet 6 ( POSTLL ) : Demand Forces Calculations for Load Posting Vehicles

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 149 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Load Demands loaded on continuous bridge should be given.

Differences compared Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier
with Simple RCFS Load demands should be separately analized with appropriate structural Model.

RCFS
CONTINUOUS
26
 Sheet 7 ( POSTLFM ) : Posting Rating Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 149 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier
with Simple RCFS
Applied Equation Rating Factor RF RF = ( Φ x Rn - γD x DL ) / ( γLL x ( LL + I ) )
in Output Load Rating LR LR = RF x ( Vehicle Weight )

RCFS
CONTINUOUS
27
 Sheet 8 ( CCASM ) : Moment and Shear Capacity Calculations by ASM

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 150, 151, 152 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier
with Simple RCFS
Mc = (Compression zone resultant force "C") x fc x jd
Applied Equation
Moment Capacity Ms = As x fs x jd
in Output
Mu is governing smaller figure either Mc or Ms

RCFS
CONTINUOUS
28
 Sheet 9 ( LRASM ) : Load Rating Calculations by ASM

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 152 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier
with Simple RCFS
Applied Equation Rating Factor RF = ( R - A1 x D ) / ( A2 x L ( 1 + I ) )
in Output Load Rating LR = RF x ( Vehicle Wejght )

RCFS
CONTINUOUS
29
 Sheet 10 ( POSTASM ) : Load Posting Calculations by ASM

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 153 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier
with Simple RCFS
Applied Equation Rating Factor RF = ( R - A1 x D ) / ( A2 x L ( 1 + I ) )
in Output Load Rating LR = RF x ( Each Posting Vehicle Wejght )

RCFS
CONTINUOUS
30
 Sheet 11 ( POSTSUM ) : Summary of Load Posting

LOAD

After confirmation of this sheet, click

"BACK TO GENERAL" button then
proceed directly to the next screen.

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 154 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

RCFS
CONTINUOUS
31
6.3 RCDG (Reinforced Concrete Deck Girder Bridge)

6.3.1 Simple RCDG

Sheet 1 ( GENERAL ) : Input Data of Bridge Description

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

*pc: for Prestressed Concrete

Note
Input Data Light blue cells should be filled up.

It should be taken from GENERAL NOTE in the as built drawings or in the

Standard Bridge Design. In case of non-availability of data, It should be
Material Properties
taken based on the Bridge Year Built.
( refer to Table shown in the above Table)

RCDG
32 SIMPLE
 Sheet 2 ( LAYOUT ) : Input Data of Bridge Layout and Dimension

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Light blue cells should be filled up, these are;
- Girder Dimension : Width and Web Height
Input Data
- Slab Dimension : Fillet/Hunch Width and Height, and Slab Thickness
- Span Length
Drawings (Elevation and Cross Section) for the objective bridge should be
Drawings
prepared as shown in this screen.

RCDG
33 SIMPLE
 Sheet 3 (DFDLLL ) : Demand Forces Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 168 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
They are calculated based on the Load Rating Manual Appendix III
Live Load Forces
( refer to Table shown in the next pages of this Sheet 3 )
Uniform Load WDL =AxW
Dead
MDL = 1/8 x WDL x L2
Load
VDL = 1/2 x WDL x L
Applied Equation
ML Refer to Load Rating Manual Appendix III
in Output
Live MLL = ML x D.F x Impact
Load VL Refer to Load Rating Manual Appendix III
VLL = ML x D.F x Impact

RCDG
34 SIMPLE
Sheet 4 (CCLFM): Capacity Calculations for Moment at Midspan and Shear at Support

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 169, 170 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Light blue cells should be filled up, these are;
Main Reinforcements Schedule
Rebar
Stirrups Schedule
Input Data
Secton Losses due to Rebar exposure caused by Moment

Damage Evaluation Depth of Shear Cracks

Secton Losses due to Stirrups exposure caused by Shear
Drawings (Rebar Schedule) for the objective bridge should be prepared
Drawings
as shown in this screen.
Ultimate Moment MU = Uf x As' x fy x ( d - a )
Capacity MU where, a = ( As' x fy) / ( 0.85 x f'c x beff )
Applied Equation
in Output VU = Φ x ( Vc + Vs )
Ultimate Shear
where, Vc = 0.167 x Sqrt ( f'c ) x b x d
Capacity VU
Vs = 2 x Av' x fy x deff / S

RCDG
35 SIMPLE
 Sheet 5 ( LRLFM ) : Load Rating Calculations

According to the Instruction shown in

this screen, User have to click
a gray coloured cell "Return to
GENERAL" or "LOAD POSTING", then
proceed directly to the next screen.

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 170, 171 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

Applied Equation Rating Factor RF RF = ( Φ x Rn - γD x DL ) / ( γLL x ( LL + I ) )

in Output Load Rating LR LR = RF x ( Vehicle Weight )

RCDG
36 SIMPLE
 Sheet 6 ( POSTLL ) : Demand Forces Calculations for Load Posting Vehicles
( Type 1-1, Type 1-2 and Type 12-2 )

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 171 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary any input data.

Posting Live Load They are calculated based on the Load Rating Manual Appendix III.
Forces ( refer to Table shown in the next pages of this Sheet 6 )
ML Refer to Load Rating Manual Appendix III
Posting MLL = ML x D.F x Impact
Applied Equation
Live
in Output VL Refer to Load Rating Manual Appendix III
Load
VLL = ML x D.F x Impact

RCDG
37 SIMPLE
 Sheet 7 ( POSTLFM ) : Posting Rating Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 171 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

Applied Equation Rating Factor RF RF = ( Φ x Rn - γD x DL ) / ( γLL x ( LL + I ) )

in Output Load Rating LR LR = RF x ( Vehicle Weight )

RCDG
38 SIMPLE
 Sheet 8 ( CCASM ) : Moment and Shear Capacity Calculations by ASM

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 172, 173, 174 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Only Allowable Stress of Rebar should be given.

Yinput should be given as same value with Ycalculate. By giving an initial

Input Data value of Yinput, then User can get a value of Ycalculate. Repeating to
apply Ycalculate as a Yinput, Yinput as same value with Ycalculate will be
taken. In case Y is within slab thickness, Ycalculate and Yinput will be equal
to zero (0).

Mc = (Compression zone resultant force "C") x fc x jd

Moment Capacity Ms = As x fs x jd
Mu is governing smaller figure either Mc or Ms
Applied Equation
in Output Vc = 0.08 x Sqrt ( f'c ) x bw x d ( for Inventory )
Vc = 0.12 x Sqrt ( f'c ) x bw x d ( for Operating )
Shear Capacity
Vs = ( 2 x Av x fs x ds ) / S
Vu = Vc + Vs

RCDG
39 SIMPLE
 Sheet 9 ( LRASM ) : Load Rating Calculations by ASM

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 174 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Applied Equation Rating Factor RF = ( R - A1 x D ) / ( A2 x L ( 1 + I ) )
in Output Load Rating LR = RF x 33.0 ( Vehicle Wejght )

RCDG
40 SIMPLE
 Sheet 10 ( POSTASM ) : Load Posting Calculations by ASM

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 174, 175 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

Applied Equation Rating Factor RF = ( R - A1 x D ) / ( A2 x L ( 1 + I ) )

in Output Load Rating LR = RF x ( Each Posting Vehicle Wejght )

RCDG
41 SIMPLE
 Sheet 11 ( POSTSUM ) : Summary of Load Posting

LOAD

After confirmation of this sheet, click

button "END GO TO RC DECK SLAB" then
proceed directly to the next screen.

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 175 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

RCDG
42 SIMPLE
6.3.2 Continuous RCDG

Sheet 1 ( GENERAL ) : Input a Bridge Description for Load Rating

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

*pc: for Prestressed Concrete

Note
Input Data Light blue cells should be filled up.
Differences compared
Simple or Continuous, Number of Span and Bridge Length.
with Simple RCDG
It should be taken from GENERAL NOTE in the as built drawings or in the
Material Properties Standard Bridge Design. In case of non-availability of data, It should be taken
based on the Bridge Year Built. ( refer to Table shown in the above Table)

RCDG
43 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 2 ( LAYOUT ) : Input Data of Bridge Layout and Dimension

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Light blue cells should be filled up, these are;
- Girder Dimension : Width and Web Height
Input Data
- Slab Dimension : Fillet/Hunch Width and Height, and Slab Thickness
- Span Length
Differences compared
Drawing of Bridge Elevation.
with Simple RCDG
Drawings (Elevation and Cross Section) for the objective bridge should be
Drawings
prepared as shown in this screen.

RCDG
44 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 3 (DFDLLL ) : Demand Forces Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 188 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Load Demands on continuous bridge should be given.
Differences compared
Load demands should be separately analized with appropriate structural Model.
with Simple RCDG

RCDG
45 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 4 (CCLFM): Capacity Calculations for Moment at Midspan and Shear at Support

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 189, 190 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Light blue cells should be filled up, these are;
Main Reinforcements Schedule
Rebar
Stirrups Schedule at Pier
Input Data
Secton Losses due to Rebar exposure caused by Moment

Damage Evaluation Depth of Shear Cracks

Secton Losses due to Stirrups exposure caused by Shear
Differences compared
Rebar schedule at Pier should be added.
with Simple RCDG
Drawings (Rebar Schedule) for the objective bridge should be prepared
Drawings
as shown in this screen.
Ultimate Moment MU = Uf x As' x fy x ( d - a )
Capacity MU where, a = ( As' x fy) / ( 0.85 x f'c x beff )
Applied Equation
VU = Φ x ( Vc + Vs )
in Output Ultimate Shear
where, Vc = 0.167 x Sqrt ( f'c ) x b x d
Capacity VU
Vs = 2 x Av' x fy x deff / S

RCDG
46 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 5 ( LRLFM ) : Load Rating Calculations

According to the Instruction shown in

this screen, User have to click
a gray coloured cell "Return to
GENERAL" or "LOAD POSTING", then
proceed directly to the next screen.

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 191 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier.
with Simple RCDG
Applied Equation Rating Factor RF RF = ( Φ x Rn - γD x DL ) / ( γLL x ( LL + I ) )
in Output Load Rating LR LR = RF x ( Vehicle Weight )

RCDG
47 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 6 ( POSTLL ) : Demand Forces Calculations for Load Posting Vehicles
( Type 1-1, Type 1-2 and Type 12-2 )

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 192 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Load demands should be separately analyzed with appropriate structural Model.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier
with Simple RCDG

RCDG
48 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 7 ( POSTLFM ) : Posting Rating Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 192 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier
with Simple RCDG
Applied Equation Rating Factor RF RF = ( Φ x Rn - γD x DL ) / ( γLL x ( LL + I ) )
in Output Load Rating LR LR = RF x ( Vehicle Weight )

RCDG
49 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 8 ( CCASM ) : Moment and Shear Capacity Calculations by ASM

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 193 - 196 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Only Allowable Stress of Rebar should be given.
Yinput should be given as the same value with Ycalculate. By giving a initial value
Input Data of Yinput, then the User can get a value of Ycalculate. Repeating to apply
Ycalculate as a Yinput, Yinput as same value with Ycalculate will be taken.
In case Y is within the slab thickness, Ycalculate and Yinput will be applied as zero
(0).
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier
with Simple RCDG
Mc = (Compression zone resultant force "C") x fc x jd
Moment Capacity Ms = As x fs x jd
Mu is governing smaller figure either Mc or Ms
Applied Equation
Vc = 0.08 x Sqrt ( f'c ) x bw x d ( for Inventory )
in Output
Vc = 0.12 x Sqrt ( f'c ) x bw x d ( for Operating )
Shear Capacity
Vs = ( 2 x Av x fs x ds ) / S
Vu = Vc + Vs

RCDG
50 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 9 ( LRASM ) : Load Rating Calculations by ASM

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 197 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier
with Simple RCDG
Applied Equation Rating Factor RF = ( R - A1 x D ) / ( A2 x L ( 1 + I ) )
in Output Load Rating LR = RF x 33.0 ( Vehicle Wejght )

RCDG
51 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 10 ( POSTASM ) : Load Posting Calculations by ASM

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 197, 198 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier
with Simple RCDG
Applied Equation Rating Factor RF = ( R - A1 x D ) / ( A2 x L ( 1 + I ) )
in Output Load Rating LR = RF x ( Each Posting Vehicle Wejght )

RCDG
52 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 11 ( POSTSUM ) : Summary of Load Posting

LOAD

After confirmation of this sheet, click

button "END GO TO RC DECK SLAB" then
directly proceed to the next screen.

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 198 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

RCDG
53 CONTINUOUS
6.4 PCDG (Prestressed Concrete Deck Girder Bridge)

6.4.1 Simple PCDG

Sheet 1 ( GENERAL ) : Input Data of Bridge Description

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

*pc: for Prestressed Concrete

Note
Input Data Light blue cells should be filled up.

It should be taken from GENERAL NOTE in the as built drawings or in the

Material Properties Standard Bridge Design. In case of non-availability of data, It should be taken
based on the Bridge Year Built. ( refer to Table shown in the above Table)

PCDG
54 SIMPLE
 Sheet 2 ( LAYOUT ) : Input a Bridge Layout and Dimension for Load Rating

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Light blue cells should be filled up, these are;
- Girder Dimension : Girder Height, and
Input Data
Width and Height for Upper/Lower Flange and Web
- Slab Dimension : Slab Width and Slab Thickness
Drawings (Elevation, Cross Section and Girder Details) for the objective bridge
Drawings
should be prepared as shown in this screen.

PCDG
55 SIMPLE
 Sheet 3 (DFDLLL ) : Demand Forces Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 213, 214 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Weight of Diaphram should be given.
They are calculated besed on the Load Rating Manual Appendix III
Live Load Forces
( refer to Table shown in the next pages of this Sheet 3 )
Uniform Load WDL =AxW
Dead
MDL = 1/8 x WDL x L2
Load
VDL = 1/2 x WDL x L
Applied Equation
ML Refer to Load Rating Manual Appendix III
in Output
Live MLL = ML x D.F x Impact
Load VL Refer to Load Rating Manual Appendix III
VLL = ML x D.F x Impact

PCDG
56 SIMPLE
 Sheet 4 (DSC) : Demand Stresses Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 214, 215 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Applied Equation
Stresses Moment = M / Sx ( = Y / Iz x M )
in Output

PCDG
57 SIMPLE
Sheet 5 (CCMS): Capacity Calculations for Moment at Midspan and Shear at Support

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 216, 217 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Light blue cells should be filled up, these are;
Section Losses (%)
Prestressing Steel
Yield strength fy

Cinput should be given as the same value with Neutral axis location in the left
side cell of Cinput. By giving a initial value of Cinput, then the User can get a
Input Data value of Neutral axis location. Repeating to apply Neutral axis location as a
Cinput, Cinput as same value with Neutral axis location will be taken.

Diameter of Stirrups
Rebar
Spacing of Stirrups
Depth of Shear Cracks
Damage Evaluation
Secton Losses due to Stirrups exposure caused by Shear
MU = Uf x As' x fy x ( d - a )
Moment Capacity MU
where, a = ( As' x fy) / ( 0.85 x f'c x beff )
Applied Equation
VU = Φ x ( Vc + Vs )
in Output
Shear Capacity VU where, Vc = 0.05 x Sqrt ( f'c ) x b x d x Φ
Vs = 2 x Av' x fy x deff / S

PCDG
58 SIMPLE
 Sheet 6 ( LRC ) : Load Rating Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 217, 218 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
All Load = 0.6 x f'c - ( Fd + Fp + Fs ) / Fl
Rating Under Compression
Applied Live Load = 0.4 x f'c - 0.5 x ( Fd + Fp + Fs ) / Fl
Factor SLS
Equation ( RF ) Tension = 0.5 x sqrt ( f'c ) - ( Fd + Fp + Fs ) / Fl
in Output = ( Φ x Rn - γD x DL ) / ( γLL x ( LL + I ) )
Under Strength Limit State
Load Rating ( LR ) LR = RF x 33.0 ( Vehicle Weight )

PCDG
59 SIMPLE
 Sheet 7 ( LRSUM ) : Summary of Rating Factor and Load Rating

According to the Instruction shown in

this screen, User have to click
a gray coloured cell "Return to
GENERAL" or "LOAD POSTING", then
proceed directly to the next screen.

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 217, 218 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

PCDG
60 SIMPLE
 Sheet 8 ( POSTLL ) : Demand Forces Calculations for Load Posting Vehicles
( Type 1-1, Type 1-2 and Type 12-2 )

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 219 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

Posting Live Load They are calculated besed on the Load Rating Manual Appendix III.
Forces ( refer to Table shown in the next pages of this Sheet 8 )
ML Refer to Load Rating Manual Appendix III
Posting MLL = ML x D.F x Impact
Applied Equation
Live
in Output VL Refer to Load Rating Manual Appendix III
Load
VLL = ML x D.F x Impact

PCDG
61 SIMPLE
 Sheet 9 ( POSTLR1 ) : Posting Load Rating Calculations (1)

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 219, 220 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Stresses for Posting Live Load = M / Sx ( = Y / Iz x M )
Applied All Load = 0.6 x f'c - ( Fd + Fp + Fs ) / Fl
Equation Rating Compression
Under
in Output Factor Live Load = 0.4 x f'c - 0.5 x ( Fd + Fp + Fs ) / Fl
SLS
( RF ) Tension = 0.5 x sqrt ( f'c ) - ( Fd + Fp + Fs ) / Fl

PCDG
62 SIMPLE
 Sheet 10 ( POSTLR2 ) : Posting Load Rating Calculations (2)

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 220 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

Applied Equation Rating Factor RF RF = ( Φ x Rn - γD x DL ) / ( γLL x ( LL + I ) )

in Output Load Rating LR LR = RF x ( Each Posting Vehicle Weight )

PCDG
63 SIMPLE
 Sheet 11 ( POSTSUM ) : Summary of Posting Rating Factor and Load Rating

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 219, 220, 221 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

PCDG
64 SIMPLE
 Sheet 12 ( SUMMARY ) : Summary of Load Posting

LOAD

After confirmation of this sheet, click

button "END GO TO RC DECK SLAB" then
proceed directly to the next screen.

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 221 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

PCDG
65 SIMPLE
6.4.2 Continuous PCDG

Sheet 1 ( GENERAL ) : Input Data of Bridge Description

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

*pc: for Prestressed Concrete

Note
Input Data Light blue cells should be filled up.
Differences compared
Simple or Continuous, Number of Span and Bridge Length.
with Simple PCDG
It should be taken from GENERAL NOTE in the as built drawings or in the
Material Properties Standard Bridge Design. In case of non-availability of data, It should be taken
based on the Bridge Year Built. ( refer to Table shown in the above Table)

PCDG
66 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 2 ( LAYOUT ) : Input a Bridge Layout and Dimension for Load Rating

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Light blue cells should be filled up, these are;
- Girder Dimension : Girder Height, and
Input Data
Width and Height for Upper/Lower Flange and Web
- Slab Dimension : Slab Width and Slab Thickness
Differences compared
Drawing of Bridge Elevation.
with Simple PCDG
Drawings (Elevation, Cross Section and Girder Details) for the objective bridge
Drawings
should be prepared as shown in this screen.

PCDG
67 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 3 (DFDLLL ) : Demand Forces Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 235, 236 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Weight of Diaphram should be given.
Input Data
Load Demands on continuous bridge should be given.
Differences compared
Load demands should be separately analyzed with appropriate structural Model.
with Simple PCDG
Uniform Load WDL =AxW
Applied Equation Dead
MDL = 1/8 x WDL x L2
in Output Load
VDL = 1/2 x WDL x L

PCDG
68 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 4 (DSC) : Demand Stresses Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 236, 237 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier.
with Simple PCDG
Applied Equation
Stresses Moment = M / Sx ( = Y / Iz x M )
in Output

PCDG
69 CONTINUOUS
Sheet 5 (CCMS1): Capacity Calculations for Moment at Midspan and Shear at Support

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 238, 239 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Light blue cells should be filled up, these are;
Assumed prestressing loss including creep loss (Mpa)
Prestressing Steel
Section Losses (%)
at Midspan
Yield strength fy

Cinput should be given as the same value with Neutral axis location in the left side
cell of Cinput. By giving a initial value of Cinput, then the User can get a value of
Input Data
Neutral axis location. Repeating to apply Neutral axis location as a Cinput,
Cinput as same value with Neutral axis location will be taken.

Number of main rebar

Rebar
Diameter of main rebar
at Pier Support
Concrete cover
Damage Evaluation Secton Losses due to main rebar exposure caused by Moment
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier.
with Simple PCDG
Applied Equation MU = Uf x As' x fy x ( d - a )
Moment Capacity MU
in Output where, a = ( As' x fy) / ( 0.85 x f'c x beff )

PCDG
70 CONTINUOUS
Sheet 6 (CCMS2): Capacity Calculations for Moment at Midspan and Shear at Support

After confirmation of this sheet,

click button "NEXT" then directly
proceed to the next screen.
After confirmation of this sheet,
click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 240, 241 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Light blue cells should be filled up, these are;
Rebar both Diameter of stirrups
Input Data at Midspan and
at Pier Support Spacing of stirrups

Damage Evaluation Depth of Shear Cracks

Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier.
with Simple PCDG
VU = Φ x ( Vc + Vs )
Applied Equation
Shear Capacity VU where, Vc = 0.05 x Sqrt ( f'c ) x b x d x Φ
in Output
Vs = 2 x Av' x fy x deff / S

PCDG
71 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 7 ( LRC ) : Load Rating Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click button "NEXT" then directly
proceed to the next screen.
After confirmation of this sheet,
click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 242, 243 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier.
with Simple PCDG
All Load = 0.6 x f'c - ( Fd + Fp + Fs ) / Fl
Rating Under Compression
Applied Live Load = 0.4 x f'c - 0.5 x ( Fd + Fp + Fs ) / Fl
Factor SLS
Equation ( RF ) Tension = 0.5 x sqrt ( f'c ) - ( Fd + Fp + Fs ) / Fl
in Output = ( Φ x Rn - γD x DL ) / ( γLL x ( LL + I ) )
Under Strength Limit State
Load Rating ( LR ) LR = RF x 33.0 ( Vehicle Weight )

PCDG
72 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 8 ( LRSUM ) : Summary of Rating Factor and Load Rating

According to the Instruction shown in

this screen, User have to click
a gray coloured cell "Return to
GENERAL" or "LOAD POSTING", then
proceed directly to the next screen.

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 242, 243 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier.
with Simple PCDG

PCDG
73 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 9 ( POSTLR1 ) : Posting Load Rating Calculations (1)

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 244, 245 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Load demands should be separately analyzed with appropriate structural Model.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier.
with Simple PCDG
Stresses for Posting Live Load = M / Sx ( = Y / Iz x M )
Applied All Load = 0.6 x f'c - ( Fd + Fp + Fs ) / Fl
Equation Rating Compression
Under
in Output Factor Live Load = 0.4 x f'c - 0.5 x ( Fd + Fp + Fs ) / Fl
SLS
( RF ) Tension = 0.5 x sqrt ( f'c ) - ( Fd + Fp + Fs ) / Fl

PCDG
74 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 10 ( POSTLR2 ) : Posting Load Rating Calculations (2)

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 246, 247 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier.
with Simple PCDG
Applied Equation Rating Factor RF RF = ( Φ x Rn - γD x DL ) / ( γLL x ( LL + I ) )
in Output Load Rating LR LR = RF x ( Each Posting Vehicle Weight )

PCDG
75 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 11 ( POSTSUM ) : Summary of Posting Rating Factor and Load Rating

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 246, 247 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier.
with Simple PCDG

PCDG
76 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 12 ( SUMMARY ) : Summary of Load Posting

LOAD

After confirmation of this sheet, click

"END GO TO RC DECK SLAB" button
then proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 247 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

PCDG
77 CONTINUOUS
6.5 SIG (Steel I Girder Bridge)

6.5.1 Simple SIG

Sheet 1 ( GENERAL ) : Input Data of Bridge Description

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

*pc: for Prestressed Concrete

Note
Input Data Light blue cells should be filled up.

It should be taken from GENERAL NOTE in the as built drawings or in the

Standard Bridge Design. In case of non-availability of data, It should be
Material Properties
taken based on the Bridge Year Built.
( refer to Table shown in the above Table)

SIG
78 SIMPLE
Sheet 2 ( LAYOUT ) : Input a Bridge Layout and Dimension for Load Rating

* Only figure should be given

(in case of this screen, give
the "0.180" only)

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Light blue cells should be filled up, these are;
- Location of objective section
Input Data - Slab Dimension : Slab Thickness (Only figure should be given)
- Girder Dimension : Width and Height for Upper/Lower Flange and Web
- Length of objective section
Drawings (Elevation, Cross Section and Steel Girder Details) for the objective
Drawings
bridge should be prepared as shown in this screen.

SIG
79 SIMPLE
 Sheet 3 (DFDLLL ) : Demand Forces Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 258 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Original section area of section "A" should be given. This data is prepared
Input Data
in case section losses are observed in steel girder.
They are calculated besed on the Load Rating Manual Appendix III
Live Load Forces
( refer to Table shown in the next pages of this Sheet 3 )
Uniform Load WDL = Ax W
Applied Equation Dead
MDL = 1/8 x WDL x L2
in Output Load
VDL = 1/2 x WDL x L

SIG
80 SIMPLE
 Sheet 4 (DSDLLL ) : Demand Forces and Stresses Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 259, 260 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
They are calculated based on the Load Rating Manual Appendix III
Live Load Forces
( refer to Table shown in the next pages of this Sheet 3 )
ML Refer to Load Rating Manual Appendix III

Live MLL = ML x D.F x Impact

Applied Equation Load VL Refer to Load Rating Manual Appendix III
in Output VLL = ML x D.F x Impact
Moment = M / Sx ( = Y / Iz x M )
Stresses
Shear = ( Shear forces ) / ( Web Area )

SIG
81 SIMPLE
 Sheet 5 ( LRASM ) : Load Rating Calculations by ASM

According to the Instruction shown in

this screen, User have to click
a gray coloured cell "Return to
GENERAL" or "LOAD POSTING", then
proceed directly to the next screen.

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 260, 261 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Allowable compression stress, tensile stress and shear stress under inventory
Input Data
and operating should be given.

Applied Equation Rating Factor RF RF = ( Φ x Rn - γD x DL ) / ( γLL x ( LL + I ) )

in Output Load Rating LR LR = RF x 33.0 ( Vehicle Weight )

SIG
82 SIMPLE
 Sheet 6 ( POSTLL ) : Demand Forces and Stresses Calculations
for Load Posting Vehicles ( Type 1-1, Type 1-2 and Type 12-2 )

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 262 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

Posting Live Load They are calculated besed on the Load Rating Manual Appendix III.
Forces ( refer to Table shown in the next pages of this Sheet 6 )
ML Refer to Load Rating Manual Appendix III
Posting MLL = ML x D.F x Impact
Live
Applied Equation Load VL Refer to Load Rating Manual Appendix III
in Output VLL = ML x D.F x Impact
Moment = M / Sx ( = Y / Iz x M )
Stresses
Shear = ( Shear forces ) / ( Web Area )

SIG
83 SIMPLE
 Sheet 7 ( POSTLFM ) : Posting Rating Calculations

LOAD
After confirmation of this sheet, click"END
GO TO RC DECK SLAB" button then
proceed directly to the next screen.

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 263 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
RF = ( Φ x Rn - γD x DL ) / ( γLL x ( LL + I ) )
Applied Equation Rating Factor RF
a = ( As' * fy) / ( 0.85 *f'c * beff )
in Output
Load Rating LR LR = RF x ( Vehicle Weight )

SIG
84 SIMPLE
6.5.2 Continuous SIG

Sheet 1 ( GENERAL ) : Input Data of Bridge Description

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

*pc: for Prestressed Concrete

Note
Input Data Light blue cells should be filled up.
Differences compared
Simple or Continuous, Number of Span and Bridge Length.
with Simple SIG
It should be taken from GENERAL NOTE in the as built drawings or in the
Material Properties Standard Bridge Design. In case of non-availability of data, It should be taken
based on the Bridge Year Built. ( refer to Table shown in the above Table)

SIG
85 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 2 ( LAYOUT ) : Input a Bridge Layout and Dimension for Load Rating

* Only figure should be given

(in case of this screen, give
the "0.1７0" only)

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Light blue cells should be filled up, these are;
- Location of objective section
Input Data - Slab Dimension : Slab Thickness (Only figure should be given)
- Girder Dimension : Width and Height for Upper/Lower Flange and Web
- Length of objective section
Differences compared
Drawing of Bridge Elevation.
with Simple SIG
Drawings (Elevation, Cross Section and Steel Girder Details) for the objective
Drawings
bridge should be prepared as shown in this screen.

SIG
86 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 3 (DFDLLL ) : Demand Forces Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 272, 273 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Original section area of section "A" should be given. This data is prepared
Input Data in case section losses are observed in steel girder.
Load Demands on continuous bridge should be given.
Differences compared Load demands should be separately analyzed with appropriate
with Simple SIG structural Model.

SIG
87 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 4 (DSDLLL ) : Demand Forces and Stresses Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 273, 274in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier.
with Simple SIG
Applied Equation Moment = M / Sx ( = Y / Iz x M )
Stresses
in Output Shear = ( Shear forces ) / ( Web Area )

SIG
88 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 5 ( LRASM ) : Load Rating Calculations by ASM

According to the Instruction shown in

this screen, User have to click
a gray coloured cell "Return to
GENERAL" or "LOAD POSTING", then
proceed directly to the next screen.

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 274, 275 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Allowable compression stress, tensile stress and shear stress under inventory
Input Data
and operating should be given.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier.
with Simple SIG
Applied Equation Rating Factor RF RF = ( Φ x Rn - γD x DL ) / ( γLL x ( LL + I ) )
in Output Load Rating LR LR = RF x 33.0 ( Vehicle Weight )

SIG
89 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 6 ( POSTLL ) : Demand Forces and Stresses Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 276 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Differences compared Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier
with Simple SIG Load demands should be separately analized with appropriate structural Model.
Applied Equation Moment = M / Sx ( = Y / Iz x M )
Stresses
in Output Shear = ( Shear forces ) / ( Web Area )

SIG
90 CONTINUOUS
 Sheet 7 ( POSTLFM ) : Posting Rating Calculations

LOAD

After confirmation of this sheet, click "END

GO TO RC DECK SLAB" button then
proceed directly to the next screen.

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 276, 277 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Differences compared
Load Rating calculations should be done not only at Midspan but also at Pier.
with Simple SIG
RF = ( Φ x Rn - γD x DL ) / ( γLL x ( LL + I ) )
Applied Equation Rating Factor RF
a = ( As' * fy) / ( 0.85 *f'c * beff )
in Output
Load Rating LR LR = RF x ( Vehicle Weight )

SIG
91 CONTINUOUS
6.6 RCDECK (Reinforced Concrete Deck Slab)

Sheet 1 ( LAYOUT ) : Slab Layout and Rebar Schedule

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Drawings (Elevation and Cross Section) for the objective bridge should be
Drawings
prepared as shown in this screen.

92 RCDECK
 Sheet 2 (DFDLLL ) : Demand Forces Calculations

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 287, 288 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Light blue cells should be filled up and these Input data should be given
Input Data
the same as the objective Girder's Load rating.
Dead Continuous Slab = 1 / 10 x W x LS^2
Load Cantilever Slab =Σ(Wxl)
= ( LS + 0.61 ) / 9.74 x LL
Applied Equation Continuous Slab x ( Uniform Continuity = 0.8 ) x ( 1 + I )
in Output
Live
= LL x l x ( 1 + I ) / (E : Distribution Factor )
Load
Cantilever Slab where, E = 0.8 x ( X ) + 1.143
X : Wheel load distance from the curb

93 RCDECK
 Sheet 3 (CCLFM): Capacity Calculations for Moment

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 288, 289 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Light blue cells should be filled up, these are;
Rebar Rebar Schedule ( Diameter, Spacing and Cover )
Secton Losses of Concrete Section
Input Data Damage Evaluation
Secton Losses due to Rebar exposure caused by Moment
Should be given as same as the objective Girder's
Material Properties
Load rating.
Applied Equation MU = Uf x As' x fy x ( d - a )
Moment Capacity MU
in Output where, a = ( As' x fy) / ( 0.85 x f'c x beff )

94 RCDECK
 Sheet 4 ( LRLFM ) : Load Rating Calculations

According to the Instruction shown in

this screen, User have to click
a gray coloured cell "Return to
GENERAL" or "LOAD POSTING", then
proceed directly to the next screen.

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 289, 290 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

95 RCDECK
 Sheet 5 ( LRLFM ) : Load Posting Calculations by LFM

After confirmation of this sheet,

click "NEXT" button then
proceed directly to the next

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 290, 291 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.
Applied Equation Rating Factor RF = ( R - A1 x D ) / ( A2 x L ( 1 + I ) )
in Output Load Rating LR = RF x ( Each Posting Vehicle Wejght )

96 RCDECK
 Sheet 6 ( POSTSUM ) : Summary of Load Posting

LOAD

After confirmation of this sheet, click

"BACK TO LAYOUT" button then
proceed directly to the next screen.

Note
Refer to the manual calculation sheets as shown in the Appendix II "Load
Reference
Rating Examples" page 291 in the Manual for Load Rating of Bridges.
Verification Results of calculations should be verified.
Input Data Unnecessary.

97 RCDECK